texlive[49734] Master: revtex4-1 for compatibility
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Thu Jan 17 00:33:22 CET 2019
Revision: 49734
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=49734
Author: karl
Date: 2019-01-17 00:33:22 +0100 (Thu, 17 Jan 2019)
Log Message:
-----------
revtex4-1 for compatibility
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
trunk/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-publishers.tlpsrc
Added Paths:
-----------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxutil.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.dtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aip4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps10pt4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps11pt4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps12pt4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/aps4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/apsrmp4-1.rtx
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxfront.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxgrid.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/ltxutil.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/reftest4-1.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/revsymb4-1.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/tex/latex/revtex/revtex4-1.cls
trunk/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/revtex4-1.tlpsrc
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+\title{%
+ The \classname{revtex4-1} document class of the American Physical Society%
+ \protect\thanks{Work under hire to The American Physical Society.}%
+}%
+\author{Arthur Ogawa%
+ \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Using \protect\revtex}
+
+The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.
+
+User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.
+
+The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file.
+
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print at floats}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based code, other bug fixes}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds at letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu at dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT at sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle at ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter at footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes at sw}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if at twoside} with \cs{twoside at sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic at sw}, instead use \cs{setup at secnums}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms at section}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption at fignum@sep}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty at sw} to false}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse at class@options at society} and \cs{@parse at class@options at journal} and friends}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums at rtx} and \cs{secnums at arabic}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def at after@address}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup at hook} to initialize all.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle at post}}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{ @fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter at makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn at grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn at grid@setup}}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl}
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+
+\iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+This file has version number 4.1r, last revised 2010/07/25/20:33:00.\fi
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/00readme.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/DOWNLOAD 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+Last updated August 9, 2010
+
+To download REVTeX 4 (version 4.1), download the files listed below, or, more
+conveniently, download revtex4-1.zip which contains all of the files.
+
+All files in this release are contained within a second zip file within the
+main zip file called revtex4-1-tds.zip. This contains all of the REVTeX 4.1
+files in the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) layout used with most current TeX
+distributions. Install REVTeX 4.1 by unzipping the files in the appropriate
+place (usually the texmf-local directory of your local TeX installation) and
+run texhash or the equivalent command to index the files. Please consult your
+TeX distribution's guide for installing new packages.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+%% ****** Start of file README ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010.
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+
+Last updated 09 August 2010
+
+This file describes the contents of this distribution of REVTeX 4.1.
+The definitive source of information about REVTeX 4 is the APS web
+page http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/.
+
+User queries should be directed to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Manifest
+--------
+
+All files in this release are contained within the compressed archive
+revtex4-1.zip. For installation instructions, see below.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
+
+Recommended styles and packages
+--------------------------
+With REVTeX implemented as a native LaTeX2e document class, users can
+take advantage of many of the well-supported LaTeX2e packages available.
+Here are some that are particularly useful and recommended.
+
+longtable.sty for tables running to multiple pages - part of a
+standard LaTeX2e distribution.
+
+hyperref.sty for hyperlinking - should work well with REVTeX 4.1.
+
+graphics.sty and graphicx.sty for figure inclusion - part of LaTeX2e's
+standard distribution.
+
+Installation
+------------
+You already started the installation process by unzipping revtex4-1.zip.
+As you will have seen, it created a directory revtex4.1 containing
+this file README, the file DOWNLOAD, and the file revtex4-1-tds.zip, which
+contains the bulk of the installation.
+
+To install this software into a TDS-compliant TeX installation, like
+TeX Live, working as root, issue a shell command like
+
+ unzip revtex4-1-tds.zip -d /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local/
+
+where the destination for the unzipped files is, in this example,
+appropriate for a local modificaton of a sufficiently recent distribution
+of TeX Live. You may of course choose a different destination depending
+on your particular requirements.
+
+After installation, files will be located as per the Manifest above.
+
+Run the appropriate update command (mktexlsr, initexmf -u, etc.); under
+TeX Live that would be (as root)
+
+ mktexlsr /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local
+
+Install required packages (AMS-LaTeX, natbib, textcase, and bm).
+Please consult the documentaton for your local TeX package for more information.
+MikTeX users should use a recent version (see http://miktex.org/) and consult
+the documentation there. There are several steps you will have to do. Please
+note that the steps given here may change with future versions of MikTeX, but
+the basic steps should be quite similar.
+ 1) Create a texmf-local directory if needed. For example, you might create
+ a directory such as C:\local\miktex\texmf-local.
+ 2) Tell MikTeX where your texmf-local directory is. Find the MikTeX Options
+ window and look for the "Roots" tab. If your texmf-local directory
+ is not listed, click "Add" and add it.
+ 3) Unzip the revtex4-1-tds.zip (part of the REVTeX distribtution) in your
+ texmf-local directory.
+ 4) Update the "File Name Database (FNDB)." This step is essential and
+ it registers all of the files in your texmf-local directory with MikTeX.
+ Do this by clicking on "Refresh FNDB" in the General tab of the MikTeX
+ Options window.
+
+MikTex also comes with a package manager. This can be an easier way to maintain
+the packages installed on your system. However, please note that the packages
+available may not be the most current version of the packages.
+
+Credits
+-------
+David Carlisle created the first draft of REVTeX 4; Arthur Ogawa has
+supported the TeX development since. Patrick Daly was so kind as to
+incorporate needed changes into natbib and custom-bib. All worked under
+commission from the APS. Mark Doyle, APS Assistant Director, Journal
+Information Systems coordinated the effort, which was partly underwritten
+by the American Institute of Physics. The APS is the maintainer of REVTeX,
+and all bugs are our responsibility. Please e-mail feedback to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Backwards compatibility
+-----------------------
+The REVTeX 4.1 class file has been named revtex4-1.cls to distinguish it
+from its predecessors. If the class file is copied to revtex4.cls,
+files created with earlier versions of REVTeX 4 should still work.
+
+LaTeX2e requirements
+--------------------
+REVTeX 4 requires:
+LaTeX2e [1996/06/01],
+natbib [2009/11/07]
+textcase
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/README
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3487 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipauth4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible aipauth4-1.bst 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs aipauth4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #1 +
+ #8 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #0
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ format.pages
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ", " * format.pages * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ *
+ warning$
+ pop$ ""
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "year" bibinfo.check
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ format.date.output.check
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ nameptr
+ #2
+ =
+ numnames
+ #3
+ > and
+ {
+ "others" 't :=
+ #1 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.sort
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.sort
+ 'author.sort
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipauth4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipauth4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3477 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `aipnum4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,mcite,mct-1,mct-x3,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,blkyear,yr-par,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible aipnum4-1.bst 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs aipnum4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #8 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #1
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ format.pages
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ", " * format.pages * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ *
+ warning$
+ pop$ ""
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "year" bibinfo.check
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ format.date.output.check
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ nameptr
+ #2
+ =
+ numnames
+ #3
+ > and
+ {
+ "others" 't :=
+ #1 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * } 'skip$ if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+ seq.num int.to.fix
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `aipnum4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/aipnum4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3457 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrev4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,seq-no,vonx,nm-init,ed-au,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,blkyear,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-x,volp-com,jpg-1,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-date,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-pub,pre-edn,doi-link,doi,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible Phys Rev 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs apsrev4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #8 +
+ #64 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #1
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ format.pages
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ pages empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ", " * format.pages * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ *
+ warning$
+ pop$ ""
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "year" bibinfo.check
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ format.date.output.check
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter and pages"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.date.output.check
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ format.date.output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.date.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ format.name.apply
+ s num.names$ duplicate$
+ #2 >
+ { pop$
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ #2 <
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ bbl.and space.word *
+ s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ short.list key field.or.null = or
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ seq.num #1 + 'seq.num :=
+ seq.num int.to.fix
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrev4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrev4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3448 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `apsrmp4-1.bst',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `head,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% physjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% geojour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% photjour.mbs (with options: `ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% merlin.mbs (with options: `tail,ay,nat,lang,pres,pres-bf,vonx,nm-rev1,jnrlst,nmft,nmft-def,fnm-def,nmfted,nmand-rm,lab,lab-def,and-rm,keyxyr,dt-beg,yr-par,dtrev,date-nil-x,tit-qq,inproceedings-chapter,jtit-x,inproceedings-chapter,article-booktitle,article-series,jttl-rm,journal-address,book-bt,thesis-title-o,trtit-b,techreport-institution-par,vol-bf,vnum-sp,volp-com,jpg-1,pp-last,book-editor-booktitle,inbook-editor-booktitle,bookaddress,num-xser,number-cap,chapter-cap,series-number,numser-booktitle,ser-vol,ser-rm,volume-cap,ser-ed,jnm-x,pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,pub-par,ay-empty-pub-parens-x,pre-edn,school-par,doi-link,doi,bkedcap,edby,blk-com,fin-endbibitem,pp,ed,abr,ednx,ord,jabr,and-com,etal-it,revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,SLACcitation,numpages-x,url,url-prefix-x,bibinfo,bibfield,nfss,,{}')
+%% ----------------------------------------
+%% *** REVTeX-compatible RMP 2010-07-25 ***
+%%
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+ % ===============================================================
+ % IMPORTANT NOTICE:
+ % This bibliographic style (bst) file has been generated from one or
+ % more master bibliographic style (mbs) files, listed above.
+ %
+ % This generated file can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
+ % of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
+ % archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either
+ % version 1 of the License, or any later version.
+ % ===============================================================
+ % Name and version information of the main mbs file:
+ % For use with BibTeX version 0.99a or later
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % This bibliography style file is intended for texts in ENGLISH
+ % This is an author-year citation style bibliography. As such, it is
+ % non-standard LaTeX, and requires a special package file to function properly.
+ % Such a package is natbib.sty by Patrick W. Daly
+ % The form of the \bibitem entries is
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)]{key}...
+ % \bibitem[Jones et al.(1990)Jones, Baker, and Smith]{key}...
+ % The essential feature is that the label (the part in brackets) consists
+ % of the author names, as they should appear in the citation, with the year
+ % in parentheses following. There must be no space before the opening
+ % parenthesis!
+ % With natbib v5.3, a full list of authors may also follow the year.
+ % In natbib.sty, it is possible to define the type of enclosures that is
+ % really wanted (brackets or parentheses), but in either case, there must
+ % be parentheses in the label.
+ % The \cite command functions as follows:
+ % \citet{key} ==>> Jones et al. (1990)
+ % \citet*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith (1990)
+ % \citep{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep*{key} ==>> (Jones, Baker, and Smith, 1990)
+ % \citep[chap. 2]{key} ==>> (Jones et al., 1990, chap. 2)
+ % \citep[e.g.][]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., 1990)
+ % \citep[e.g.][p. 32]{key} ==>> (e.g. Jones et al., p. 32)
+ % \citeauthor{key} ==>> Jones et al.
+ % \citeauthor*{key} ==>> Jones, Baker, and Smith
+ % \citeyear{key} ==>> 1990
+ %---------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+FUNCTION {id.bst} {"merlin.mbs apsrmp4-1.bst 2010-07-25 4.21a (PWD, AO, DPC) hacked"}
+ENTRY
+{
+ address
+ archive
+ archivePrefix
+ author
+ bookaddress
+ booktitle
+ chapter
+ collaboration
+ doi
+ edition
+ editor
+ eid
+ eprint
+ howpublished
+ institution
+ isbn
+ issn
+ journal
+ key
+ language
+ month
+ note
+ number
+ organization
+ pages
+ primaryClass
+ publisher
+ school
+ SLACcitation
+ series
+ title
+ translation
+ type
+ url
+ volume
+ year
+}{
+}{
+ label
+ extra.label sort.label
+ short.list
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ output.state before.all
+ after.word after.punctuation
+ after.sentence after.block
+}
+
+INTEGERS
+{
+ punctuation.state punctuation.no punctuation.space punctuation.yes
+}
+
+STRINGS { bibfield output.bibfield }
+
+FUNCTION {not}
+{ { #0 }
+ { #1 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {and}
+{ 'skip$
+ { pop$ #0 }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {or}
+{ { pop$ #1 }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {non.stop}
+{ duplicate$
+ "}" * add.period$
+ #-1 #1 substring$ "." =
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.mulitplier arith.multiplicand }
+
+FUNCTION {multiply}
+{
+ 'arith.multiplicand :=
+ 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ #0
+ { arith.mulitplier #0 > }
+ { arith.multiplicand +
+ arith.mulitplier #1 - 'arith.mulitplier :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {chr.to.hex}
+{
+ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #9 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "A" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ "a" chr.to.int$ -
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #5 > or not
+ { swap$ pop$ #10 + }
+ { pop$
+ pop$ #-1
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { arith.accumulator }
+
+FUNCTION {str.to.hex}
+{ #0 'arith.accumulator :=
+ { duplicate$ empty$ not }
+ { duplicate$ #1 #1 substring$ chr.to.hex
+ duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$ pop$ ""
+ }
+ { arith.accumulator #16 multiply + 'arith.accumulator :=
+ #2 global.max$ substring$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ pop$ arith.accumulator
+}
+
+FUNCTION {diagn.cmntlog}
+{
+ duplicate$ top$ "%" swap$ * write$ newline$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { control.key control.author control.editor control.title control.pages control.eprint control.year }
+
+INTEGERS { control.author.jnrlst control.author.dotless control.author.nospace control.author.initials control.author.nocomma control.author.first control.author.reversed }
+
+FUNCTION { control.init }
+{
+ #0
+ 'control.key :=
+ #0
+ #1 +
+ #2 +
+ #8 +
+ #64 +
+ 'control.author :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.dotless :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nospace :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.initials :=
+ #0
+ 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.first :=
+ #1
+ 'control.author.reversed :=
+ #0
+ 'control.editor :=
+ #-1
+ 'control.title :=
+ #0
+ 'control.pages :=
+ #0
+ 'control.eprint :=
+ #1
+ 'control.year :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warning.dependency}
+{
+ " (dependency: " * swap$ * ") set " * swap$ int.to.str$ * warning$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.check}
+{
+ control.editor
+ {
+ "editor formatted same as author"
+ control.author.reversed {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "reversed" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.reversed :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.first {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "first" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.first :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.reversed 'skip$
+ {
+ "not reversed"
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "jnrlst" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.jnrlst :=
+ } if$
+ control.author.initials {
+ duplicate$ ", initials" *
+ control.author.dotless {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+ control.author.initials 'skip$ {
+ "not initials"
+ control.author.nocomma {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nocomma" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nocomma :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.nospace {
+ duplicate$ #0 swap$ "nospace" warning.dependency
+ #0 'control.author.nospace :=
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ duplicate$ #1 swap$ "dotless" warning.dependency
+ #1 'control.author.dotless :=
+ } if$
+ pop$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.parse}
+{
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$ pop$ pop$
+ }
+ { empty$
+ {
+ pop$ #-1
+ }{
+ str.to.hex
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.dump}
+{
+ duplicate$ missing$ { pop$ "N/A" } 'skip$ if$
+ "{" swap$ * "}, " *
+ *
+}
+
+INTEGERS { decode.threshold }
+
+FUNCTION {control.decode}
+{
+ - duplicate$
+ #0 <
+ {
+ skip$ pop$ swap$ #0
+ }
+ {
+ swap$ pop$ swap$ #1
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.decode}
+{
+ control.author
+ duplicate$ duplicate$ #0 < swap$ #128 < not or
+ {
+ int.to.str$ "(" swap$ * ")" *
+ "Control cannot interpret author " swap$ *
+ warning$
+ }{
+ 'control.author.jnrlst swap$ duplicate$ #64 control.decode
+ 'control.author.dotless swap$ duplicate$ #32 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nospace swap$ duplicate$ #16 control.decode
+ 'control.author.initials swap$ duplicate$ #8 control.decode
+ 'control.author.nocomma swap$ duplicate$ #4 control.decode
+ 'control.author.first swap$ duplicate$ #2 control.decode
+ 'control.author.reversed swap$ duplicate$ #1 control.decode
+ duplicate$ #0 =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ "Control: residue of author"
+ "(" swap$ * ")" * *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+ pop$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.setup}
+{
+ type$ cite$ "{" swap$ * "}, " * *
+ "control.key" key control.dump *
+ "control.author" author control.dump *
+ "control.editor" editor control.dump *
+ "control.title" title control.dump *
+ "control.pages" pages control.dump *
+ "control.year" year control.dump *
+ "control.eprint" eprint control.dump *
+ top$
+ 'control.key key control.parse
+ 'control.author author control.parse
+ 'control.editor editor control.parse
+ 'control.title title control.parse
+ 'control.pages pages control.parse
+ 'control.year year control.parse
+ 'control.eprint eprint control.parse
+ control.author.decode
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.setup 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.presort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.forward}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.reverse}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.sort}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.longest.label}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.key.bib}
+{
+ "Control: key "
+ control.key
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ pop$ *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.author.bib}
+{
+ "Control: author "
+ control.author "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ")" * *
+ control.author.reversed { " reversed" * }{} if$
+ control.author.first { " first" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nocomma { " nocomma" * }{} if$
+ control.author.initials { " initials" * }{} if$
+ control.author.nospace { " nospace" * }{} if$
+ control.author.dotless { " dotless" * }{} if$
+ control.author.jnrlst { " jnrlst" * }{} if$
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.editor.bib}
+{
+ "Control: editor formatted "
+ control.editor
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "identically to author"
+ } {
+ "differently from author"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.title.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of article title "
+ control.title
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "required"
+ } {
+ "allowed"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.pages.bib}
+{
+ "Control: page "
+ control.pages
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "none"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "range"
+ } {
+ "single"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.year.bib}
+{
+ "Control: year "
+ control.year
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$
+ "disabled!"
+ } {
+ #0 > {
+ "truncated"
+ } {
+ "verbatim"
+ } if$
+ } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.eprint.bib}
+{
+ "Control: production of eprint "
+ control.eprint
+ duplicate$ "(" swap$ int.to.str$ * ") " * swap$
+ #0 < { "disabled" } { "enabled" } if$ * *
+ diagn.cmntlog
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control.bib}
+{
+ control.key.bib
+ control.author.bib
+ control.editor.bib
+ control.title.bib
+ control.pages.bib
+ control.year.bib
+ control.eprint.bib
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.state.consts}
+{
+ #0 'before.all :=
+ #1 'after.word :=
+ #2 'after.punctuation :=
+ #3 'after.sentence :=
+ #4 'after.block :=
+ #0 'punctuation.no :=
+ #1 'punctuation.space :=
+ #2 'punctuation.yes :=
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ "" 'output.bibfield :=
+}
+
+STRINGS { s t}
+FUNCTION {block.punctuation}
+{ ""
+ "," *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.space}
+{
+ "\ "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.one}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {show.stackstring.two}{
+ "(" *
+ output.state int.to.str$ *
+ "," * punctuation.state int.to.str$ *
+ ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "1(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ "2(" swap$ * ")" * top$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibfield.command}{ "\bibfield "}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nonnull}
+{
+ swap$
+ output.state after.word =
+ {
+ block.punctuation *
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.punctuation =
+ {
+ word.space *
+ }
+ {
+ output.state after.block = output.state after.sentence = or
+ {
+ add.period$
+ "\EOS\ " *
+ }{
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ output.bibfield duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ bibfield.command
+ " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ write$
+ bibfield 'output.bibfield := "" 'bibfield :=
+ output.state after.block =
+ {
+ newline$
+ "\newblock " write$
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ punctuation.state duplicate$
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ punctuation.no =
+ { pop$ before.all }
+ { punctuation.yes = { after.word }{ after.punctuation } if$ }
+ if$
+ 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ "" 'bibfield :=
+ }
+ 'output.nonnull
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.nopunct}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ output.nonnull
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ { swap$ pop$ output.nonnull }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.open} { "\BibitemOpen " }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.shut} { "\BibitemShut " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.stop} { bbl.shut "{Stop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut.nostop} { bbl.shut "{NoStop}%" * }
+
+FUNCTION {bibitem.shut}
+{
+ non.stop
+ {
+ bibitem.shut.nostop *
+ }{
+ bibitem.shut.stop *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.itag} {
+ "p"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {html.ltag} {
+ ""
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.SLACcitation}
+{ SLACcitation empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ newline$
+ SLACcitation write$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {fin.entry}
+{
+ bibitem.shut
+ write$
+ output.SLACcitation
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block}
+{ output.state before.all =
+ 'skip$
+ { after.block 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence}
+{ output.state after.block = output.state before.all = or
+ 'skip$
+ { after.sentence 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.sentence.comma}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sentence.or.colon}
+{
+ new.sentence
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.blank}
+{
+ word.space *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {no.blank.or.punct}
+{
+ "\hspace {0pt}" *
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.block}
+{
+ new.block.comma
+ skip$
+}
+
+STRINGS {z}
+FUNCTION {remove.dots}
+{
+ control.author.dotless {
+ 'z :=
+ ""
+ { z empty$ not }
+ { z #1 #1 substring$
+ z #2 global.max$ substring$ 'z :=
+ duplicate$ "." = 'pop$
+ { * }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ } 'skip$ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {new.block.checkb}
+{ empty$
+ swap$ empty$
+ and
+ 'skip$
+ 'new.block
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {field.or.null}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {emphasize}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\emph {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bolden}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ { "\textbf {" swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.fname.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\bibfnamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\citenamefont {" swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {tie.or.space.prefix}
+{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 <
+ { "~" }
+ { word.space }
+ if$
+ swap$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {capitalize}
+{
+ "u" change.case$ "t" change.case$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {space.word}
+{ word.space swap$ * word.space * }
+
+ % Here are the language-specific definitions for explicit words.
+ % Each function has a name bbl.xxx where xxx is the English word.
+ % The language selected here is ENGLISH
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.and}
+{
+ "and"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.etal}
+{
+ "et~al."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editors}
+{
+ "eds."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.editor}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edby}
+{ "edited by" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.edition}
+{
+ "ed."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.volume}
+{
+ "vol."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.of}
+{ "of" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.number}
+{
+ "no."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nr}
+{ "no." }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.in}
+{ "in" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.pages}
+{
+ "pp."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.page}
+{
+ "p."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.eidpp}
+{ "pages" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.chapter}
+{
+ "chap."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.techrep}
+{
+ "Tech. Rep."
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.mthesis}
+{ "Master's thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.phdthesis}
+{ "Ph.D. thesis" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.first}
+{
+ "1st"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.second}
+{
+ "2nd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.third}
+{
+ "3rd"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fourth}
+{
+ "4th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.fifth}
+{
+ "5th"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.st}
+{ "st" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.nd}
+{ "nd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.rd}
+{ "rd" }
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.th}
+{ "th" }
+
+MACRO {jan} {"Jan."}
+
+MACRO {feb} {"Feb."}
+
+MACRO {mar} {"Mar."}
+
+MACRO {apr} {"Apr."}
+
+MACRO {may} {"May"}
+
+MACRO {jun} {"Jun."}
+
+MACRO {jul} {"Jul."}
+
+MACRO {aug} {"Aug."}
+
+MACRO {sep} {"Sep."}
+
+MACRO {oct} {"Oct."}
+
+MACRO {nov} {"Nov."}
+
+MACRO {dec} {"Dec."}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.url.prefix}
+{
+ "\urlprefix "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eng.ord}
+{ duplicate$ "1" swap$ *
+ #-2 #1 substring$ "1" =
+ { bbl.th * }
+ { duplicate$ #-1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "1" =
+ { pop$ bbl.st * }
+ { duplicate$ "2" =
+ { pop$ bbl.nd * }
+ { "3" =
+ { bbl.rd * }
+ { bbl.th * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{physjour.mbs}[2002/01/14 2.2 (PWD)]
+MACRO {aa}{"Astron. \& Astrophys."}
+MACRO {aasup}{"Astron. \& Astrophys. Suppl. Ser."}
+MACRO {aj} {"Astron. J."}
+MACRO {aph} {"Acta Phys."}
+MACRO {advp} {"Adv. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajp} {"Amer. J. Phys."}
+MACRO {ajm} {"Amer. J. Math."}
+MACRO {amsci} {"Amer. Sci."}
+MACRO {anofd} {"Ann. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {am} {"Ann. Math."}
+MACRO {ap} {"Ann. Phys. (NY)"}
+MACRO {adp} {"Ann. Phys. (Leipzig)"}
+MACRO {ao} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {apl} {"Appl. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {app} {"Astroparticle Phys."}
+MACRO {apj} {"Astrophys. J."}
+MACRO {apjsup} {"Astrophys. J. Suppl."}
+MACRO {apss} {"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {araa} {"Ann. Rev. Astron. Astrophys."}
+MACRO {baas} {"Bull. Amer. Astron. Soc."}
+MACRO {baps} {"Bull. Amer. Phys. Soc."}
+MACRO {cmp} {"Comm. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {cpam} {"Commun. Pure Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {cppcf} {"Comm. Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {cpc} {"Comp. Phys. Comm."}
+MACRO {cqg} {"Class. Quant. Grav."}
+MACRO {cra} {"C. R. Acad. Sci. A"}
+MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Eng. \& Design"}
+MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Tech."}
+MACRO {grg} {"Gen. Relativ. Gravit."}
+MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Trans. Nucl. Sci."}
+MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Trans. Plasma Sci."}
+MACRO {ijimw} {"Interntl. J. Infrared \& Millimeter Waves"}
+MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {irp} {"Infrared Phys."}
+MACRO {jap} {"J. Appl. Phys."}
+MACRO {jasa} {"J. Acoust. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {jcp} {"J. Comp. Phys."}
+MACRO {jetp} {"Sov. Phys.--JETP"}
+MACRO {jfe} {"J. Fusion Energy"}
+MACRO {jfm} {"J. Fluid Mech."}
+MACRO {jmp} {"J. Math. Phys."}
+MACRO {jne} {"J. Nucl. Energy"}
+MACRO {jnec} {"J. Nucl. Energy, C: Plasma Phys., Accelerators, Thermonucl. Res."}
+MACRO {jnm} {"J. Nucl. Mat."}
+MACRO {jpc} {"J. Phys. Chem."}
+MACRO {jpp} {"J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {jpsj} {"J. Phys. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jsi} {"J. Sci. Instrum."}
+MACRO {jvst} {"J. Vac. Sci. \& Tech."}
+MACRO {nat} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nature} {"Nature"}
+MACRO {nedf} {"Nucl. Eng. \& Design/Fusion"}
+MACRO {nf} {"Nucl. Fusion"}
+MACRO {nim} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth."}
+MACRO {nimpr} {"Nucl. Inst. \& Meth. in Phys. Res."}
+MACRO {np} {"Nucl. Phys."}
+MACRO {npb} {"Nucl. Phys. B"}
+MACRO {nt/f} {"Nucl. Tech./Fusion"}
+MACRO {npbpc} {"Nucl. Phys. B (Proc. Suppl.)"}
+MACRO {inc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {nc} {"Nuovo Cimento"}
+MACRO {pf} {"Phys. Fluids"}
+MACRO {pfa} {"Phys. Fluids A: Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {pfb} {"Phys. Fluids B: Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {pl} {"Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {pla} {"Phys. Lett. A"}
+MACRO {plb} {"Phys. Lett. B"}
+MACRO {prep} {"Phys. Rep."}
+MACRO {pnas} {"Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA"}
+MACRO {pp} {"Phys. Plasmas"}
+MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Phys. \& Controlled Fusion"}
+MACRO {phitrsl} {"Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {prl} {"Phys. Rev. Lett."}
+MACRO {pr} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {physrev} {"Phys. Rev."}
+MACRO {pra} {"Phys. Rev. A"}
+MACRO {prb} {"Phys. Rev. B"}
+MACRO {prc} {"Phys. Rev. C"}
+MACRO {prd} {"Phys. Rev. D"}
+MACRO {pre} {"Phys. Rev. E"}
+MACRO {ps} {"Phys. Scripta"}
+MACRO {procrsl} {"Proc. Roy. Soc. London"}
+MACRO {rmp} {"Rev. Mod. Phys."}
+MACRO {rsi} {"Rev. Sci. Inst."}
+MACRO {science} {"Science"}
+MACRO {sciam} {"Sci. Am."}
+MACRO {sam} {"Stud. Appl. Math."}
+MACRO {sjpp} {"Sov. J. Plasma Phys."}
+MACRO {spd} {"Sov. Phys.--Doklady"}
+MACRO {sptp} {"Sov. Phys.--Tech. Phys."}
+MACRO {spu} {"Sov. Phys.--Uspeki"}
+MACRO {st} {"Sky and Telesc."}
+ % End module: physjour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{geojour.mbs}[2002/07/10 2.0h (PWD)]
+MACRO {aisr} {"Adv. Space Res."}
+MACRO {ag} {"Ann. Geophys."}
+MACRO {anigeo} {"Ann. Geofis."}
+MACRO {angl} {"Ann. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {andmet} {"Ann. d. Meteor."}
+MACRO {andgeo} {"Ann. d. Geophys."}
+MACRO {andphy} {"Ann. Phys.-Paris"}
+MACRO {afmgb} {"Arch. Meteor. Geophys. Bioklimatol."}
+MACRO {atph} {"Atm\'osphera"}
+MACRO {aao} {"Atmos. Ocean"}
+MACRO {ass}{"Astrophys. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {atenv} {"Atmos. Environ."}
+MACRO {aujag} {"Aust. J. Agr. Res."}
+MACRO {aumet} {"Aust. Meteorol. Mag."}
+MACRO {blmet} {"Bound.-Lay. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {bams} {"Bull. Amer. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {cch} {"Clim. Change"}
+MACRO {cdyn} {"Clim. Dynam."}
+MACRO {cbul} {"Climatol. Bull."}
+MACRO {cap} {"Contrib. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {dsr} {"Deep-Sea Res."}
+MACRO {dhz} {"Dtsch. Hydrogr. Z."}
+MACRO {dao} {"Dynam. Atmos. Oceans"}
+MACRO {eco} {"Ecology"}
+MACRO {empl}{"Earth, Moon and Planets"}
+MACRO {envres} {"Environ. Res."}
+MACRO {envst} {"Environ. Sci. Technol."}
+MACRO {ecms} {"Estuarine Coastal Mar. Sci."}
+MACRO {expa}{"Exper. Astron."}
+MACRO {geoint} {"Geofis. Int."}
+MACRO {geopub} {"Geofys. Publ."}
+MACRO {geogeo} {"Geol. Geofiz."}
+MACRO {gafd} {"Geophys. Astrophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {gfd} {"Geophys. Fluid Dyn."}
+MACRO {geomag} {"Geophys. Mag."}
+MACRO {georl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {grl} {"Geophys. Res. Lett."}
+MACRO {ga} {"Geophysica"}
+MACRO {gs} {"Geophysics"}
+MACRO {ieeetap} {"IEEE Trans. Antenn. Propag."}
+MACRO {ijawp} {"Int. J. Air Water Pollut."}
+MACRO {ijc} {"Int. J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {ijrs} {"Int. J. Remote Sens."}
+MACRO {jam} {"J. Appl. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {jaot} {"J. Atmos. Ocean. Technol."}
+MACRO {jatp} {"J. Atmos. Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jastp} {"J. Atmos. Solar-Terr. Phys."}
+MACRO {jce} {"J. Climate"}
+MACRO {jcam} {"J. Climate Appl. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcm} {"J. Climate Meteor."}
+MACRO {jcy} {"J. Climatol."}
+MACRO {jgr} {"J. Geophys. Res."}
+MACRO {jga} {"J. Glaciol."}
+MACRO {jh} {"J. Hydrol."}
+MACRO {jmr} {"J. Mar. Res."}
+MACRO {jmrj} {"J. Meteor. Res. Japan"}
+MACRO {jm} {"J. Meteor."}
+MACRO {jpo} {"J. Phys. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {jra} {"J. Rech. Atmos."}
+MACRO {jaes} {"J. Aeronaut. Sci."}
+MACRO {japca} {"J. Air Pollut. Control Assoc."}
+MACRO {jas} {"J. Atmos. Sci."}
+MACRO {jmts} {"J. Mar. Technol. Soc."}
+MACRO {jmsj} {"J. Meteorol. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {josj} {"J. Oceanogr. Soc. Japan"}
+MACRO {jwm} {"J. Wea. Mod."}
+MACRO {lao} {"Limnol. Oceanogr."}
+MACRO {mwl} {"Mar. Wea. Log"}
+MACRO {mau} {"Mausam"}
+MACRO {meteor} {"``Meteor'' Forschungsergeb."}
+MACRO {map} {"Meteorol. Atmos. Phys."}
+MACRO {metmag} {"Meteor. Mag."}
+MACRO {metmon} {"Meteor. Monogr."}
+MACRO {metrun} {"Meteor. Rundsch."}
+MACRO {metzeit} {"Meteor. Z."}
+MACRO {metgid} {"Meteor. Gidrol."}
+MACRO {mwr} {"Mon. Weather Rev."}
+MACRO {nwd} {"Natl. Weather Dig."}
+MACRO {nzjmfr} {"New Zeal. J. Mar. Freshwater Res."}
+MACRO {npg} {"Nonlin. Proc. Geophys."}
+MACRO {om} {"Oceanogr. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {ocac} {"Oceanol. Acta"}
+MACRO {oceanus} {"Oceanus"}
+MACRO {paleoc} {"Paleoceanography"}
+MACRO {pce} {"Phys. Chem. Earth"}
+MACRO {pmg} {"Pap. Meteor. Geophys."}
+MACRO {ppom} {"Pap. Phys. Oceanogr. Meteor."}
+MACRO {physzeit} {"Phys. Z."}
+MACRO {pps} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pss} {"Planet. Space Sci."}
+MACRO {pag} {"Pure Appl. Geophys."}
+MACRO {qjrms} {"Quart. J. Roy. Meteorol. Soc."}
+MACRO {quatres} {"Quat. Res."}
+MACRO {rsci} {"Radio Sci."}
+MACRO {rse} {"Remote Sens. Environ."}
+MACRO {rgeo} {"Rev. Geophys."}
+MACRO {rgsp} {"Rev. Geophys. Space Phys."}
+MACRO {rdgeo} {"Rev. Geofis."}
+MACRO {revmeta} {"Rev. Meteorol."}
+MACRO {sgp}{"Surveys in Geophys."}
+MACRO {sp} {"Solar Phys."}
+MACRO {ssr} {"Space Sci. Rev."}
+MACRO {tellus} {"Tellus"}
+MACRO {tac} {"Theor. Appl. Climatol."}
+MACRO {tagu} {"Trans. Am. Geophys. Union (EOS)"}
+MACRO {wrr} {"Water Resour. Res."}
+MACRO {weather} {"Weather"}
+MACRO {wafc} {"Weather Forecast."}
+MACRO {ww} {"Weatherwise"}
+MACRO {wmob} {"WMO Bull."}
+MACRO {zeitmet} {"Z. Meteorol."}
+ % End module: geojour.mbs
+ %-------------------------------------------------------------------
+ % Begin module:
+ % \ProvidesFile{photjour.mbs}[1999/02/24 2.0b (PWD)]
+
+MACRO {appopt} {"Appl. Opt."}
+MACRO {bell} {"Bell Syst. Tech. J."}
+MACRO {ell} {"Electron. Lett."}
+MACRO {jasp} {"J. Appl. Spectr."}
+MACRO {jqe} {"IEEE J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {jlwt} {"J. Lightwave Technol."}
+MACRO {jmo} {"J. Mod. Opt."}
+MACRO {josa} {"J. Opt. Soc. America"}
+MACRO {josaa} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~A"}
+MACRO {josab} {"J. Opt. Soc. Amer.~B"}
+MACRO {jdp} {"J. Phys. (Paris)"}
+MACRO {oc} {"Opt. Commun."}
+MACRO {ol} {"Opt. Lett."}
+MACRO {phtl} {"IEEE Photon. Technol. Lett."}
+MACRO {pspie} {"Proc. Soc. Photo-Opt. Instrum. Eng."}
+MACRO {sse} {"Solid-State Electron."}
+MACRO {sjot} {"Sov. J. Opt. Technol."}
+MACRO {sjqe} {"Sov. J. Quantum Electron."}
+MACRO {sleb} {"Sov. Phys.--Leb. Inst. Rep."}
+MACRO {stph} {"Sov. Phys.--Techn. Phys."}
+MACRO {stphl} {"Sov. Techn. Phys. Lett."}
+MACRO {vr} {"Vision Res."}
+MACRO {zph} {"Z. f. Physik"}
+MACRO {zphb} {"Z. f. Physik~B"}
+MACRO {zphd} {"Z. f. Physik~D"}
+
+MACRO {CLEO} {"CLEO"}
+MACRO {ASSL} {"Adv. Sol.-State Lasers"}
+MACRO {OSA} {"OSA"}
+ % End module: photjour.mbs
+%% Copyright 1994-2007 Patrick W Daly
+MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."}
+
+MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."}
+
+MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"}
+
+MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."}
+
+MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."}
+
+MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Software Eng."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {ieeetcad}
+ {"IEEE Trans. Comput. Aid. Des."}
+
+MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."}
+
+MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"}
+
+MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."}
+
+MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Program."}
+
+MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."}
+
+MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Graphic."}
+
+MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Software"}
+
+MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Progr. Lang. Syst."}
+
+MACRO {tcs} {"Theor. Comput. Sci."}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.command} { "\bibinfo " }
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.check}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ pop$
+ pop$ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ pop$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command "{" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bibinfo.warn}
+{ swap$
+ duplicate$ missing$
+ {
+ swap$ "missing " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$ pop$
+ ""
+ }{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ swap$ "empty " swap$ * " in " * cite$ * warning$
+ }{
+ swap$
+ bibinfo.command " {" * swap$ * "} {" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.base}
+{
+ "http://arxiv.org/abs"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {archiv.prefix.base}
+{
+ "arXiv"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eprint.command}
+{
+ "\Eprint "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.eprint}
+{
+ eprint duplicate$ empty$
+ control.eprint #0 <
+ or
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ duplicate$
+ ""
+ archive duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ archiv.base } 'skip$ if$ *
+ "/" *
+ swap$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ swap$
+ ""
+ archivePrefix duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { ":" * } if$ *
+ swap$ *
+ primaryClass duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } { " [" swap$ * "]" * } if$ *
+ "{" swap$ * "} " *
+ *
+ eprint.command swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.translation}
+{ translation duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { ""
+ "\translation{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.url}
+{
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "\url "
+ "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames }
+
+FUNCTION {check.speaker}
+{ key empty$ 'skip$
+ { key nameptr int.to.str$ =
+ {
+ bolden
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+
+STRINGS { bibinfo}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.fname}
+{
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{}"
+ } {
+ "f{~}"
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "f{.}."
+ } {
+ "f."
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bracify}
+{
+ "{" swap$ * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {name.comma}
+{
+ control.author.nocomma 'skip$ { "," swap$ * } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.format.onefont}
+{
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f"
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." *
+ } if$
+ "~" *
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ swap$
+ } {
+ format.names.fname
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ }
+ if$
+ "jj"
+ " " swap$ *
+ name.comma
+ bracify
+ control.author.jnrlst 'skip$ 'swap$ if$
+ * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr format.names.format.onefont format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.morfont}
+{ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font
+ nameptr #1 >
+ control.author.first
+ and
+ control.author.reversed not
+ or
+ {
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ "f" % default: name + surname + comma junior
+ } {
+ "ff"
+ } if$
+ control.author.dotless 'skip$ {
+ "." * % nm-init % Initials. + surname (J. F. Smith) control.author.initials
+ } if$
+ bracify
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } {
+ "," *
+ s nameptr
+ format.names.fname
+ "jj"
+ " "
+ name.comma
+ control.author.jnrlst {
+ swap$ * skip$
+ } {
+ skip$ * swap$
+ } if$
+ bracify swap$ bracify swap$
+ *
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {names.punctuate}
+{
+ "," *
+ " " *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names}
+{ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ { pop$ "" } {
+ duplicate$ num.names$
+ duplicate$ 'numnames :=
+ 'namesleft :=
+ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ type$ "presentation" =
+ 'check.speaker
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 > not
+ {
+ t *
+ } {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ } {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ names.punctuate
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " *
+ bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+ } {
+ bbl.and
+ space.word *
+ t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.onefont}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.initials {
+ control.author.dotless {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvx|nm-rvcx
+ } {
+ "{f{~}~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rv
+ } if$
+ } {
+ control.author.nospace {
+ "{f{.}.~}{vv~}{ll}{ jj}" % nm-rvv|nm-rvvc
+ }{
+ "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" % nm-init|nm-rev|nm-rev1
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ } {
+ "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ bib.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed.morfont}
+{
+ control.author.reversed { %
+ control.author.initials { %
+ control.author.dotless { %
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvx nm-rvcx
+ "{f{}}"
+ } { % nm-rv
+ "{f{~}}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ remove.dots
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font " " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } { % !control.author.dotless
+ s nameptr
+ control.author.nospace { % nm-rvv
+ "{ff}"
+ } { % nm-rev nm-rev1
+ "{f.}"
+ } if$
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % Full names !control.author.initials nm-revf nm-revv1
+ s nameptr
+ "{ff}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ } { % !control.author.reversed nm-init
+ s nameptr
+ "{f.}"
+ format.name$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { tie.or.space.prefix bib.fname.font swap$ * }
+ if$
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ bib.name.font *
+ s nameptr
+ "{jj}" format.name$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { bib.fname.font ", " swap$ * }
+ if$
+ } if$
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.names.ed}
+{
+ control.editor #0 > {
+ format.names
+ } {
+ 'bibinfo :=
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ {
+ format.names.ed.morfont
+ bibinfo bibinfo.check
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ {
+ names.punctuate
+ t *
+ }{
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ { 't := }
+ { pop$ }
+ if$
+ numnames #2 >
+ 'names.punctuate
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal emphasize *
+ }{
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+ } if$
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.key}
+{ empty$
+ { key field.or.null }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.authors}
+{ author "author" format.names
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { collaboration "collaboration" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { " (" swap$ * ")" * }
+ if$
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ "author" 'bibfield :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {get.bbl.editor}
+{ editor num.names$ #1 > 'bbl.editors 'bbl.editor if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editors}
+{ editor "editor" format.names duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "," *
+ word.space *
+ get.bbl.editor
+ capitalize
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.isbn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.issn.output}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base}
+{
+ "http://dx.doi.org/"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {doi.base.command}
+{
+ "\doibase "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {noop.command}
+{
+ "\href at noop "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {href.command}
+{
+ "\href "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.open}
+{
+ doi duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$
+ url duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ pop$ "" noop.command
+ }{
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ {
+ doi.base.command swap$ *
+ href.command
+ }
+ if$
+ "{" * swap$ * "} {" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.tag.shut}
+{
+ "}"
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.open}
+{
+ link.tag.open output.nopunct
+}
+
+FUNCTION {link.shut}
+{
+ link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {add.doi}
+{
+ link.tag.open swap$ * link.tag.shut *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {select.language}
+{ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { language empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\selectlanguage {" language * "}" * swap$ * "}" * }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.note}
+{
+ note empty$
+ { "" }
+ { note #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "{" =
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "u" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ }
+ if$
+ note #2 global.max$ substring$ * "note" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bbl.enquote}
+{
+ "\enquote "
+}
+
+FUNCTION {string.enquote}
+{
+ punctuation.no 'punctuation.state :=
+ non.stop {
+ block.punctuation
+ } { "" } if$
+ swap$ pop$
+ *
+ bbl.enquote "{" * swap$ * "}" *
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.title}
+{ title
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "t" change.case$ } if$
+ duplicate$ "title" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ string.enquote
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {end.quote.title}
+{ title empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { before.all 'output.state := }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.name.apply}
+{
+ s nameptr
+ "{vv~}{ll}"
+ format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.full.names}
+{
+ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { format.name.apply
+ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ namesleft #1 >
+ { ", " * t * }
+ {
+ s nameptr "{ll}" format.name$ duplicate$ "others" =
+ {
+ 't :=
+ }
+ 'pop$
+ if$
+ t "others" =
+ {
+ " " * bbl.etal
+ emphasize *
+ }{
+ numnames #2 > { "," * }{ skip$ } if$
+ bbl.and
+ space.word * t *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ 't
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {make.full.names}
+{
+ key editor author
+ type$ "proceedings" =
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or { pop$ }{ { pop$ "" }{ swap$ pop$ "" swap$ } if$ } if$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$
+ cite$ #1 #3 substring$
+ }{
+ skip$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { swap$ pop$ swap$ pop$ format.full.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.bibitem}
+{
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ ""
+ "????" *
+ }{
+ skip$
+ } if$
+ extra.label *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.bibitem}
+{
+ newline$
+ ""
+ label
+ * ")" *
+ make.full.names duplicate$ short.list =
+ { pop$ }{ * } if$
+ bracify
+ "[" swap$ * "]" *
+ cite$ bracify "%" *
+ *
+ "\bibitem "
+ swap$ *
+ write$ newline$
+ " "
+ duplicate$ bbl.open * write$ newline$
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {n.dashify}
+{
+ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" =
+ { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not
+ { "--" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }{
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = }
+ { "-" *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+ }
+ if$
+ }{
+ t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {word.in}
+{
+ bbl.in
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {date.encapsulate}
+{
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ before.all 'output.state :=
+ " (" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date}
+{
+ year "year" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$
+ {
+ "empty year in " cite$ * "; set to ????" * warning$
+ pop$ "????"
+ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label *
+ date.encapsulate
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output.check}
+{
+ format.date
+ "year" output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.date.output}
+{
+ format.date.output.check
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.btitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ empty$ { pop$
+ title
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ "title" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {either.or.check}
+{ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.check.book}
+{ editor empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "can't use both author and editor fields in " cite$ *
+ ": try using @inbook instead" *
+ warning$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.bvolume}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "" }
+ {
+ "volume and number" number either.or.check
+ bbl.volume
+ capitalize
+ swap$
+ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * *
+ series "series" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ ", "
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number}
+{
+ bbl.number
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ #1 or
+ #0 and
+ 'skip$
+ { capitalize }
+ if$
+ number tie.or.space.prefix "number" bibinfo.check * *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.number.series}
+{ volume empty$
+ { number empty$
+ { series field.or.null }
+ {
+ series empty$
+ {
+ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ }{
+ format.number
+ series "series" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { "" }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {is.num}
+{ chr.to.int$
+ duplicate$ "0" chr.to.int$ < not
+ swap$ "9" chr.to.int$ > not and
+}
+
+FUNCTION {extract.num}
+{ duplicate$ 't :=
+ "" 's :=
+ { t empty$ not }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ duplicate$ is.num
+ { s swap$ * 's := }
+ { pop$ "" 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ s empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { pop$ s }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {convert.edition}
+{ extract.num "l" change.case$ 's :=
+ s "first" = s "1" = or
+ { bbl.first 't := }
+ { s "second" = s "2" = or
+ { bbl.second 't := }
+ { s "third" = s "3" = or
+ { bbl.third 't := }
+ { s "fourth" = s "4" = or
+ { bbl.fourth 't := }
+ { s "fifth" = s "5" = or
+ { bbl.fifth 't := }
+ { s #1 #1 substring$ is.num
+ { s
+ eng.ord
+ 't := }
+ { edition 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ t
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.edition}
+{ edition duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ convert.edition
+ output.state after.word = output.state after.punctuation = or
+ { "l" }
+ { "t" }
+ if$ change.case$
+ "edition" bibinfo.check
+ word.space * bbl.edition *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { multiresult }
+FUNCTION {multi.page.check}
+{ 't :=
+ #0 'multiresult :=
+ { multiresult not
+ t empty$ not
+ and
+ }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$
+ duplicate$ "-" =
+ swap$ duplicate$ "," =
+ swap$ "+" =
+ or or
+ { #1 'multiresult := }
+ { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := }
+ if$
+ }
+ while$
+ multiresult
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { duplicate$ multi.page.check
+ {
+ bbl.pages swap$
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ bbl.page swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ tie.or.space.prefix
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {first.page}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and }
+ { t #1 #1 substring$ *
+ t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.pages}
+{
+ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "pages" bibinfo.check word.space bbl.pages * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {volnum.punct}
+{
+ ","
+ word.space *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.pages}
+{ pages duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ pop$ format.pages }
+ { volnum.punct *
+ swap$
+ control.pages duplicate$ #0 < {
+ pop$ pop$
+ }{
+ #0 >
+ {
+ n.dashify
+ }{
+ first.page
+ } if$
+ } if$
+ "pages" bibinfo.check
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.journal.eid}
+{ eid "eid" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ { swap$ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ { volnum.punct * }
+ if$
+ swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {eid.or.pages}
+{
+ eid empty$
+ { format.journal.pages }
+ { format.journal.eid }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.ser.vol.num}
+{
+ series "series" bibinfo.check output
+ volume field.or.null
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ "volume" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ bolden
+ number "number" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ swap$
+ "~(" swap$ * ")" *
+ }
+ if$ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages}
+{ chapter empty$
+ {
+ ""
+ }
+ { type empty$
+ {
+ bbl.chapter
+ capitalize
+ }{
+ type
+ capitalize
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+ chapter tie.or.space.prefix
+ "chapter" bibinfo.check
+ * *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.booktitle}
+{
+ booktitle duplicate$ "booktitle" bibinfo.check swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ punctuation.yes 'punctuation.state :=
+ pop$ emphasize
+ select.language
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.editor.in}
+{
+ editor "editor" format.names.ed duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ bbl.edby
+ word.space * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {output.article.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle
+ "booktitle" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ "address" 'bibfield :=
+ output.nonnull after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook}
+{
+ format.booktitle duplicate$ empty$ 'pop$
+ {
+ add.doi
+ word.in swap$ * output.nonnull
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series "series and number" bibinfo.check output
+ format.bvolume output
+ author empty$ 'skip$
+ { format.editor.in "editor" bibinfo.check output }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.thesis.type}
+{ type duplicate$ empty$
+ 'pop$
+ { swap$ pop$
+ "t" change.case$ "type" bibinfo.check
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.tr.number}
+{ number "number" bibinfo.check
+ type duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ bbl.techrep }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ "type" bibinfo.check
+ swap$ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ "t" change.case$ }
+ { tie.or.space.prefix * * }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.article.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.book.crossref}
+{ volume duplicate$ empty$
+ { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$
+ pop$ word.in
+ }
+ { bbl.volume
+ swap$ tie.or.space.prefix "volume" bibinfo.check * * bbl.of space.word *
+ }
+ if$
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref}
+{
+ word.in
+ " \cite{" * crossref * "}" *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.org.or.pub}
+{ 't :=
+ ""
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ t }
+ { t duplicate$ empty$
+ { pop$ }
+ {
+ "," word.space *
+ * swap$ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ {
+ ""
+ "(" * swap$ * ")" *
+ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ punctuation.space 'punctuation.state :=
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.publisher.address}
+{ publisher "publisher" bibinfo.warn format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.address}
+{ organization "organization" bibinfo.check format.org.or.pub
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.organization.publisher.address}
+{
+ publisher empty$
+ { format.organization.address }
+ { organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ format.publisher.address
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.school.address.output}
+{
+ school "school" bibinfo.warn
+ address "address" bibinfo.check
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ swap$
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$
+ {
+ ", " *
+ }
+ if$
+ swap$
+ }
+ if$
+ *
+ duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ { "(" swap$ * ")" * } if$ after.punctuation 'output.state :=
+ output
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article.title.produce}
+{
+ control.title duplicate$ #0 <
+ { pop$
+ }{
+ format.title
+ "title" 'bibfield :=
+ swap$ #0 >
+ {
+ "title" output.check
+ }{
+ output
+ } if$
+ new.block.comma
+ } if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {control}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {article}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors
+ booktitle empty$ {
+ "author" output.check
+ }{ output } if$
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ article.title.produce
+ output.article.booktitle
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ link.open
+ journal
+ "journal" bibinfo.warn
+ "journal" 'bibfield :=
+ output
+ add.blank
+ format.ser.vol.num
+ output
+ eid.or.pages
+ pages empty$ {
+ doi output
+ } 'skip$ if$
+ link.shut
+ }{
+ format.article.crossref output.nonnull
+ eid.or.pages
+ }
+ if$
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ format.translation output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {book}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "author and editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+% crossref missing$ { editor.check.book } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ format.edition output
+ author empty$
+ {
+ }
+ {
+ format.editor.in output
+ editor format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.number.series output
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.bvolume output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.chapter.pages
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {booklet}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output date.block
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.book.pages output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {footnote}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.note output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inbook}
+{ output.bibitem
+ author empty$
+ {
+ format.editors "editor" output.check
+ editor format.key output
+ }{
+ format.authors output.nonnull
+ author format.key output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+
+ format.title output
+ new.block.comma
+
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle.inbook
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ format.publisher.address output
+ }{
+ format.chapter.pages
+ "chapter"
+ output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ format.book.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ crossref missing$
+ { format.isbn.output }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ format.pages "pages" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {incollection}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.edition output
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ format.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ format.chapter.pages output
+ }
+ if$
+ format.pages "pages" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {inproceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ article.title.produce
+ crossref missing$
+ {
+ format.in.ed.booktitle
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ }{
+ format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull
+ }
+ if$
+ format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check
+ format.pages "pages" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings }
+FUNCTION {manual}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ organization "organization" bibinfo.check output
+ address "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.edition output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {mastersthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.mthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {misc}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output
+ date.block
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ howpublished "howpublished" bibinfo.check output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {phdthesis}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ format.btitle
+ output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ bbl.phdthesis
+ format.thesis.type
+ output.nonnull
+ link.shut
+ format.school.address.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presentation}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors output
+ author format.key output
+ new.block.comma
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ output
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.organization.address "organization and address" output.check
+ month "month" output.check
+ year "year" output.check
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ new.sentence
+ type missing$ 'skip$
+ {"(" type capitalize * ")" * output}
+ if$
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {proceedings}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.editors output
+ editor format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ bookaddress "address" bibinfo.check output
+ format.number.series output
+ format.bvolume output
+ format.organization.publisher.address output
+ format.isbn.output
+ format.issn.output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {techreport}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output.check date.block
+ link.open
+ format.btitle
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ format.tr.number
+ output.nonnull
+ institution "institution" bibinfo.warn
+ format.org.or.pub output
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note output
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {unpublished}
+{ output.bibitem
+ format.authors "author" output.check
+ author format.key output
+ format.date.output date.block
+ link.open
+ format.title
+ "title" output.check
+ link.shut
+ new.block.comma
+ new.sentence.comma
+ format.note "note" output.check
+ format.eprint output
+ fin.entry
+}
+
+FUNCTION {default.type} { misc }
+
+READ
+
+EXECUTE {control.init}
+
+ITERATE {control.pass}
+
+EXECUTE {control.check}
+
+FUNCTION {sortify}
+{ purify$
+ "l" change.case$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { len }
+
+FUNCTION {chop.word}
+{ 's :=
+ 'len :=
+ s #1 len substring$ =
+ { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ }
+ 's
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {cite.name.font.apply}
+{
+ word.space * bbl.etal
+ emphasize
+ *
+}
+
+FUNCTION {format.lab.names}
+{ 's :=
+ "" 't :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ format.name.apply
+ s num.names$ duplicate$
+ #2 >
+ { pop$
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ #2 <
+ 'skip$
+ {
+ s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" =
+ {
+ cite.name.font.apply
+ }{
+ bbl.and space.word *
+ s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$
+ cite.name.font
+ *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.key.label}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ }
+ 'key
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor format.lab.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.short.authors}
+{ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.key.label
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.key.label
+ 'author.key.label
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ 'short.list :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {calc.label}
+{
+ calc.short.authors
+ short.list
+ year duplicate$ empty$
+ short.list key field.or.null = or
+ {
+ pop$ ""
+ "????" *
+ }{
+ control.year #0 > { purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ } 'skip$ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ "(" swap$ *
+ * 'label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.names}
+{ 's :=
+ #1 'nameptr :=
+ ""
+ s num.names$ 'numnames :=
+ numnames 'namesleft :=
+ { namesleft #0 > }
+ { s nameptr
+ "{ll{ }}"
+ control.author.initials {
+ "{ f{ }}" *
+ }{
+ "{ ff{ }}" *
+ } if$
+ "{ jj{ }}" *
+ format.name$ 't :=
+ nameptr #1 >
+ {
+ " " *
+ namesleft #1 = t "others" = and
+ { "zzzzz" * }
+ {
+ t sortify *
+ }
+ if$
+ }
+ { t sortify * }
+ if$
+ nameptr #1 + 'nameptr :=
+ namesleft #1 - 'namesleft :=
+ }
+ while$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {sort.format.title}
+{ 't :=
+ "A " #2
+ "An " #3
+ "The " #4 t chop.word
+ chop.word
+ chop.word
+ sortify
+ #1 global.max$ substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {author.editor.sort}
+{ author empty$
+ { editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+ }
+ { author sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {year.sort.key}
+{
+ year
+}
+
+FUNCTION {editor.sort}
+{ editor empty$
+ { key empty$
+ { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$
+ ""
+ }
+ { key sortify }
+ if$
+ }
+ { editor sort.format.names }
+ if$
+}
+
+INTEGERS { seq.num }
+
+FUNCTION {init.seq}
+{ #0 'seq.num :=}
+
+EXECUTE {init.seq}
+
+FUNCTION {int.to.fix}
+{ "000000000" swap$ int.to.str$ *
+ #-1 #10 substring$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.presort}
+{
+ calc.label
+ label sortify
+ " "
+ *
+ type$ "book" =
+ type$ "inbook" =
+ or
+ 'author.editor.sort
+ { type$ "proceedings" =
+ 'editor.sort
+ 'author.sort
+ if$
+ }
+ if$
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.label :=
+ sort.label
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {presort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.presort 'label.presort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {presort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+STRINGS { last.label next.extra }
+
+INTEGERS { last.extra.num number.label }
+
+FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label :=
+ "" 'next.extra :=
+ #0 'last.extra.num :=
+ #0 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.forward}
+{
+ last.label label =
+ { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num :=
+ last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label :=
+ }
+ { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num :=
+ "" 'extra.label :=
+ label 'last.label :=
+ }
+ if$
+ number.label #1 + 'number.label :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {label.reverse}
+{ next.extra "b" =
+ { "a" 'extra.label := }
+ 'skip$
+ if$
+ extra.label 'next.extra :=
+ extra.label
+ duplicate$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { "{\natexlab{" swap$ * "}}" * }
+ if$
+ 'extra.label :=
+ label extra.label * 'label :=
+}
+
+EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff}
+
+FUNCTION {forward.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.forward 'label.forward if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {forward.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {reverse.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.reverse 'label.reverse if$
+}
+
+REVERSE {reverse.pass}
+
+FUNCTION {sortkey.sort}
+{ sort.label
+ " "
+ *
+ year.sort.key
+ field.or.null sortify
+ *
+ " "
+ *
+ title field.or.null sort.format.title
+ *
+ #1 entry.max$ substring$
+ 'sort.key$ :=
+}
+
+FUNCTION {bib.sort.pass}
+{ type$ "control" = 'control.sort 'sortkey.sort if$
+}
+
+ITERATE {bib.sort.pass}
+
+SORT
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.eprint}
+{
+ "\texttt {"
+ pop$
+ "\providecommand \url [0]{\begingroup\@sanitize at url \@url }%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@url [1]{\endgroup\@href {#1}{" "}}%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " " [0]{URL }%" bbl.url.prefix swap$ * * write$ newline$
+ eprint.command "\providecommand " swap$ * "[0]{\href }%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.doi}
+{
+ "\providecommand \doibase [0]{" doi.base "}%" * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.hypertex}
+{
+ "\providecommand " noop.command "[0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand " href.command "[0]{\begingroup \@sanitize at url \@href}%" * * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@href[1]{\@@startlink{#1}\@@href}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@href[1]{\endgroup#1\@@endlink}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@sanitize at url [0]{\catcode `\\12\catcode `\$12\catcode `\&12\catcode `\#12\catcode `\^12\catcode `\_12\catcode `\%12\relax}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@startlink[1]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@@endlink[0]{}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.namefont}
+{
+ "\providecommand \bibnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibfnamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \citenamefont [1]{#1}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.quote}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.enquote * " [1]{" *
+ "``" "''"
+ "#1" swap$ "}%" * * * * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.ay}
+{
+ "\providecommand \natexlab [1]{#1}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.bibinfo}
+{
+ bibinfo.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+ bibfield.command "\providecommand " swap$ * " [0]{\@secondoftwo}%" * write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.lang}
+{
+ "\providecommand \selectlanguage [0]{\@gobble}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.endbibitem}
+{
+ "\providecommand " bbl.open * "[0]{}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemStop [0]{}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \bibitemNoStop [0]{.\EOS\space}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \EOS [0]{\spacefactor3000\relax}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib.translation}
+{
+ "\providecommand \translation [1]{[#1]}%" write$ newline$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {warn.bib}
+{
+}
+
+FUNCTION {init.bib}
+{
+ warn.bib
+ "\makeatletter" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifxundefined [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \@ifx{#1\undefined}" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifnum [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifnum #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ "\providecommand \@ifx [1]{%" write$ newline$
+ " \ifx #1\expandafter \@firstoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \else \expandafter \@secondoftwo" write$ newline$
+ " \fi" write$ newline$
+ "}%" write$ newline$
+ init.bib.ay
+ init.bib.quote
+ init.bib.namefont
+ init.bib.hypertex
+ init.bib.eprint
+ init.bib.doi
+ init.bib.lang
+ init.bib.bibinfo
+ init.bib.translation
+ init.bib.endbibitem
+ "\providecommand " bbl.shut * " [1]{\csname bibitem#1\endcsname}%" * write$ newline$
+ "\let\auto at bib@innerbib\@empty" write$ newline$
+ "%</preamble>" write$
+}
+
+FUNCTION {begin.bib}
+{
+ id.bst diagn.cmntlog
+ control.bib
+ preamble$ empty$
+ 'skip$
+ { preamble$ write$ newline$ }
+ if$
+ "\begin{thebibliography}{"
+ number.label int.to.str$
+ * "}%" *
+ write$ newline$
+ init.bib
+}
+
+EXECUTE {begin.bib}
+
+EXECUTE {init.state.consts}
+
+ITERATE {call.type$}
+
+FUNCTION {end.bib}
+{ newline$
+ "\end{thebibliography}%"
+ write$ newline$
+}
+
+EXECUTE {end.bib}
+
+%% End of customized bst file
+%%
+%% End of file `apsrmp4-1.bst'.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/bibtex/bst/revtex/apsrmp4-1.bst
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+\title{%
+ The \classname{revtex4-1} document class of the American Physical Society%
+ \protect\thanks{Work under hire to The American Physical Society.}%
+}%
+\author{Arthur Ogawa%
+ \protect\thanks{First revision of REV\TeX4.0 (unreleased) by David Carlisle}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the APS \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Using \protect\revtex}
+
+The file \file{README} has retrieval and installation information.
+
+User documentation is presented separately in \file{auguide.tex}.
+
+The file \file{template.aps} is a boilerplate file.
+
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/16}{Initial version}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so \cs{clearpage} not in scope of twocolumn}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Rearrange the ordering so numerical ones come first. AO: David, what does this mean?}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{use font-dependent spacing}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{4.0d had twoside option setting twoside switch to false}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{Move after process options, so the following test works}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{print homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/01/31}{protect against hyperref revtex kludges which are not needed now}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{comma not space between email and homepage}
+\changes{4.0a}{1998/06/10}{single space footnotes}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{First modifications by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal dot net)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{figuresname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Added localization of \cs{tablesname}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{10pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{11pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: all code for \protect\classoption{12pt} is in this module.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: made aps.rtx part of revtex4.dtx}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{AO: remove duplicates}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{call \cs{print at floats}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer assignment until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Defer decision until \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Define three separate environments, defer assignment to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Frank Mittelbach, has stated in \protect\classname{multicol}: ``The kernel command \cs{@footnotetext} should not be modified.'' Thus, I have removed David Carlisle's redefinition of that command. Note, however, that later versions of \protect\classname{multicol} do not require this workaround. Belt and suspenders.}%
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Move this ``complex'' option to the front, where it can be overridden by ``simple'' options.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{New option}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{One-line caption sets flush left.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{only execute if appropriate}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Processing delayed to \cs{AtBeginDocument} time}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Removed invocation of nonexistent class option \protect\classoption{groupauthors} and all other class options that should only be invoked by the document. (Otherwise precedence of class options does not work.)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Restore all media size class option of \protect\file{classes.dtx}}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Stack \cs{preprint} args flush right at right margin.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 115) If three or more preprints specified, set on single line, with commas.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{(AO, 129) section* within appendix was producing appendixname}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{*-form mandates pagebreak}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{also spelled ``acknowledgements''.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Do not put by REVTeX in every page foot}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes via ltxgrid procedures}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Insert procedure \cs{checkindate}}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Lose compatability mode.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New ltxgrid-based code, other bug fixes}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{New option ``checkin''}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{Prevent an inner footnote from performing twice}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{Also alter how lists get indented.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{eprint takes an optional argument, syntactical only in this case.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/04/10}{New option}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/10}{More features and bug fixes: compatability with longtable and array packages. Now certainly incompatible with multicol.}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/17}{make longtable trigger the head, too}
+\changes{4.0d}{2000/05/18}{But alternative spelling is deprecated.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{New option showkeys}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/14}{Bug fixes and minor new features: title block affiliations can have ancillary data, just like authors; clearpage processing revamped, with floats staying in order; widetext ornaments.}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/11/21}{adornments above and below.}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Last bug fixes before release.}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/17}{Running headers always as if two-sided}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc1}{2001/06/18}{grid changes with push and pop}
+\changes{4.0rc4}{2001/07/23}{hyperref is no longer loaded via class option: use a usepackage statement instead}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 451) ``Cannot have more than 256 cites in a document''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 457) Endnotes to be sorted in with numerical citations.}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 460) ``Proper style is "FIG. 1. ..." (no colon)''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 478) \cs{ds at letterpaper}, so that ``letterpaper really is the default''}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/18}{(AO, 488) Change processing of options to allow an unused option to specify society and journal}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{(AO, 461) Change the csname revtex uses from @dotsep to ltxu at dotsep. The former is understood in mu. (What we wanted was a dimension.)}%
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/01/19}{For natbib versions before 8.21, \cs{NAT at sort} was consulted only as natbib was being read in. Now it is fully dynamic.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/05/29}{The csname substyle at ext is now defined without a dot (.), to be compatible with \LaTeX usage (see @clsextension and @pkgextension).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{(AO) Implement bibnotes through \cs{frontmatter at footnote@produce} instead of \cs{bibnotes at sw}}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/01}{Add option reprint, opposite of preprint, and preferred alternative to twocolumn}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) Be nice to a list within the abstract (assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}).}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/30}{(AO) Structure the Abstract using the \texttt{bibliography} environment}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) coordinate \cs{if at twoside} with \cs{twoside at sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) make settings at class time instead of deferring them to later.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer need to test \cs{chapter} as of \texttt{natbib} version 8.2}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) No longer use \cs{secnumarabic at sw}, instead use \cs{setup at secnums}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) Provide more diagnostics when \cs{@society} is assigned.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{(AO) provide option longbibliography}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Add \cs{@hangfroms at section}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Break out \cs{@caption at fignum@sep}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Class option galley sets \cs{preprintsty at sw} to false}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Code relating to new syntax for frontmatter has been placed in \file{ltxfront.dtx}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Package textcase is now simply a required package}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Procedures \cs{@parse at class@options at society} and \cs{@parse at class@options at journal} and friends}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Read in all required packages together}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/07/01}{Remove options newabstract and oldabstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/01}{Section numbering via procedures \cs{secnums at rtx} and \cs{secnums at arabic}.}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{As with author formatting, rag the right more, and assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}. Also neutralize \cs{def at after@address}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Rag the right even more: .8\cs{hsize}. Also, assign \cs{@totalleftmargin}.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{The \texttt{rmp} journal substyle selects \texttt{groupedaddress} by default.}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Use \cs{setup at hook} to initialize all.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/15}{Document class option longbibliography via \cs{substyle at post}}
+\changes{4.1d}{2009/03/27}{Definition of \cs{ @fnsymbol} follows fixltx2e.sty}
+\changes{4.1e}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) be nice to a list within the abstract}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 513) Add class option linenumbers: number the lines a la \classname{lineno}}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 516) Merged references are separated with a semicolon}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/10}{(AO, 520) Automatically produce \cs{bibliography} command when needed}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 521) Lonely bibliography head}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/11}{(AO, 522) Warn if software is expired}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/15}{(AO, 523) Add class option nomerge, to turn off new natbib 8.3 syntax}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/20}{(AO, 524) Makes no sense if citations are superscript numbers and so are footnotes}
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 530) \cs{@fnsymbol}: Failed to import fixltx2e.sty technology. Return to LaTeX core.}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 525) Remove phantom paragraph above display math that is given in vertical mode}%
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/07}{(AO, 538) \cs{MakeTextUppercase} inappropriately expands the double backslash}
+\changes{4.1h}{2009/10/09}{(AO) Remove expiry code in the release software}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 541) Defer assignment of \cs{cite} until after natbib loads}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/24}{(AO, 549) Repairing natbib's \cs{BibitemShut} and \cs{bibAnnote}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 545) hypertext capabilities off by default; enable with \classoption{hypertext}}
+\changes{4.1j}{2009/10/25}{(AO, 552) Repair spacing in \cs{onlinecite}}
+\changes{4.1k}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 554) give the \cs{newlabel} command syntax appropriate to the hyperref package}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/06}{(AO, 565) restore 4.0 behavior: invoking class option preprint implies class option preprintnumbers}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 566) restore 4.0 behavior: flush column bottoms}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/05}{(AO, 569) Use of \classname{hyperref} interferes with column balancing of last page}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/09}{(AO, 569) execute the after-last-shipout procedures from within the safety of the output routine}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/13}{(AO, 573) arrange to load \classname{lineno} after any other packages.}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 575) the default for journal prstper is longbibliography}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/04}{(AO, 576) In .bst files, remove support for the annote field}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO) fine-tune spacing above and below widetext}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) class file must set \cs{splittopskip}; fine tune \cs{skip}\cs{footins}; \cs{footnoterule} defined in terms of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) \cs{@makefntext} and \cs{frontmatter at makefntext} must be defined harmoniously}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/02}{(AO, 575) Automatically incorporate the (Bib\TeX-generated) .bbl into an explicit \env{thebibliography}}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 549) Remove patch to natbib, which is now at version 8.31a}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/07}{(AO, 578) accommodate the possible space character preceding \cs{BibitemShut}.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/05}{(AO, 579) Endnote shall comprise their own Bib\TeX\ entry type: @FOOTNOTE.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/10}{(AO, 580) Provide a document class option to turn off production of eprint field in bibliography.}
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+\changes{4.1o}{2010/02/09}{(AO, 581) Handle case: merged references, with first ending in a stop character.}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 583) Provide interface to \classname{ltxgrid} \cs{onecolumn at grid@setup} and \cs{twocolumn at grid@setup}}
+\changes{4.1p}{2010/02/24}{(AO, 584) Per MD, remove trailing space character from each journal abbreviation: it had caused an extraneous space in the .bbl}
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/01}{(AO, 586) When .bbl is pasted into the document, prevent automatic bibliography inclusion.}%
+\changes{4.1q}{2010/04/13}{(AO, 588) Only write \revtex-specific BibTeX .bib data if the .bst style is set by REVTeX.}%
+\changes{4.1r}{2010/06/22}{(AO, 595) Provide \cs{lovname} along with other List of Videos definitions.}%
+
+\iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+This file has version number 4.1r, last revised 2010/07/25/20:33:00.\fi
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/00readme.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/DOWNLOAD 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+Last updated August 9, 2010
+
+To download REVTeX 4 (version 4.1), download the files listed below, or, more
+conveniently, download revtex4-1.zip which contains all of the files.
+
+All files in this release are contained within a second zip file within the
+main zip file called revtex4-1-tds.zip. This contains all of the REVTeX 4.1
+files in the TeX Directory Structure (TDS) layout used with most current TeX
+distributions. Install REVTeX 4.1 by unzipping the files in the appropriate
+place (usually the texmf-local directory of your local TeX installation) and
+run texhash or the equivalent command to index the files. Please consult your
+TeX distribution's guide for installing new packages.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample video frame for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+%% ****** Start of file README ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010.
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+
+Last updated 09 August 2010
+
+This file describes the contents of this distribution of REVTeX 4.1.
+The definitive source of information about REVTeX 4 is the APS web
+page http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/.
+
+User queries should be directed to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Manifest
+--------
+
+All files in this release are contained within the compressed archive
+revtex4-1.zip. For installation instructions, see below.
+
+NOTE: The only files necessary for running REVTeX 4.1 are those under
+tex/latex/revtex and bibtex/bst/revtex, but it is a good idea to install
+the entire distribution, especially the documentation.
+
+TeX inputs: tex/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+revtex4-1.cls - The REVTeX 4.1 class file
+aps4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+aip4-1.rtx - AIP-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1
+apsrmp4-1.rtx - APS-specific customizations for REVTeX 4.1,
+ specifically for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aps10pt4-1.rtx - 10-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps11pt4-1.rtx - 11-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+aps12pt4-1.rtx - 12-point size class option file for REVTeX.
+revsymb4-1.sty - A collection of common symbols for use outside of REVTeX.
+
+ltxdocext.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxfront.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxgrid.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+ltxutil.sty - Part of ltxgrid package used for page layout in REVTeX.
+
+BibTeX inputs: bibtex/bst/revtex/
+ ------------------
+apsrev4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Phys. Rev. journals
+apsrmp4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for use for Rev. Mod. Phys.
+aipauth4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with author/year style citations
+aipnum4-1.bst - BibTeX styles for AIP journals with numerical style citations
+
+
+Documentation: doc/latex/revtex/
+ -----------------
+README - How to get started
+DOWNLOAD - How to download REVTeX4.1
+
+Author guide: doc/latex/revtex/auguide/
+ ------
+auguide4-1.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Author's Guide
+whatsnew4-1.tex (pdf) - What's New in REVTeX 4.1
+summary.tex (pdf) - REVTeX 4.1 Command and Options Summary
+docs.sty - Package used by REVTeX documentation
+
+APS guide: doc/latex/revtex/aps
+ ------
+apsguide4-1.tex (pdf) - APS Author Guide for REVTeX 4.1
+
+AIP guide: doc/latex/revtex/aip
+ ------
+aipguide4-1.tex (pdf) - Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+
+APS Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps
+ -------
+apssamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an APS
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1a.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+vid_1b.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+apssamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+apstemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+AIP Sample document: doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip
+ -------
+aipsamp.tex (pdf) - A sample file showing most common features of an AIP
+ REVTeX 4.1 document
+fig_1.eps - sample figure for apssamp.tex
+fig_2.eps - sample wide figure for apssamp.tex
+aipsamp.bib - sample BibTeX source file for apssamp.tex
+aiptemplate.tex - A template for APS authors to follow
+
+
+Programmer's docs: doc/latex/revtex/source/
+ -------
+ltxdocext.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the revtex4-1 document class
+aip.pdf - Programmer's documentation for the AIP journal styles
+
+Source files: source/latex/revtex
+ -------------------
+ltxdocext.dtx - The source file for the ltxdocext package
+ltxfront.dtx - The source file for the ltxfront package
+ltxgrid.dtx - The source file for the ltxgrid package
+ltxutil.dtx - The source file for the ltxutil package
+revtex4-1.dtx - The source file for revtex4.cls and revsymb.sty.
+aip.dtx - The source file for AIP journal styles
+
+Not Included
+------------
+The following packages are required by REVTeX but are not
+included in this distribution. Please obtain from CTAN
+(Comprehensive TeX Archive Network), e.g. <http://www.ctan.org/>. Direct
+links to the necessary files can be found at <http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/>.
+
+natbib.dtx - Version 8.31a or later; found in latex/contrib/natbib on CTAN
+natbib.ins - LaTeX this to create natbib.sty and natbib
+ documentation from natbib.dtx
+bm.dtx - Bold math style - part of (current!) standard LaTeX2e tools
+bm.sty - generated from bm.dtx by running tools.ins
+textcase.dtx - Found in latex/contrib/textcase on CTAN
+textcase.ins - LaTeX this to generate textcase.sty from textcase.dtx
+url.sty - Found in latex/contrib/misc on CTAN
+
+An up-to-date installation of AMS-LaTeX is also required for certain
+documentclass options. Version 2.0 or higher is needed. It is
+available from <http://www.ams.org/tex/>.
+
+Recommended styles and packages
+--------------------------
+With REVTeX implemented as a native LaTeX2e document class, users can
+take advantage of many of the well-supported LaTeX2e packages available.
+Here are some that are particularly useful and recommended.
+
+longtable.sty for tables running to multiple pages - part of a
+standard LaTeX2e distribution.
+
+hyperref.sty for hyperlinking - should work well with REVTeX 4.1.
+
+graphics.sty and graphicx.sty for figure inclusion - part of LaTeX2e's
+standard distribution.
+
+Installation
+------------
+You already started the installation process by unzipping revtex4-1.zip.
+As you will have seen, it created a directory revtex4.1 containing
+this file README, the file DOWNLOAD, and the file revtex4-1-tds.zip, which
+contains the bulk of the installation.
+
+To install this software into a TDS-compliant TeX installation, like
+TeX Live, working as root, issue a shell command like
+
+ unzip revtex4-1-tds.zip -d /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local/
+
+where the destination for the unzipped files is, in this example,
+appropriate for a local modificaton of a sufficiently recent distribution
+of TeX Live. You may of course choose a different destination depending
+on your particular requirements.
+
+After installation, files will be located as per the Manifest above.
+
+Run the appropriate update command (mktexlsr, initexmf -u, etc.); under
+TeX Live that would be (as root)
+
+ mktexlsr /usr/local/texlive/texmf-local
+
+Install required packages (AMS-LaTeX, natbib, textcase, and bm).
+Please consult the documentaton for your local TeX package for more information.
+MikTeX users should use a recent version (see http://miktex.org/) and consult
+the documentation there. There are several steps you will have to do. Please
+note that the steps given here may change with future versions of MikTeX, but
+the basic steps should be quite similar.
+ 1) Create a texmf-local directory if needed. For example, you might create
+ a directory such as C:\local\miktex\texmf-local.
+ 2) Tell MikTeX where your texmf-local directory is. Find the MikTeX Options
+ window and look for the "Roots" tab. If your texmf-local directory
+ is not listed, click "Add" and add it.
+ 3) Unzip the revtex4-1-tds.zip (part of the REVTeX distribtution) in your
+ texmf-local directory.
+ 4) Update the "File Name Database (FNDB)." This step is essential and
+ it registers all of the files in your texmf-local directory with MikTeX.
+ Do this by clicking on "Refresh FNDB" in the General tab of the MikTeX
+ Options window.
+
+MikTex also comes with a package manager. This can be an easier way to maintain
+the packages installed on your system. However, please note that the packages
+available may not be the most current version of the packages.
+
+Credits
+-------
+David Carlisle created the first draft of REVTeX 4; Arthur Ogawa has
+supported the TeX development since. Patrick Daly was so kind as to
+incorporate needed changes into natbib and custom-bib. All worked under
+commission from the APS. Mark Doyle, APS Assistant Director, Journal
+Information Systems coordinated the effort, which was partly underwritten
+by the American Institute of Physics. The APS is the maintainer of REVTeX,
+and all bugs are our responsibility. Please e-mail feedback to revtex at aps.org.
+
+Backwards compatibility
+-----------------------
+The REVTeX 4.1 class file has been named revtex4-1.cls to distinguish it
+from its predecessors. If the class file is copied to revtex4.cls,
+files created with earlier versions of REVTeX 4 should still work.
+
+LaTeX2e requirements
+--------------------
+REVTeX 4 requires:
+LaTeX2e [1996/06/01],
+natbib [2009/11/07]
+textcase
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/README
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,428 @@
+%% ****** Start of file auguide.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the AIP distribution of substyles for REVTeX 4.1
+%% For version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009,2010 American Institute of Physics
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+ reprint,%
+%secnumarabic,%
+ amssymb, amsmath,%
+ aip,cha,%
+%groupedaddress,%
+%frontmatterverbose,
+]{revtex4-1}
+
+\usepackage{docs}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\hyphenation{title}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}%
+
+\author{AIP Journal Program}%
+\email{tex at aip.org}
+\affiliation{American Institute of Physics\\Suite 1NO1, 2 Huntington Quadrangle\\Melville, New York 11747-4502, USA}%
+
+\date{March 2010}%
+\revised{August 2010}%
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is the author's guide to the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.1,
+providing a useful formatting tool
+for \LaTeX\ users submitting papers to journals
+published by the American Institute of Physics.
+This guide is intended as an adjunct to the documentation for \revtex\ itself
+(published by the American Physical Society),
+so information contained therein is not repeated here,
+except as it bears on the specific features of the AIP substyles.
+
+
+\subsection{Prerequisite Documentation}
+
+The following documentation should be considered your first source of information
+on how to prepare your document for use with this format;
+they are to be found within the APS \revtex~4.1 distribution.
+Updated versions of these are maintained at
+the \revtex~4.1 homepage located at \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/},
+are also available at the Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network (CTAN, see \url{http://www.ctan.org/}),
+and form part of the \TeX Live distribution of \TeX.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.1}
+\item \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}
+\item \textit{What's New in \revtex~4.1}
+\end{itemize}
+The present guide builds upon these documents, with which you should already be familiar.
+
+The AIP substyles distribution for \revtex~4.1 includes
+a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}),
+a good starting point for
+the manuscript you are preparing for submission to an AIP journal.
+
+By using \revtex's \textit{Author's Guide to \revtex~4.1}, you can develop your
+document until it contains all of the content you desire.
+This guide informs you on document class options, commands, and
+markup guidelines specific to AIP journals.
+
+\subsection{Software Requirements}
+
+This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.1 installation including the AIP substyles.
+Please see the installation guide included with the distribution.\cite{Note1}
+
+Please note that the AIP substyles work {\it only} with \revtex~4.1:
+the original \revtex~4.0 release does {\it not} make the AIP substyle available, nor is it compatible with them.
+
+For your computer to run \revtex~4.1 with the AIP substyles, the following are required:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+a working installation of \LaTeX\,
+\item
+\revtex~4.1 and all packages it requires,
+\item
+the AIP substyles for \revtex~4.1, and
+\item
+any further \LaTeX\ packages used in your document.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The easiest way to obtain all of the needed software is to install an up-to-date distribution of \TeX,
+like \TeX Live, available on CTAN.
+
+To obtain the most up-to-date version of this software, please see \url{http://www.aip.org/pubservs/compuscript.html}.
+
+
+\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals}
+
+Authors preparing a manuscript for submission to
+AIP journals should consult the Information for Contributors for the applicable journal,
+available through links at \url{http://journals.aip.org/}.
+These requirements are not covered systematically in this author's guide;
+you are responsible for understanding the requirements of the particular journal to which
+you will submit your article.
+
+For further information about journal requirements, contact the Editorial
+Office of the appropriate journal. (Follow links at \url{http://journals.aip.org/}.)
+
+\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:resources}%
+Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies concerning the AIP journal substyles
+should be reported to AIP support at \href{mailto:tex at aip.org}{tex at aip.org}.
+Reports should include information on the error and a
+\textit{small} sample document that manifests the problem, if possible.
+(Please don't send large files!)
+
+Feedback concerning \revtex~4.1 itself should be sent, as usual,
+to the American Physical Society at\\ \href{mailto:revtex at aps.org}{revtex at aps.org}.
+
+To determine if the problem you are experiencing belongs to \revtex\ or is specific to the
+AIP substyles, simply remove \texttt{aip} from your document class options and rerun
+your document. If the problem goes away, you may assume that it is due to the AIP substyles;
+if not, it belongs to \revtex.
+
+\section{Sample \LaTeXe\ Document}
+As the \revtex\ documentation makes clear, your document employs a \LaTeXe\ document class
+(specifically \texttt{revtex4-1.cls}), so you should use
+the \LaTeXe\ commands and environments familiar to you with, say, the
+standard article class \texttt{revtex4-1.cls}, and you will be able to
+employ many of the packages you are used to using with \LaTeXe.
+
+Using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example,
+your document will start with the usual \revtex\ \cmd\documentclass\ statement, but with
+a particular document class option \texttt{aip} that specifies the AIP substyle:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+You will then invoke the \LaTeXe\-compatible packages your document requires, say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{graphicx}%
+\usepackage{dcolumn}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\end{verbatim}
+follow up with your document content:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{document}
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+and finish with a statement specifying your Bib\TeX\ database:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliography{aipsamp}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The books
+in the bibliography of this guide provide extensive coverage of all topics
+pertaining to preparing documents under \LaTeXe\; they are highly recommended.
+
+\section{\revtex\ Class Options Specific to AIP}
+
+\subsection{Journal Substyle}
+To access particular features of the AIP substyle, you will specify an additional document class option: the journal substyle, e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,jcp]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+in this case, \textit{J. Chem. Phys.}, the default.
+A complete list of AIP journals with the corresponding journal substyle appears in Table~\ref{tab:journals}.
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:journals}AIP journal substyles}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\textbf{Journal} & \textbf{class option} \\
+\itshape Appl. Phys. Lett. &\texttt{apl}\\
+\itshape Biomicrofluidics &\texttt{bmf}\\
+\itshape Chaos &\texttt{cha}\\
+\itshape J. Appl. Phys. &\texttt{jap}\\
+\itshape J. Chem. Phys. &\texttt{jcp}\footnotemark[1]\\
+\itshape J. Math. Phys. &\texttt{jmp}\\
+\itshape J. Renewable Sustainable Energy&\texttt{rse}\\
+\itshape Phys. Fluids &\texttt{pof}\\
+\itshape Phys. Plasmas &\texttt{pop}\\
+\itshape Rev. Sci. Instrum.&\texttt{rsi}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Default journal substyle.}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection{Options for Citations and Bibliography}
+The citation style for AIP journals is:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+numerical (default style),
+\item
+author-year, and
+\item
+numerical author-year,
+\end{itemize}
+the latter two styles being only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}
+
+The familiar numerical citations and numbered bibliography are the default for most journals:
+citations are superscript numbers, and the (numbered) bibliographic entries appear in the order cited.
+
+Author-year citations are only allowed for
+\textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}, with citations given in author-and-year format.
+Bibliographic entries are sorted by alphabetical order of first author's surname, then by year.
+
+Numerical author-year citations
+(only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.})
+are superscript numbers, just like numerical citations,
+but the bibliographic entries are sorted like the author-year entries and are numbered.
+This means that the first citation will not necessarily be~1.
+
+To obtain the numerical style, simply accept the default, or supply a class option of \texttt{numerical}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,numerical]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+For author-year citations for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.},
+you may specify the \texttt{author-year} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,author-year]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Each of the above two options are part of standard \revtex.
+
+To obtain numerical author-year citations
+for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.},
+give the author-numerical option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,author-numerical]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that the \texttt{author-numerical} option is not part of standard \revtex\, so use of it
+outside of the AIP substyles may not have any effect.
+
+\subsection{Formatting Options}
+There are two commonly used formats for an article you may write.
+One will comply with the manuscript submission formatting requirements of the editorial office of the journal you are submitting to.
+The other will emulate the format of your article in the published journal itself.
+
+For journal submission, accept the default, or you may specify the \texttt{preprint} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,preprint]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+To emulate the formatting of the journal, specify the \texttt{reprint} option:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-1}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that emulation is not by any means complete: the fonts used will differ, and therefore
+the length of the article will not represent an accurate estimate.
+Other details may also differ.
+
+A summary of class options of interest to AIP authors appears in Table~\ref{tab:options}.
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:options}Other class options}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\textbf{Function} & \textbf{class option} \\
+\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Citation and References}}\\
+superscript numbered&\texttt{numerical}\footnotemark[1]\textsuperscript{,}\footnotemark[2]\\
+author-year&\texttt{author-year}\footnotemark[3]\\
+numbered author-year&\texttt{author-numerical}\footnotemark[3]\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{l}{\textit{Format}}\\
+journal submission&\texttt{preprint}\footnotemark[1]\\
+journal emulation&\texttt{reprint}\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Default option.}%
+\footnotetext[2]{Standard}%
+\footnotetext[3]{Only allowed for \textit{Chaos} or \textit{J. Math. Phys.}}%
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup}
+\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to structure your file.
+In general, the use of low-level commands like \TeX\ primitives or Plain \TeX\ macros
+is less preferable.
+Please see the \revtex\ User's Guide,\cite{Note2}
+the \LaTeX\ manual,\cite{LaTeXman}
+and the \LaTeXe\ book\cite{Compan}
+for further details.
+
+\subsection{Title and Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+
+The \revtex\ User's Guide has complete information on using \revtex's special markup for your
+article's title, author list, abstract, and other front matter elements.
+Note that class option \texttt{superscriptaddress} is the default for the AIP substyles,
+as required by all AIP journals.
+
+\subsection{Lead Paragraph}
+One AIP journal, \textit{Chaos}, requires a paragraph of text to precede the first
+\cmd\section\ of the article;
+this is known as a lead paragraph and is formatted boldface.
+To give your article a lead paragraph,
+include a quotation environment ahead of the first \cmd\section\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[aip]{revtex4-1}
+\begin{document}
+ \begin{quotation}
+ Here is my lead paragraph!
+ \end{quotation}
+ \section{Introduction}
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \texttt{quotation} environment functions normally after the first \cmd\section\ command in the document.
+
+\section{Body}
+
+For general information on commands used in the body of the document, see the \revtex\ User's Guide.
+Herein are some features specific to the AIP author.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}
+
+If you are using numbered citations (numerical or numbered author-year),
+footnotes are by default incorporated into the reference section
+along with your bibliographic entries.
+This automated feature is only effective if you use Bib\TeX\ to prepare your
+bibliography.
+
+Author-year style bibliography does not lend itself to such a treatment,
+so by default footnotes appear in text as is usual.
+However, be advised that, if your article is accepted for publication,
+footnotes may be incorporated into text during the production process.
+
+\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes}
+
+The preparation of your bibliography ``by hand'' is possible;
+however, if you do so,
+you will be entirely responsible
+for compliance with submission requirements for your bibliographic entries,
+for incorporating any text footnotes into the references,
+and for checking bibliographic entries.
+(In this connection, you may find useful the file \texttt{reftest.tex}, distributed with \revtex.)
+
+There are numerous reasons to use Bib\TeX, not least because it automates the first and second of the above checks.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\protect\TeX}
+
+Refer to the \revtex\ User's Guide, the \LaTeX\ manual, and the Bib\TeX\ manual
+for full information about using Bib\TeX.
+
+When using Bib\TeX\, keep in mind that changing your bibliography style or citation style
+(via the document class options described above) will require you to rerun Bib\TeX.
+The standard litany (using \texttt{aipsamp.tex} as an example) for this is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+> latex aipsamp
+> bibtex aipsamp
+> latex aipsamp
+> latex aipsamp
+\end{verbatim}
+Here, the first invocation of \texttt{latex} has the effect of rewriting the
+\texttt{aipsamp.aux} file,
+and the invocation of \texttt{bibtex} creates a new \texttt{aipsamp.bbl} file.
+The next two runs of \texttt{latex} are then required:
+the first to update the \texttt{aipsamp.aux} file reflecting the new values of your citations
+and the second to employ those citations correctly.
+Be sure to check the end of the \texttt{aipsamp.log} file for any message advising you to
+rerun \texttt{latex}.
+
+\subsection{Multiple References per Citation}
+In an article using numerical citations,
+it is not uncommon to encounter the need for a citation
+that refers to more than one article or other reference.
+To accommodate such a case, \revtex~4.1 implements markup similar to that of the
+\texttt{mcite} package for \LaTeXe.
+
+Let's say that two citation keys \texttt{able} and \texttt{baker}
+need to be combined into a single reference.
+The syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+word\cite{able,*baker} further text
+\end{verbatim}
+When you run Bib\TeX\, the resulting bibliography will contain the two entries, but run together
+as a single numbered reference.
+In the \cmd\cite\ command argument, any cite key that starts with the * character
+signifies that its bibliographic entry is to be joined together with the one preceding it;
+the \texttt{*} may join together any number of entries into a single reference.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}\label{sec:TeXbooks}%
+\bibitem{Note1}
+For help regarding the installation of this software and its use, please send email to \href{mailto:tex at aip.org}{tex at aip.org}.
+%
+\bibitem{Note2}
+Available with the \revtex\ distribution, see \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}.
+%
+\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman}
+L. Lamport,
+\emph{\LaTeX\, a Document Preparation System}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996).
+%
+\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan}
+M. Goosens, F. Mittelbach, and A. Samarin,
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Companion}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994).
+%
+\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook}
+D. E. Knuth,
+\emph{The \TeX book}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986).
+%
+\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide}
+H. Kopka and P. Daly,
+\emph{A Guide to \LaTeXe}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995).
+%
+\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG}
+M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and F. Mittelbach,
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Graphics Companion}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997).
+%
+\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW}
+S. Rahtz, M. Goossens \emph{et al.},
+\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion}
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999).
+%
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/aipguide4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+% authguide.rty - macros for processing revguide.tex under \documentclass{revtex4}
+% Text entities
+\DeclareRobustCommand\SNG{\emph{Physical Review Style and Notation Guide}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\LUG{\emph{\LaTeX{} User's Guide \& Reference Manual}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\marglat{\marginpar[\textbf{2e}]{\textbf{2e}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\margrev{\marginpar[\textbf{4}]{\textbf{4}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmS{%
+ {\protect\the\textfont\tw@ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\BibTeX{{\rm B}{\sc ib}\TeX}
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\m}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\m at th\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\aarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}#1{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+ }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd at to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd at to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd at to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name at idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\file}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+%
+% Needed for index:
+%
+\def\ttt{\texttt}%
+\def\pfill{\ }%
+\def\efill{\ }%
+\let\scan at allowedfalse\relax
+%\makeindex
+\AtEndDocument{\@input@{\jobname.ind}\null}%
+%
+% Processing options
+%
+%
+% Layout: override revtex4|aps
+\c at secnumdepth2
+\prepdef\@verbatim{\topsep.5\baselineskip}%
+\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \listparindent 10\p@
+ \itemindent\listparindent
+ \leftmargin10\p@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@
+ \small
+ }%
+ \item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\renewenvironment{quote}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \leftmargin\z@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ }\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\leftmargini\parindent
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
+ \hspace\labelsep\ignorespaces
+ #1\unskip
+}%
+\def\toprule{\hline\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\colrule{\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\frstrut{\vrule height2.5ex width\z@ depth\z@\relax}%
+\def\lrstrut{\vrule height\z@ width\z@ depth.5ex\relax}%
+%
+% Klootches
+%
+\let\savenofiles\nofiles
+%
+% Patches:
+%
+%
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aip/docs.sty
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,429 @@
+%% ****** Start of file apsguide4-1.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.1 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010.
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\documentclass[twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, nobibnotes, aps, prd]{revtex4-1}
+%\usepackage{acrofont}%NOTE: Comment out this line for the release version!
+\newcommand{\revtex}{REV\TeX\ }
+\newcommand{\classoption}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\macro}[1]{\texttt{\textbackslash#1}}
+\newcommand{\m}[1]{\macro{#1}}
+\newcommand{\env}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\setlength{\textheight}{9.5in}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1\\(Version 1.0)}%
+
+\author{The American Physical Society}%
+\email[REVTeX Support: ]{revtex at aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 10, 2010}%
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Introduction}
+Articles published in American Physical Society journals are converted to
+an XML file during final journal production. Other formats such
+as PDF are derived directly from the XML, which constitutes the version of record.
+Even before journal production, the APS editorial process can make use
+of the information in a properly prepared manuscript. Information such
+as title, authors, affiliations, PACS codes, etc., can be automatically
+extracted and used to populate our manuscript database. References can
+also be culled, cross-checked for accuracy, and used to create a
+linked version for referees and editors. Moreover, time can be saved
+as referrals can be made electronically rather than by conventional
+mail. Thus, a well-prepared electronic manuscript can enhance the
+entire peer review process from author to reader while making the
+whole process less expensive. To this end, authors should follow the
+guidelines in this document when preparing their submissions to \textit{Physical Review Letters},
+ \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}, \textit{Physical Review A-E}, \textit{Physical Review Special Topics - Accelerators and Beams}, and \textit{Physical Review Special Topics - Physics Education Research}.
+
+Updated versions of this document will be made available at \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}. For more complete
+descriptions of how to use the \revtex\ 4.1 macros, please see the
+\textit{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.1
+distribution. Questions about \revtex\ 4.1 and using it to submit to APS journals may be
+emailed to \texttt{revtex at aps.org}.
+
+\section{Formatting}
+\subsection{Preprint, reprint, and twocolumn options}
+\revtex~4.1 offers a new \classoption{reprint} class option to typeset a manuscript
+in a format that is a close approximation to the actual journal's appearance. It should
+be emphasized that this is only an \textit{approximation}; a manuscript may be substantially different
+in length or appearance after it goes through our production process. This is mostly due to the choice
+of fonts and the scaling of figures.
+
+\revtex\ 4.1 is designed to
+make it straightforward to switch between two-column and single-column
+formatting just by changing the class option. Authors may submit with
+either the \classoption{reprint} or the \classoption{twocolumn} class options.
+The \classoption{preprint} primarily does three things: It increases
+the font size to 12pt, increases the line spacing, and changes the
+formatting to single column.
+
+\subsection{Paper size}
+Manuscripts should be submitted to APS formatted for letter size
+paper. Papers are sent electronically to referees who may
+want to print them out. Letter size formatting ensures that this will
+be trouble free for all referees.
+
+\section{Marking up front matter}
+Perhaps the most important macros are those
+pertaining to the markup of the front matter (title, authors,
+affiliations, abstract, PACS codes, etc.). Note that proper
+use of the \revtex\ 4.1 macros means that explicit centering environments
+in the front matter are not needed and should not be used.
+
+\subsection{Title}
+The title of the manuscript should be specified using the \m{title} macro. A
+double backslash {\textbackslash\textbackslash} may be used to force a line break in a long
+title.
+
+\subsection{Authors, affiliations, and collaborations}
+\label{sec:authors}
+\revtex\ 4.1 makes it straightforward to markup up author names and link them up properly with affiliations. Authors should let \revtex\ 4.1 do the work of grouping authors and affiliations and, if using the superscript style, numbering affiliations. Please follow these guidelines:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use a single \m{author} macro for each author's name. \revtex\ 4.1 automatically puts in all commas and the word `and.'
+\item Use the \m{surname} macro to explicitly indicate if an author's family name consists of more than one name or if the family name is not the author's last name.
+\item The \m{email} macro may be used to specify an author's e-mail
+address. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the
+e-mail address itself may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{homepage} macro may be used to specify a URL associated
+with an author. The \m{thanks} macro must not be used for this. Only the
+URL may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{altaffiliation} macro may be used to specify an alternate
+affiliation or temporary address for an author. The \m{thanks} macro
+must not be used for this. Only the affiliation
+may appear in the macro's required argument.
+\item The \m{thanks} macro may be used only if one of the more
+specific macros list above does not apply.
+\item Use a single \m{affiliation} for each affiliation.
+\item Superscripts linking authors to affiliations must be
+accomplished using the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option
+rather than putting in explicit superscripts by hand.
+\item A collaboration may be specified by using the \m{collaboration}
+macro. The \m{author} macro must not be used for collaborations.
+\end{itemize}
+\subsection{Abstract}
+The abstract must be specified using the \env{abstract}
+environment. Note that in \revtex\ 4.1, the abstract must come before
+the \m{maketitle} command. \revtex\ 4.1 now allows the the use of the \env{description}
+environment within the abstract to provide \textit{structured abstracts}. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished in the following manner:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\subsection{PACS codes}
+If supplying suggested PACS codes, they must be supplied as a
+comma-separated list using a single \m{pacs} macro.
+
+\section{References and footnotes}
+Authors are strongly encouraged
+to use Bib\TeX\ when preparing their bibliographies. If Bib\TeX\ is used, current production processes
+require that the \texttt{.bbl} file be included directly into the
+manuscript's main \texttt{.tex} file. \revtex\ 4.1 comes with two Bib\TeX\ style files for formatting
+references, one for the \textit{Physical Review} journals and one
+for \textit{Review of Modern Physics}. The Bib\TeX\ styles support the optional display of journal article titles in the bibliography. To display the titles, use the \texttt{longbibliography} class option.
+
+The following apply whether
+Bib\TeX\ is used or not.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Authors should use the \m{cite} and \m{bibitem} commands to create
+bibliographies and to refer to items in the bibliography. ``By hand"
+numbering of references should be avoided.
+\item \revtex~4.1 provides new syntax for combining multiple citations into a single entry in the bibliography and for putting extra text before and after a reference. Please refer to \textit{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide} included with the \revtex~4.1 distribution for full details.
+\item Footnotes must be specified using the \m{footnote}
+macro. \revtex\ 4.1 will place the footnotes in
+the bibliography for the \textit{Physical Review}
+journals. Please note that even if you don't use Bib\TeX, you may have to run Bib\TeX\ to get the footnotes to appear. Footnotes giving additional information about authors (such
+as e-mail addresses) must not be specified using the \m{footnote}
+macro (see Section~\ref{sec:authors}).
+\item Avoid custom footnotes using \m{footnotemark} and \m{footnotetext} [except in the context of tables (see
+Section~\ref{sec:tablenotes})].
+\item References should be formatted and specified according to the
+\textit{Physical Review Style Guide}. Note that using Bib\TeX\ automatically ensures this.
+\item In journal styles that use superscript citations (\textit{e.g.}, Phys.~Rev.~B), use \m{onlinecite} to create references that appear on the baseline (\textit{i.e.}, Ref.~4). For superscript citations, use the proper journal class option rather than creating superscripts by hand.
+\item URLs should be specified using the \m{url} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take
+care of this if the \texttt{url} field is used.
+\item E-print identifiers should be included using the \m{eprint} macro. Bib\TeX\ will automatically take care of this if the \texttt{eprint} field is used.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Body of the paper}
+\subsection{Sectioning and cross-referencing}
+For sectioning a manuscript, the basic rule is to use the appropriate
+sectioning commands (\m{section}, \m{subsection}, \m{subsubsection},
+\textit{etc.}). Cross-referencing a section must be done by using the
+proper \m{label} and \m{ref} commands. Cross-referencing by hand is
+not allowed. \m{part}, \m{chapter}, and \m{subparagraph} should not be
+used.
+
+\subsection{Appendices}
+Appendices should be specified using the \m{appendix} command which
+specifies that all following sections create with the \m{section}
+commands are appendices. If there is only one appendix, then the
+\m{appendix*} command should be used instead.
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+Any acknowledgments should be included by using the
+\env{acknowledgments} environment. Note that in \revtex~4.1, this is
+an environment and not a command.
+
+\subsection{Counters}
+No counters may be created and the standard ones may not be
+altered. If an exceptional label is needed for an equation, the \m{tag}
+command (requires the \classoption{amsmath} class option) should be used. Please
+note that the use of the \m{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package
+due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}.
+
+\subsection{Fonts}
+It is preferable to avoid the older \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ 2.09 macros for
+controlling fonts such as \m{rm}, \m{it}, \textit{etc.} Rather, it is
+better to use the macros introduced in \LaTeXe. If the older font
+commands are used (they really should be avoided!), be sure to use
+curly braces to properly limit the extent of the font
+change. \verb+{\bf ...}+ is the correct method.
+Commands for controlling text and math font changes are summarized in
+Table~\ref{tab:fonts}.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ and AMS-\LaTeX\ font summary.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lp{2in}}
+\m{textit} & Italics. Replaces \m{it}\\
+\m{textbf} & Bold face. Replaces \m{bf}\\
+\m{textrm} & Roman. Replaces \m{rm}\\
+\m{textsl} & Slanted. Replaces \m{sl}\\
+\m{textsc} & Small caps. Replaces \m{sc}\\
+\m{textsf} & Sans serif. Replaces \m{sf}\\
+\m{texttt} & Typewriter. Replaces \m{tt}\\
+\m{textmd} & Medium series\\
+\m{textnormal} & Normal\\
+\m{textup} & Upright\\
+\m{mathbf} & Bold face\\
+\m{mathcal} & Replaces \m{cal}\\
+\m{mathit} & Italics\\
+\m{mathnormal} & Replaces \m{mit}\\
+\m{mathsf} & Sans serif\\
+\m{mathtt} & Typewriter\\
+\m{mathfrak} & Fraktur: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\
+\m{mathbb} & Bold blackboard: Requires \classoption{amsfonts} or \classoption{amssymb} class option\\
+\m{bm} & Bold Greek and other math symbols: Requires
+\verb+\usepackage{bm}+ and may require the \classoption{amsfonts} class
+option
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+Bold Greek letters and other bold math symbols should be accomplished
+with the use of \texttt{bm.sty} which is distributed as a required
+tool with the latest versions of \LaTeXe\ and should be loaded via
+\verb+\usepackage{bm}+. This package introduces the \m{bm}
+macro. Some bold characters may require using the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option.
+
+New fonts may not be declared with \m{newfont}. Font attribute
+commands for selecting a font family, shape, and series are all
+disallowed; the standard \LaTeXe\ font selection macros list above
+should be used instead.
+
+Finally, the \m{symbol} macro is also not allowed.
+
+\subsection{Environments}
+\subsubsection{Lists}
+The standard list environments \texttt{itemize}, \texttt{enumerate},
+and \texttt{description} are allowed. The \m{item} macro with or without
+the optional argument is also allowed. Customization of the list environments
+(with macros such as \m{labelstyle}, \m{labelitemi}, \m{labelenumi},
+\m{itemsep}, etc.) is allowed but may be ignored in production.
+Generalized lists (\m{begin\{list\}}) and trivial lists
+(\m{begin\{trivlist\}}) are not allowed.
+
+\subsubsection{Other Environments}
+Creating generalized new environments with \m{newenvironment} is not
+allowed. Creating a new theorem environment with \m{newtheorem} is
+allowed though.
+
+The tabbing environment and the macros \m{=}, \m{$>$}, \m{`}, and
+\m{'} are allowed but may be ignored in production. Conversion
+programs used in production should recognize the escapes \m{a=},
+\m{a'}, and \m{a`} for using the corresponding accents within a
+tabbing environment though.
+
+The \env{verbatim} environment is allowed.
+
+\subsection{Boxes}
+Most boxes and macros to manipulate them are not allowed. These
+include \m{raisebox}, \m{parbox}, \m{minipage}, \m{rulebox},
+\m{framebox}, \m{mbox}, \m{fbox}, \m{savebox}, \m{newsavebox},
+\m{sbox}, \m{usebox}, and the environment \m{begin\{lrbox\}}. Rules
+produced with \m{rule} are not allowed.
+
+\subsubsection{Margin Notes}
+Margin notes created with \m{marginpar} are not allowed, as are the
+associated style parameters \m{marginparwidth}, \m{marginparsep}, and
+\m{marginparpush}.
+
+
+\section{Math Markup}
+In general, all math markup and the standard math environments from
+\LaTeXe\ are allowed. These include \m{begin\{math\}},
+\m{begin\{displaymath\}}, \m{begin\{equation\}},
+\m{begin\{eqnarray\}}, and \m{begin\{eqnarray*\}}. The shortcuts \$,
+\$\$, \m{[}, and \m{]} are allowed. In addition, authors may use
+almost all of the additional markup introduced by AMS-\LaTeX\ by using
+the \classoption{amsmath} class option. The explicit exceptions are
+\m{genfrac}, \m{boxed}, and \m{smash}. The markup contained in
+\texttt{amsextra} and \texttt{amsthm} may not be used
+though. Commutative diagrams created with the \texttt{amscd} package
+are acceptable.
+
+\section{Figures}
+\subsection{Figure inclusions}
+Figures should be included into a \revtex~4.1 manuscript by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ macros. \LaTeXe\ includes
+several powerful packages for including the files in various
+formats. The two main packages are \texttt{graphics} and
+\texttt{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called
+\m{includegraphics};
+they mainly differ in how arguments for
+controlling figure placement (\textit{e.g.}, scaling and rotation)
+are passed to the \m{includegraphics}.
+
+The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the
+figure and to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they
+fit best. If a figure needs to be referred to in the text,
+rather than manually numbering the figures a \m{label} should be added
+to the figure environment (best practice is to put the label within
+the argument of the \m{caption} command) and the \m{ref} macro should be used to
+reference this label. Figures that span the page should use the
+\m{figure*} environment. The \env{picture} environment must not be
+used directly (one can include an Encapsulated PostScript figure that
+was produced using the \env{picture} environment of course).
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:figplace}Figure placement}
+Figures should be placed as close as possible to the point where they are first
+referenced. There is no need to place all figures
+separately at the end of the manuscript and it is preferred that
+authors leave the figures in their natural locations. Authors may
+also find useful the \revtex~4.1 \classoption{floatfix} class option
+which adds emergency float placement processing to avoid ``stuck''
+floats which would otherwise be deferred to the end of the job (and
+can lead to the fatal \texttt{``Too many unprocessed floats''}
+message).
+
+
+\section{Tables}
+\label{sec:tables}
+The standard \LaTeXe\ table formatting environments are supported as is
+the use of the \texttt{longtable} package. Tables may be reformatted
+during production to meet APS style guidelines.
+Here are some helpful hints for trying to get tables formatted correctly:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Use the \texttt{longtable} package to get tables to break
+across pages.
+\item The macro \m{squeezetable} will reduce the font size of the
+table. This macro must occur within a group outside the table
+environment. The proper markup is:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\squeezetable
+\begin{table}
+...
+\end{table}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+\item Try using the float placement option \texttt{H} which will
+enable \LaTeX\ to break a float across pages. Long tables are more
+attractively set with \env{longtable} however.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}[H]
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}
+...
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Doubled rules and table formatting}
+\revtex\ 4.1 provides the \env{ruledtabular} environment which
+automatically puts the scotch rules (double lines) around tables and
+formats all enclosed \env{tabular} environments to the full width of
+the tables and improves inter-column spacing. This environment should
+be used whenever possible.
+
+\subsection{Wide tables}
+When typesetting using \classoption{twocolumn}, tables can either span
+a single column or both columns. Using the '\verb+*+'-ed version of
+the \env{table} or \env{longtable} environments produces wide tables
+that span the columns.
+
+Tables that are very wide and that may be better typeset in a
+landscape orientation (rotated 90 degrees) should be enclosed in a
+\env{turnpage} environment. This will place the rotated table on its own
+page. Note that some dvi previewers may not be able to show the table
+properly, but \texttt{dvips} and \texttt{pdflatex} work correctly.
+
+\subsection{Table placement}
+Tables should be placed as close as possible to the point where they
+are first referenced. There is no need to place all tables separately
+at the end of the manuscript and this is not desirable for APS
+purposes. The class option \classoption{floatfix} may be helpful for
+table placement as well as figure placement (see Section~\ref{sec:figplace}).
+
+\subsection{Aligning columns on a decimal point}
+The standard \LaTeXe\ macro package \classoption{dcolumn} should be
+used to accomplish this.
+
+\subsection{Tablenotes}
+\label{sec:tablenotes}
+Footnotes in tables (tablenotes) should use the \m{footnote}
+macro. However, if more than one reference to the same footnote is
+needed, authors may use \m{footnotetext} and \m{footnotemark}. This
+will produce notes (labeled by lower-case roman letters) inserted
+below the table rather than in the reference section or at the bottom
+of the page.
+
+
+\section{Author-defined macros}
+Authors may define convenience macros to save keystrokes. This means
+that the macros may not invoke \TeX\ macros such as \m{if} or other
+context dependent commands. Also, \LaTeXe\ provides three macros for
+declaring new commands: \m{providecommand}, \m{newcommand}, and
+\m{renewcommand} (as well as their `\verb+*+'-ed versions). These
+should be used. Authors may not use \TeX\relax's low-level commands
+\m{def}, \m{edef}, and \m{gdef}.
+
+\section{Summary}
+To ensure the best use of \TeX\ manuscripts, authors need to follow
+the guidelines specified here. Use of low-level formatting commands to
+finely control horizontal and vertical spacing may be ignored during
+production, or even worse, make it impossible to convert the
+manuscript to XML. Authors should keep
+things as simple as possible and correctly use the proper \revtex~4.1
+or \LaTeXe\ macros. Any questions about usage may be directed to
+\texttt{revtex at aps.org}.
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/aps/apsguide4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,1737 @@
+%% ****** Start of file authguide.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+,aps%
+ ,twocolumn%
+ ,secnumarabic%
+,amssymb, amsmath,nobibnotes, aps, prl, floatfix]{revtex4-1}
+\usepackage{docs}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide}%
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+\email{revtex at aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 2010}%
+\maketitle
+\tableofcontents
+\clearpage
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This is the author's guide to \revtex~4.1, the preferred submission
+format for all APS and AIP journals. This guide is intended to be a concise
+introduction to \revtex~4.1. The documentation has been separated out
+into smaller units to make it easier to locate essential
+information.
+
+The following documentation is also part of the \revtex~4.1
+distribution. Updated versions of these will be maintained at
+the \revtex~4.1 homepage located at \url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1}
+\item \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}
+\item \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}
+\item \textit{What's New in \revtex~4.1}
+\end{itemize}
+This guide assumes a working \revtex~4.1
+installation. Please see the installation instructions included with the
+distribution.
+\subsection{Changes in \revtex~4.1}
+The \revtex\ system for \LaTeX\ began its development in 1986 and has
+gone through three major revisions since then. \revtex~4 was released in August, 2001. Since that time,
+many user requests for new features were received. The main goals for \revtex~4.1 are to incorporate
+this user feedback and provide support for the journals of the American Institute of Physics (AIP) . It incorporates the following changes:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Added support for APS journal \textit{Physical Review Special Topics -- Physics Education Research}}.
+\item \textbf{Added support for AIP journals.} There is now an explicit \texttt{aip} society option along with support for AIP journals. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}. In addition, \revtex~4.1 provides an extensible system for the easy addition of new collections of journals.
+\item \textbf{Endnotes now ordered correctly.} Endnotes in the bibliography now appear in the correct order, interleaved with citations.
+\item \textbf{Multiple references in a single citation supported using a special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} One of the major new features in 4.1 made possible by the joint work on \texttt{natbib 8.3}. Multiple Bib\TeX\ entries can be combined into a single \cmd\bibitem\ command.
+\item \textbf{Free form text can be prepended and appended to a bibliographic entry using the special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} Often a citation in the bibliography will have explanatory text such as \textit{See also} or \textit{and references therein} before and after the actual citation. The new \revtex~4.1 \cmd\cite\ command allows the specification of both text to precede and follow a citation.
+\item \textbf{Structured Abstracts.} Use of the \texttt{description} environment in abstracts now provides for ``structured" abstracts.
+\item \textbf{Figures referring to videos now supported.} A ``figure" may now be labeled as a \textbf{Video} by using the \texttt{video} environment. A frame from the video may be included in the figure and a URL to link the caption's label to the online video also may be included. There is also a \cmd\listofvideos\ command.
+\item \textbf{Better support for arXiv.org in Bib\TeX\ } Three more Bib\TeX\ fields have been added: \texttt{SLACcitation}, \texttt{archivePrefix}, and \texttt{primaryClass} in addition to the existing field \texttt{eprint}.
+\item \textbf{Improved Bib\TeX\ \texttt{bst} files.} In addition to the new features above, numerous other improvements to the APS \texttt{bst} files have been made, including support for displaying journal article titles (using the new \texttt{longbibliography} option) and many fixes for \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}. Also, long author lists are no longer automatically truncated.
+\item \textbf{\cmd\footnote\ in \cmd\widetext\ and \texttt{table*} environments improved.} \cmd\footnote\relax s in the \cmd\widetext\ or \texttt{table*} environments are now correctly placed and formatted.
+\item \textbf{Email addresses no longer print twice on papers less than one page long.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{eqnarray} alignment improved.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\collaboration\ can be used with the \texttt{groupedaddress} option now.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{letterpaper} now ensured as default paper size.}
+\item \textbf{Table of Contents formatting improved.}
+\item \textbf{Support for the \texttt{longtable} package improved.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{reftest} restored.}
+\item \textbf{Compatibility with the \texttt{geometry, lineno, lscape} and \texttt{colortbl} packages improved.} For line numbering, rather than using \texttt{lineno.sty} directly, the \texttt{linenumbers} class option should be used (this will call in \texttt{lineno.sty} with a proper set of default parameters).
+\item \texttt{hyperref} \textbf{fixes}. Improvements were to make footnotes work better with the \texttt{hyperref} package. In particular, table footnotes were fixed. More anchors for \texttt{hyperref} were also added (titlepage, abstract, and acknowledgements).
+\item \textbf{Documents can have more than 256 \cmd\cite\ commands now.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\listoffigures\ and \cmd\listoftables\ fixed.}
+\item \textbf{Figure and table labels in captions now reflect proper APS style.}
+\item \textbf{RMP style files conform better to RMP style guidelines.}
+\item \textbf{Section heading upper-casing improved.}
+\item \textbf{Repeated characters at start of affiliation no longer disappear when using \texttt{groupedaddress} option.}
+\item \textbf{There have been many other bug fixes and improvements to the internal \texttt{ltxgrid} package as well.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{\revtex~4 Backwards Compatibility}
+Documents prepared under \revtex~4 should process correctly under \revtex~4.1. However, the formatting of the pages and, if using Bib\TeX, the references may change.
+
+
+
+\subsection{Submitting to APS Journals}
+
+Authors using \revtex~4.1 to prepare a manuscript for submission to
+\textit{Physical Review Letters}, \textit{Physical Review}, \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics},
+or other APS journals must also read the companion document \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1}
+distributed with \revtex\ and follow the guidelines detailed there.
+
+The \revtex~4.1 distribution includes both a template
+(\file{apstemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{apssamp.tex}).
+The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the
+following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for
+creating a paper using \revtex~4.1.
+
+Further information about submissions to the American
+Physical Society may be found at \url{http://publish.aps.org/}.
+
+\subsection{Submitting to AIP Journals}
+
+\revtex~4.1 includes support for the journals of the American Institute of Physics.
+The style files and authoring guides for these journals are distributed as part
+\revtex~4.1 distribution. The distribution includes both a template
+(\file{aiptemplate.tex}) and a sample document (\file{aipsamp.tex}).
+The template is a good starting point for a manuscript. In the
+following sections are instructions that should be sufficient for
+creating a paper using \revtex~4.1.
+
+
+
+More information may be found at
+\url{http://www.aip.org/pubservs/compuscript.html}. Please consult the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1} for more information about submissions to AIP journals, AIP styles files, and other AIP-specific information.
+
+\subsection{Contact Information}\label{sec:aipresources}%
+Any bugs, problems, or inconsistencies with \revtex\ or the APS journal style files should be reported to
+\revtex\ support at \verb+revtex at aps.org+. Reports should include information on the error and a \textit{small}
+sample document that manifests the problem if possible (please don't send large files!). Issues related to the AIP journal styles should be sent directly to \verb+tex at aip.org+.
+
+\section{Some \LaTeXe\ Basics}
+\revtex~4.1 must sometimes patch the underlying
+\LaTeX\ kernel. This means that \revtex~4.1 requires a fairly recent version of
+\LaTeXe. Versions prior to 2005/12/01 may not work
+correctly. \revtex~4.1 will be maintained to be compatible with future
+versions of \LaTeXe.
+
+\subsection{Useful \LaTeXe\ Markup}
+\LaTeXe\ markup is the preferred way to accomplish many basic tasks.
+
+\subsubsection{Fonts}
+
+Because \revtex~4.1 is based upon \LaTeXe, it inherits all of the
+macros used for controlling fonts. Of particular importance are the
+\LaTeXe\ macros \cmd{\textit}, \cmd{\textbf}, \cmd{\texttt} for changing to
+an italic, bold, or typewriter font respectively. One should always
+use these macros rather than the lower-level \TeX\ macros \cmd{\it},
+\cmd{\bf}, and \cmd{\tt}. The \LaTeXe\ macros offer
+improvements such as better italic correction and scaling in super-
+and subscripts for example. Table~\ref{tab:fonts}
+summarizes the font selection commands in \LaTeXe.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:fonts}\LaTeXe\ font commands}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Text Fonts}}\\
+\textbf{Font command} & \textbf{Explanation} \\
+\cmd\textit\marg{text} & Italics\\
+\cmd\textbf\marg{text} & Boldface\\
+\cmd\texttt\marg{text} & Typewriter\\
+\cmd\textrm\marg{text} & Roman\\
+\cmd\textsl\marg{text} & Slanted\\
+\cmd\textsf\marg{text} & Sans Serif\\
+\cmd\textsc\marg{text} & Small Caps\\
+\cmd\textmd\marg{text} & Medium Series\\
+\cmd\textnormal\marg{text} & Normal Series\\
+\cmd\textup\marg{text} & Upright Series\\
+ &\\
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textbf{Math Fonts}}\\
+\cmd\mathit\marg{text} & Math Italics\\
+\cmd\mathbf\marg{text} & Math Boldface\\
+\cmd\mathtt\marg{text} & Math Typewriter\\
+\cmd\mathsf\marg{text} & Math Sans Serif\\
+\cmd\mathcal\marg{text} & Calligraphic\\
+\cmd\mathnormal\marg{text} & Math Normal\\
+\cmd\bm\marg{text}& Bold math for Greek letters\\
+ & and other symbols\\
+\cmd\mathfrak\marg{text}\footnotemark[1] & Fraktur\\
+\cmd\mathbb\marg{text}\footnotemark[1] & Blackboard Bold\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Requires \classname{amsfonts} or \classname{amssymb} class option}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsubsection{User-defined macros}
+\LaTeXe\ provides several macros that enable users to easily create new
+macros for use in their manuscripts:
+\begin{itemize}
+\footnotesize
+\item \cmd\newcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\newcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\renewcommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\renewcommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\providecommand\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\item \cmd\providecommand\verb+*+\marg{\\command}\oarg{narg}\oarg{opt}\marg{def}
+\end{itemize}
+Here \meta{\\command} is the name of the macro being defined,
+\meta{narg} is the number of arguments the macro takes,
+\meta{opt} are optional default values for the arguments, and
+\meta{def} is the actually macro definiton. \cmd\newcommand\ creates a
+new macro, \cmd\renewcommand\ redefines a previously defined macro,
+and \cmd\providecommand\ will define a macro only if it hasn't
+been defined previously. The *-ed versions are an optimization that
+indicates that the macro arguments will always be ``short'' arguments. This is
+almost always the case, so the *-ed versions should be used whenver
+possible.
+
+The use of these macros is preferred over using plain \TeX's low-level
+macros such as
+\cmd\def{},\cmd\edef{}, and \cmd\gdef{}. APS authors must follow the
+\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1} when defining macros.
+
+\subsubsection{Symbols}
+
+\LaTeXe\ has added some convenient commands for some special symbols
+and effects. These are summarized in Table~\ref{tab:special}. See
+\cite{Guide} for details.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:special}\LaTeXe\ commands for special symbols and effects}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lc}
+Command & Symbol/Effect\\
+\cmd\textemdash & \textemdash\\
+\cmd\textendash & \textendash\\
+\cmd\textexclamdown & \textexclamdown\\
+\cmd\textquestiondown & \textquestiondown\\
+\cmd\textquotedblleft & \textquotedblleft\\
+\cmd\textquotedblright & \textquotedblright\\
+\cmd\textquoteleft & \textquoteleft\\
+\cmd\textquoteright & \textquoteright\\
+\cmd\textbullet & \textbullet\\
+\cmd\textperiodcentered & \textperiodcentered\\
+\cmd\textvisiblespace & \textvisiblespace\\
+\cmd\textcompworkmark & Break a ligature\\
+\cmd\textcircled\marg{char} & Circle a character\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\LaTeXe\ provides additional symbols in a
+separate package called \classname{latexsym}. To use these symbols, include
+the package using:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{latexsym}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Using \LaTeXe\ packages with \revtex}\label{sec:usepackage}%
+
+Many \LaTeXe\ packages are available, for instance, on CTAN at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/}
+and at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/}
+or may be available on other distribution media, such as the \TeX\
+Live CD-ROM \url{http://www.tug.org/texlive/}. Some of these packages
+are automatically loaded by \revtex~4.1 when certain class options are
+invoked and are, thus, ``required.'' They will either be distributed
+with \revtex\ or are already included with a standard \LaTeXe\
+distribution.
+
+Required packages are automatically loaded by \revtex\ on an as-needed
+basis. Other packages should be loaded using the
+\cmd\usepackage\ command. To load the
+\classname{hyperref} package, the document preamble might look like:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{revtex}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Some common (and very useful) \LaTeXe\ packages are \textit{a priori}
+important enough that \revtex~4.1 has been designed to be specifically
+compatible with them.
+A bug stemming from the use of one of these packages in
+conjunction with any of the APS journals may be reported by contacting
+\revtex\ support.
+\begin{description}
+\item[\textbf{AMS packages}] \revtex~4.1 is compatible with and depends
+ upon the AMS packages
+\classname{amsfonts},
+\classname{amssymb}, and
+\classname{amsmath}. In fact, \revtex~4.1 requires use of these packages
+to accomplish some common tasks. See Section~\ref{sec:math} for more.
+\revtex~4.1 requires version 2.0 or higher of the AMS-\LaTeX\ package.
+
+\item[\textbf{array and dcolumn}]
+The \classname{array} and \classname{dcolumn} packages are part of
+\LaTeX's required suite of packages. \classname{dcolumn} is required
+to align table columns on decimal points (and it in turn depends upon
+the \classname{array} package).
+
+\item[\textbf{longtable}]
+\file{longtable.sty} may be used for large tables that will span more than one
+page. \revtex~4.1 dynamically applies patches to longtable.sty so that
+it will work in two-column mode.
+
+\item[\textbf{hyperref}] \file{hyperref.sty} is a package by Sebastian Rahtz that is
+used for putting hypertext links into \LaTeXe\ documents.
+\revtex~4.1 has hooks to allow e-mail addresses and URL's to become
+hyperlinks if \classname{hyperref} is loaded.
+
+\item[\textbf{lineno}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{lineno.sty}. This package should only be loaded via the new \classoption{linenumbers} class option. See Section~\ref{sec:lineno} for more information.
+
+\item[\textbf{lscape}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{lscape.sty}.
+
+\item[\textbf{geometry}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{geometry.sty}.
+
+\item[\textbf{colortbl}] \revtex~4.1 improves compatibility with \classname{colortbl.sty}.
+
+\end{description}
+
+Other packages will conflict with \revtex~4.1 and should be
+avoided. Usually such a conflict arises because the package adds
+enhancements that \revtex~4.1 already includes. Here are some common
+packages that clash with \revtex~4.1:
+\begin{description}
+\item[\textbf{multicol}] \file{multicol.sty} is a package by Frank Mittelbach
+that adds support for multiple columns. In fact, early versions of
+\revtex~4.1 used \file{multicol.sty} for precisely this. \revtex~4.1
+incorporates its own support for multiple-column typesetting.
+
+\item[\textbf{cite}] Donald Arseneau's \file{cite.sty} is often used to provide
+support for sorting a \cmd\cite\ command's arguments into numerical
+order and to collapse consecutive runs of reference numbers. \revtex~4.1
+has this functionality built-in already via the \classname{natbib} package.
+
+\item[\textbf{mcite}] \revtex~4.1 already contains a lot of this
+functionality through its updated syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command and
+the latest \classname{natbib} package.
+
+\item[\textbf{endfloat}] The same functionality can be accomplished
+using the \classoption{endfloats} class option.
+
+\item[\textbf{float}] \texttt{float.sty} provides a mechanism for creating new float classes with just a few commands. \revtex~4.1 has limited compatible with float.sty. If attempting to use this package, be sure to put any \cmd\newfloat\ commands after the \verb+\begin{document}+ line.
+
+\end{description}
+
+\section{The Document Preamble}
+
+The preamble of a \LaTeX\ document is the set of commands that precede
+the \envb{document} line. It contains a
+\cmd\documentclass\ line to load the \revtex~4.1 class (\textit{i.e.},
+all of the \revtex~4.1 macro definitions), \cmd\usepackage\ macros to
+load other macro packages, and other macro definitions.
+
+\subsection{The \emph{documentclass} line}
+The basic formatting of the manuscript is controlled by setting
+\emph{class options} using
+\cmd\documentclass\oarg{options}\aarg{\classname{revtex4-1}}.
+The optional arguments that appear in the square brackets control the layout of the
+document. At this point, one only needs to choose:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Either the \classoption{aps} (default) or \classoption{aip} society option
+\item One of the chosen society's journal styles such as \classoption{prl} or \classoption{apl}
+\item A layout option such as \classoption{preprint} (single-column formatting), \classoption{reprint} (an approximation
+to the selected journal's actual layout which may be one- or two-column depending on the journal), or \classoption{twocolumn}
+\end{itemize}
+Usually, one would want to use \classoption{preprint} for draft papers. Paper size options are also
+available as well. In particular, \classoption{a4paper} is available
+as well as the rest of the standard \LaTeX\ paper sizes. A
+full list of class options is given in the \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command
+and Options Summary}.
+
+\subsection{Loading other packages}
+Other packages may be loaded into a \revtex~4.1 document by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ \cmd\usepackage\ command. For instance, to load
+the \classoption{graphics} package, one would use
+\verb+\usepackage{graphics}+.
+
+\section{The Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+
+After choosing the basic look and feel of the document by selecting
+the appropriate class options and loading in whatever other macros are
+needed, one is ready to move on to creating a new manuscript. After
+the preamble, be sure to put in a \envb{document} line (and put
+in an \enve{document} as well). This section describes the macros
+\revtex~4.1 provides for formatting the front matter of the
+article. The behavior and usage of these macros can be quite
+different from those provided in the \LaTeXe\ \classname{article} class.
+\subsection{Setting the title}
+
+The title of the manuscript is simply specified by using the
+\cmd\title\aarg{title} macro. A \verb+\\+ may be used to put a line
+break in a long title.
+
+\subsection{Specifying a date}%
+
+The \cmd\date\marg{date} command outputs the date on the
+manuscript. Using \cmd\today\ will cause \LaTeX{} to insert the
+current date whenever the file is run:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\date{\today}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Specifying authors and affiliations}
+
+The \revtex~4.1 macros for specifying authors and their affiliations are designed
+ to save labor for authors and during production. Authors and affiliations are
+arranged into groupings called, appropriately enough, \emph{author
+groups}. Each author group is a set of authors who share the same set
+of affiliations. Author names are specified with the \cmd\author\
+macro while affiliations (or addresses) are specified with the
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro. Author groups are specified by sequences of
+\cmd\author\ macros followed by \cmd\affiliation\ macros. An
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro applies to all previously specified
+\cmd\author\ macros which don't already have an affiliation supplied.
+
+For example, if Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit are both at Looney Tune
+Studios, while Mickey Mouse is at Disney World, the markup would be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\end{verbatim}
+The default is to display this as
+\begin{center}
+Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit\\
+\emph{Looney Tune Studios}\\
+Mickey Mouse\\
+\emph{Disney World}\\
+\end{center}
+This layout style for displaying authors and their affiliations is
+chosen by selecting the class option
+\classoption{groupedaddress}. Journal styles usually default this option,
+ so it need not be specified explicitly. The other major way of displaying this
+information is to use superscripts on the authors and
+affiliations. This can be accomplished by selecting the class option
+\classoption{superscriptaddress}. To achieve the display
+\begin{center}
+Bugs Bunny,$^{1}$ Roger Rabbit,$^{1,2}$ and Mickey Mouse$^{2}$\\
+\emph{$^{1}$Looney Tune Studios}\\
+\emph{$^{2}$Disney World}\\
+\end{center}
+one would use the markup
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note that \revtex~4.1 takes care of any commas and \emph{and}'s that join
+the author names together and font selection, as well as any
+superscript numbering. Only the author names and affiliations should
+be given within their respective macros. See below for further information
+regarding the proper way to add footnotes to author names and affiliations.
+
+There is a third class option, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, for
+controlling author/affiliation display. The default
+\classoption{groupedaddress} will actually sort authors into the
+approriate author groups if one chooses to specify an affiliation for
+each author. The markup:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\author{Mickey Mouse}
+\affiliation{Disney World}
+\author{Roger Rabbit}
+\affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+\end{verbatim}
+will result in the same display as for the first case given
+above even though Roger Rabbit is specified after Mickey Mouse. To
+avoid Roger Rabbit being moved into the same author group as Bugs
+Bunny, use the
+\classoption{unsortedaddress} option instead. In general, it is safest
+to list authors in the order they should appear and specify
+affiliations for multiple authors rather than one at a time. This will
+afford the most independence for choosing the display option. Finally,
+it should be mentioned that the affiliations for the
+\classoption{superscriptaddress} are presented and numbered
+in the order that they are encountered. These means that the order
+will usually follow the order of the authors. An alternative ordering
+can be forced by including a list of \cmd\affiliation\ commands before
+the first \cmd{\author} in the desired order. Then use the exact same
+text for each affilation when specifying them for each author.
+
+If an author doesn't have an affiliation, the \cmd\noaffiliation\
+macro may be used in the place of an \cmd\affiliation\ macro.
+
+
+\subsubsection{Collaborations}
+
+A collaboration name can be specified with the \cmd\collaboration\
+command. This is very similar to the \cmd\author\ command. In \revtex~4.1, it can
+be used with both the \classoption{superscriptaddress} and \classoption{groupedaddress} class options. The
+\cmd\collaboration\ command should appear at the end of the list of
+authors. The collaboration name will be appear centered in parentheses
+between the list of authors and the list of
+affiliations. Because collaborations
+don't normally have affiliations, one needs to follow the
+\cmd\collaboration\ with \cmd\noaffiliation.
+
+\subsubsection{Footnotes for authors, collaborations, affiliations or title}\label{sec:footau}
+
+Often one wants to specify additional information associated with an
+author, collaboration, or affiliation such as an e-mail address, an
+alternate affiliation, or some other ancillary information.
+\revtex~4.1 introduces several new macros just for this purpose. They
+are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item\cmd\email\oarg{optional text}\aarg{e-mail address}
+\item\cmd\homepage\oarg{optional text}\aarg{URL}
+\item\cmd\altaffiliation\oarg{optional text}\aarg{affiliation}
+\item\cmd\thanks\aarg{miscellaneous text}
+\end{itemize}
+In the first three, the \emph{optional text} will be prepended before the
+actual information specified in the required argument. In the APS journal style files, \cmd\email\ and \cmd\homepage\ no longer have a default value. However, in the AIP styles, each have a default text for their optional arguments
+(`Electronic address:' and `URL:' respectively). The \cmd\thanks\
+macro should only be used if one of the other three do not apply. Any
+author name can have multiple occurences of these four macros. Note
+that unlike the
+\cmd\affiliation\ macro, these macros only apply to the \cmd\author\
+that directly precedes it. Any \cmd\affiliation\ \emph{must} follow
+the other author-specific macros. A typical usage might be as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Bugs Bunny}
+\email[E-mail me at: ]{bugs at looney.com}
+\homepage[Visit: ]{http://looney.com/}
+\altaffiliation[Permanent address: ]
+ {Warner Brothers}
+\affiliation{Looney Tunes}
+\end{verbatim}
+This would result in the footnote ``E-mail me at: \texttt{bugs at looney.com},
+Visit: \texttt{http://looney.com/}, Permanent address: Warner
+Brothers'' being attached to Bugs Bunny. Note that:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Only an e-mail address, URL, or affiliation should go in the
+required argument in the curly braces.
+\item The font is automatically taken care of.
+\item An explicit space is needed at the end of the optional text if one is
+desired in the output.
+\item Use the optional arguments to provide customized
+text only if there is a good reason to.
+\end{itemize}
+
+The \cmd\collaboration\ , \cmd\affiliation\ , or even \cmd\title\ can
+also have footnotes attached via these commands. If any ancillary data
+(\cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, or
+\cmd\altaffiliation) are given in the wrong context (e.g., before any
+\cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation\
+command has been given), then a warning is given in the \TeX\ log, and
+the command is ignored.
+
+Duplicate sets of ancillary data are merged, giving rise to a single
+shared footnote. However, this only applies if the ancillary data are
+identical: even the order of the commands specifying the data must be
+identical. Thus, for example, two authors can share a single footnote
+indicating a group e-mail address.
+
+Duplicate \cmd\affiliation\ commands may be given in the course of the
+front matter, without the danger of producing extraneous affiliations
+on the title page. However, ancillary data should be specified for
+only the first instance of any particular institution's
+\cmd\affiliation\ command; a later instance with different ancillary
+data will result in a warning in the \TeX\ log.
+
+It is preferable to arrange authors into
+sets. Within each set all the authors share the same group of
+affiliations. For each author, give the \cmd\author\ (and appropriate
+ancillary data), then follow this author group with the needed group
+of \cmd\affiliation\ commands.
+
+If affiliations have been listed before the first
+\cmd\author\ macro to ensure a particular ordering, be sure
+that any later \cmd\affiliation\ command for the given institution is
+an exact copy of the first, and also ensure that no ancillary data is
+given in these later instances.
+
+
+Each journal class option has a default behavior for the placement of these
+ancillary information footnotes. For instance, the \classoption{prb} option puts all
+such footnotes at the start of the bibliography while the \classoption{prl}
+journal styles displays them on the first page. One can override a
+journal style's default behavior by specifying explicitly the class
+option
+\classoption{bibnotes} (puts the footnotes at the start of the
+bibliography) or \classoption{nobibnotes} (puts them on the first page).
+Please consult the documentation for the various journal style files for further information.
+
+\subsubsection{Specifying first names and surnames}
+
+Many authors have names in which either the surname appears first
+or in which the surname is made up of more than one name. To ensure
+that such names are accurately captured for indexing and other
+purposes, the \cmd\surname\ macro should be used to indicate which portion
+of a name is the surname. Similarly, there is a \cmd\firstname\ macro
+as well, although usage of \cmd\surname\ should be sufficient. If an
+author's surname is a single name and written last, it is not
+necessary to use these macros. These macros do nothing but indicate
+how a name should be indexed. Here are some examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author{Andrew \surname{Lloyd Weber}}
+\author{\surname{Mao} Tse-Tung}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{The abstract}
+An abstract for a paper is specified by using the \env{abstract}
+environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+Text of abstract
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note that in \revtex~4.1 the abstract must be specified before the
+\cmd\maketitle\ command and there is no need to embed it in an explicit
+minipage environment.
+
+\subsubsection{Structured abstracts}
+A new feature in \revtex~4.1 is support for \textit{structured abstracts}. A ``structured" abstract is an abstract divided into labeled sections. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished by using the \texttt{description} environment within the \texttt{abstract} environment. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{PACS codes}
+APS and AIP authors are asked to supply suggested PACS codes with their
+submissions. The \cmd\pacs\ macro is provided as a way to do this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\pacs{23.23.+x, 56.65.Dy}
+\end{verbatim}
+The actual display of the PACS numbers below the abstract is
+controlled by two class options: \classoption{showpacs} and
+\classoption{noshowpacs}. In particular, this is now independent of
+the \classoption{preprint} option. \classoption{showpacs} must be
+explicitly included in the class options to display the PACS codes.
+
+\subsection{Keywords}
+A \cmd\keywords\ macro may also be used to indicate keywords for the
+article.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\keywords{nuclear form; yrast level}
+\end{verbatim}
+This will be displayed below the abstract and PACS (if supplied). Like
+PACS codes, the actual display of the the keywords is controlled by
+two classoptions: \classoption{showkeys} and
+\classoption{noshowkeys}. An explicit \classoption{showkeys} must be
+included in the \cmd\documentclass\ line to display the keywords.
+
+\subsection{Institutional report numbers}
+Institutional report numbers can be specified using the \cmd\preprint\
+macro. If the \classoption{preprintnumbers} class option is specified, these will be displayed in the upper right corner of the first page. Multiple \cmd\preprint\ macros maybe supplied (space is
+limited though, so only three or less may actually fit). Please note that the \classoption{preprint} class option does not automatically invoke \classoption{preprintnumbers}.
+
+\subsection{maketitle}
+After specifying the title, authors, affiliations, abstract, PACS
+codes, and report numbers, the final step for formatting the front
+matter of the manuscript is to execute the \cmd\maketitle\ macro by
+simply including it:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\maketitle
+\end{verbatim}
+The \cmd\maketitle\ macro must follow all of the macros listed
+above. The macro will format the front matter in accordance with the various
+class options that were specified in the
+\cmd\documentclass\ line (either implicitly through defaults or
+explicitly).
+
+\section{The body of the paper}
+
+For typesetting the body of a paper, \revtex~4.1 relies heavily on
+standard \LaTeXe\ and other packages (particulary those that are part
+of AMS-\LaTeX). Users unfamiliar with these packages should read the
+following sections carefully.
+
+\subsection{Section headings}
+
+Section headings are input as in \LaTeX.
+The output is similar, with a few extra features.
+
+Four levels of headings are available in \revtex{}:
+\begin{quote}
+\cmd\section\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\subsection\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\subsubsection\marg{title text}\\
+\cmd\paragraph\marg{title text}
+\end{quote}
+
+Use the starred form of the command to suppress the automatic numbering; e.g.,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section*{Introduction}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+To label a section heading for cross referencing, best practice is to
+place the \cmd\label\marg{key} within the argument specifying the heading:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{\label{sec:intro}Introduction}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In some journal substyles, such as those of the APS,
+all text in the \cmd\section\ command is automatically set uppercase.
+If a lowercase letter is needed, use \cmd\lowercase\aarg{x}.
+For example, to use ``He'' for helium in a \cmd\section\marg{title text} command, type
+\verb+H+\cmd\lowercase\aarg{e} in \marg{title text}.
+
+Use \cmd\protect\verb+\\+ to force a line break in a section heading.
+(Fragile commands must be protected in section headings, captions, and
+footnotes and \verb+\\+ is a fragile command.)
+
+\subsection{Paragraphs and General Text}
+
+Paragraphs always end with a blank input line. Because \TeX\
+automatically calculates linebreaks and word hyphenation in a
+paragraph, it is not necessary to force linebreaks or hyphenation. Of
+course, compound words should still be explicitly hyphenated, e.g.,
+``author-prepared copy.''
+
+Use directional quotes for quotation marks around quoted text
+(\texttt{``xxx''}), not straight double quotes (\texttt{"xxx"}).
+For opening quotes, use one or two backquotes; for closing quotes,
+use one or two forward quotes (apostrophes).
+
+\subsection{One-column vs. two-column layouts}\label{sec:widetext}
+
+One of the hallmarks of \textit{Physical Review} and many of the AIP journals is their two-column
+formatting. \revtex~4.1 provides the \classoption{reprint} class option that provides for each
+journal class option a close approximation to the journal's actual production formatting. Note that
+the \classoption{reprint} option will give either one or two-column formatting as appropriate for the particular journal.
+For most APS and AIP journals, the \classoption{reprint} option will take care of formatting the front matter
+(including the abstract) as a single column and will typeset the body in two columns. \revtex~4.1 has its own
+built-in two-column formatting macros to provide well-balanced columns as well as reasonable control over the placement of floats in either
+one- or two-column modes. When drafting papers, it is common to use a one-column format. This is best achieved by using the
+\classoption{preprint} class option. Authors may override a particular journal's formatting by using the lower level options \classoption{onecolumn} and \classoption{twocolum}, but best practice is to stick with the \classoption{preprint} and \classoption{reprint} options.
+
+Please note that the \classoption{reprint} class option is only an \textit{approximation} of a journal's final layout. Because of font differences, figure rescaling, and other factors, authors should not expect the \classoption{reprint} option to give fully accurate estimates of an article's ultimate length after being typeset for the journal.
+
+Occasionally it is necessary to change the formatting from two-column to
+one-column to better accommodate very long equations that are more
+easily read when typeset to the full width of the page. This is
+accomplished using the \env{widetext} environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{widetext}
+long equation goes here
+\end{widetext}
+\end{verbatim}
+In two-column mode, this will temporarily return to one-column mode,
+balancing the text before the environment into two short columns, and
+returning to two-column mode after the environment has
+finished. \revtex~4.1 will also add horizontal rules to guide the
+reader's eye through what may otherwise be a confusing break in the
+flow of text. The
+\env{widetext} environment has no effect on the output under the
+\classoption{preprint} class option because this already uses
+one-column formatting.
+
+Use of the \env{widetext} environment should be restricted to the bare
+minimum of text that needs to be typeset this way. However, short pieces
+of paragraph text and/or math between nearly contiguous wide equations
+should be incorporated into the surrounding wide sections.
+
+Low-level control over the column grid can be accomplished with the
+\cmd\onecolumngrid\ and \cmd\twocolumngrid\ commands. Using these, one
+can avoid the horizontal rules added by \env{widetext}. These commands
+should only be used if absolutely necessary. Wide figures and tables
+should be accommodated using the proper \verb+*+ environments.
+
+\subsection{Cross-referencing}\label{sec:xrefs}
+
+\revtex{} inherits the \LaTeXe\ features for labeling and cross-referencing
+section headings, equations, tables, and figures. This section
+contains a simplified explanation of these cross-referencing features.
+The proper usage in the context of section headings, equations,
+tables, and figures is discussed in the appropriate sections.
+
+Cross-referencing depends upon the use of ``tags,'' which are defined by
+the user. The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to identify tags for
+\revtex. Tags are strings of characters that serve to label section
+headings, equations, tables, and figures that replace explicit,
+by-hand numbering.
+
+Files that use cross-referencing (and almost all manuscripts do)
+need to be processed through \revtex\ at least twice to
+ensure that the tags have been properly linked to appropriate numbers.
+If any tags are added in subsequent editing sessions,
+\LaTeX{} will display a warning message in the log file that ends with
+\texttt{... Rerun to get cross-references right}.
+Running the file through \revtex\ again (possibly more than once) will
+resolve the cross-references. If the error message persists, check
+the labels; the same \marg{key} may have been used to label more than one
+object.
+
+Another \LaTeX\ warning is \texttt{There were undefined references},
+which indicates the use of a key in a \cmd\ref\ without ever
+using it in a \cmd\label\ statement.
+
+\revtex{} performs autonumbering exactly as in standard \LaTeX.
+When the file is processed for the first time,
+\LaTeX\ creates an auxiliary file (with the \file{.aux} extension) that
+records the value of each \meta{key}. Each subsequent run retrieves
+the proper number from the auxiliary file and updates the auxiliary
+file. At the end of each run, any change in the value of a \meta{key}
+produces a \LaTeX\ warning message.
+
+Note that with footnotes appearing in the bibliography, extra passes
+of \LaTeX\ may be needed to resolve all cross-references. For
+instance, putting a \cmd\cite\ inside a \cmd\footnote\ will require at
+least three passes.
+
+Using the \classname{hyperref} package to create hyperlinked PDF files
+will cause reference ranges to be expanded to list every
+reference in the range. This behavior can be avoided by using the
+\classname{hypernat} package available from \url{www.ctan.org}.
+
+\subsection{Acknowledgments}
+Use the \env{acknowledgments} environment for an acknowledgments
+section. Depending on the journal substyle, this element may be
+formatted as an unnumbered section title \textit{Acknowledgments} or
+simply as a paragraph. Please note the spelling of
+``acknowledgments.''
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+The authors would like to thank...
+\end{acknowledgments}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Appendices}
+The \cmd\appendix\ command signals that all following sections are
+appendices, so \cmd\section\marg{title text} after \cmd\appendix\ will set
+\marg{title text} as an appendix heading (an empty \marg{title text}
+is permitted). For a single appendix, use a
+\cmd\appendix\verb+*+ followed by \cmd\section\marg{title text}
+command to suppress the appendix letter in the section heading.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:lineno}Line numbering}
+\revtex~4.1 provides the \classoption{linenumbers} class option to enable line numbering. While it is
+possible to directly call in the \classname{lineno.sty}, using the class option ensures
+that the default parameters needed to properly typeset the line numbers are set up correctly. It is
+still possible for authors to override parameters such as \cmd\linenumbersep\ as usual, however.
+
+\section{Math and equations}\label{sec:math}
+
+\subsection{Math in text}
+
+Not surprisingly, \revtex\ uses the \TeX\ math \verb+$+ delimiters
+for math embedded in text. For example,
+\verb|$a^{z}$| give $a^{z}$. Within math mode, use
+\verb+^+\marg{math} for superscripts and
+\verb+_+\marg{math} for subscripts. If the braces after the
+\verb+^+ are omitted, \TeX{} will
+superscript the next \emph{token} (generally a single character or
+command). Thus it is safest to use explicit braces \verb+{}+.
+
+As with text, math should not require extensive explicit vertical or
+horzontal motion commands, because \TeX\ calculates math spacing
+itself automatically. In particular, explicit spacing around
+relations (e.g., $=$) or operators (e.g., $+$) should be
+unnecessary. These suggestions notwithstanding, some fine-tuning of
+math is required in specific cases, see Chapter~18 in the \TeX
+book\cite{TeXbook}.
+
+\subsection{Text in math}\label{sec:textinmath}
+
+There are times when normal, non-italic text needs to be inserted
+into a math expression. The \cmd\text\marg{text} command is the
+preferred method of accomplishing this. It produces regular text
+\emph{and} scales correctly in superscripts:
+\verb+$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$+ gives
+``$y=x \text{ for } x_{\text{e-p}}$''. To use the \cmd\text\ command,
+the \classname{amsmath} package must be loaded: include a
+\cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{amsmath}} command in the document
+preamble or use the class option \classoption{amsmath}. Please note
+that \revtex~4.1 requires version 2.0 or higher of \classname{amsmath}.
+
+Other common alternatives may be less desirable. Using the standard
+\LaTeXe\ \cmd\mbox\marg{text} will give normal text, including a hyphen,
+but will not scale correctly in superscripts:
+\verb+$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\mbox{e-p}}$''.
+The \cmd\rm\ command
+only switches to Roman font for math letters. It does not, for
+example, handle hyphens correctly:
+\verb+$$x_{\rm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\rm e-p}$''. But note that
+\cmd\textrm{}, it does work: \verb+$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$+ gives ``$x_{\textrm{e-p}}$''.
+
+\subsection{Displayed equations}\label{sec:dispmath}
+
+Equations are set centered in the column width or flush left depending
+on the selected journal substyle.
+
+For the simplest type of displayed equation, a numbered, one-line
+equation, use the \env{equation} environment.
+\revtex\ takes care of the equation number%
+---the number will be set below the equation if necessary.
+Use \cmd\[\dots\cmd\] for a single, one-line unnumbered display equation.
+
+Use the \env{eqnarray} environment when more than one consecutive
+equation occurs, putting each equation in a separate row of the
+environment, and using \cmd\nonumber\ before the row end (\cmd\\) to
+suppress the equation number where necessary. If the equations are
+related to each other, align each on the respective relation operator
+(such as $=$).
+
+When an equation is broken over lines or is continued over multiple
+relation operators, it is called a multi-line or continued equation,
+respectively; here, too, use the \env{eqnarray} environment.
+
+For a continued equation, align each row on the relation operator just
+as with multiple equations, and use the \cmd\nonumber\ command to
+suppress auto-numbering on broken lines. Also, use the starred form
+of the row end (\cmd\\\verb+*+) to prevent a pagebreak at that
+juncture.
+
+Short displayed equations that can appear together on a single line
+separated by \cmd\qquad\ space may be placed in a single
+\env{equation} environment.
+
+As explained in Section~\ref{sec:widetext}, occasionally in two-column
+mode a long equation, in order to fit it in the narrow column width,
+would need to be broken into so many lines that it would affect
+readibility. Set it in a wide column using the \env{widetext}
+environment. Then return to the normal text width as soon as
+possible.
+
+The sample file \file{apssamp.tex} illustrates how to obtain each of
+the above effects.
+
+\subsection{Numbering displayed equations}
+
+\revtex~4.1 automatically numbers equations.
+For single-line and multi-line equations, use the
+\env{equation} and \env{eqnarray} environments as described above.
+For unnumbered single-line equations, use the \verb+\[+\dots\verb+\]+
+construction. The command \cmd\nonumber\ will suppress the numbering
+on a single line of an
+\env{eqnarray}.
+For a multi-line equation with no equation numbers at all,
+use the \env{eqnarray*} environment.
+
+A series of equations can be a labeled with a lettered sequence,
+e.g., (3a), (3b), and (3c), by
+putting the respective \env{equation} or \env{eqnarray} environment within a
+\env{subequations} environment.
+The \classname{amsmath} package (can be loaded with the
+\classoption{amsmath} class option) is required for this.
+
+Use the command \cmd\tag\marg{number} to produce an idiosyncratic
+equation number: $(1')$, for example. Numbers assigned by \cmd\tag\
+are completely independent of \revtex's automatic numbering. The
+package \classname{amsmath} is required for using the \cmd\tag\
+command. Please
+note that the use of the \texttt{tag} command may conflict with the use of the \classoption{hyperref} package
+due an incompatibility between \classoption{amsmath} and \classoption{hyperref}.
+
+To have \revtex{} reset the equation numbers at the start of each section,
+use the \classoption{eqsecnum} class option in the document preamble.
+
+See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for some examples.
+
+\subsection{Cross-referencing displayed equations}
+
+To refer to a numbered equation, use
+the \cmd\label\marg{key} and \cmd\ref\marg{key} commands.
+The \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used within the referenced equation
+(on the desired line of the \env{eqnarray}, if a multi-line equation):
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{equation}
+ A=B \label{pauli}
+\end{equation}
+ ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli})
+that this is the case ...
+\begin{eqnarray}
+ A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\
+ A'& = &B'
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{verbatim}
+gives
+\begin{equation}
+A=B \label{pauli}
+\end{equation}
+ ... It follows from Eq.~(\ref{pauli})
+that this is the case ...
+\begin{eqnarray}
+A & = &B,\label{pauli2}\\
+A'& = &B'
+\end{eqnarray}
+
+Please note the parentheses surrounding the \cmd\ref\ command.
+These are \emph{not} provided automatically and, thus, must be
+explicitly incorporated.
+
+Numbers produced with \cmd\tag\ can also be cross-referenced by adding
+a \cmd\label\ command after the \cmd\tag\ command.
+
+Using a \cmd\label\ after \envb{subequations} to reference the
+\emph{general} number of the equations in the
+\env{subequations} environment. For example, if
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{subequations}
+ \label{allequations} % notice location
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa}
+ \\
+ E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb}
+ \\
+ E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+\end{verbatim}
+%
+gives the output
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{allequations} % notice location
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationb}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2,\label{equationc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+%
+then \verb+Eq.~(\ref{allequations})+ gives ``Eq.~(\ref{allequations})''.
+
+{\bf Note:} incorrect cross-referencing will result if
+\cmd\label\ is used in an unnumbered single-line equation
+(i.e., within the \verb+\[+ and \verb+\]+ commands),
+or if \cmd\label\ is used on a line of an eqnarray that is not being numbered
+(i.e., a line that has a \cmd\nonumber).
+
+\subsection{Using the AMS packages \classoption{amsfonts},
+\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath}}\label{AMS}
+
+The American Mathematical Society's AMS-\LaTeX\ packages provided extra
+fonts, symbols, and math markup that are quite convenient. \revtex~4.1
+supports the use of these packages directly. To use the \classoption{amsfonts},
+\classoption{amssymb}, and \classoption{amsmath} class options,
+AMS-\LaTeX\ (and perhaps the additional AMS fonts) will need to be
+installed. Please note that \revtex~4.1 requires version 2.0 or higher
+of AMS-\LaTeX. These packages can be downloaded from
+\url{http://www.ams.org/tex/}.
+
+There are two class options for accessing the AMS fonts:
+\classoption{amsfonts} and \classoption{amssymb}.
+The \classoption{amsfonts} option defines the \cmd\mathfrak\ and
+\cmd\mathbb\ commands to switch to the Fraktur and
+Blackboard Bold fonts, respectively.
+These fonts are selected with the \cmd\mathfrak\ and \cmd\mathbb\
+font-switching commands:
+\verb+${\mathfrak{G}}$+ gives a Fraktur ``$\mathfrak{G}$''
+and \verb+${\mathbb{Z}}$+ gives a Blackboard Bold ``$\mathbb{Z}$''.
+\revtex{} does not currently support the use of the extra Euler fonts
+(the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{eur} or \texttt{eus}) or the
+Cyrillic fonts (the AMS fonts starting with \texttt{w}).
+
+The \classoption{amssymb} class option gives all the font
+capabilities of the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option and further defines the commands
+for many commonly used math symbols. These symbols will scale
+correctly in superscripts and other places. See the AMS-\LaTeX\
+documentation for the complete list of symbols available.
+
+\subsection{Bold symbols in math}\label{sec:bboxamsfonts}
+
+\revtex~4.1 uses the standard \LaTeXe\ Bold Math (\classname{bm}) package as the
+basis for creating bold symbols in math mode. As usual, this requires
+an explicit \cmd\usepackage\aarg{\classname{bm}} in the document
+preamble. The command
+\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} makes \marg{symbol} bold in math mode, ensuring
+that it is the correct size, even in superscripts. If the correct font
+in the correct size is not available then result is the \marg{symbol}
+set at the
+correct size in lightface and a \LaTeXe\ warning that says
+``\texttt{No boldmath typeface in this size}\dots''. Most bold special
+characters will require that the AMS fonts be installed and the
+\classoption{amsfonts} class option be invoked.
+
+\cmd\bm\ is the proper means to get bold Greek characters---upper- and
+lowercase---and other symbols.
+The following will come out bold with \cmd\bm:
+normal math italic letters, numbers,
+Greek letters (uppercase and lowercase),
+small bracketing and operators, and \cmd\mathcal. Fraktur
+characters will come out bold in a \cmd\bm; however, Blackboard Bold
+requires using the \cmd\mathbb\ command rather than \cmd{\bm}.
+The \classoption{amsfonts} option adds support for bold math
+letters and symbols in smaller sizes and in superscripts when a
+\cmd\bm\marg{symbol} is used.
+For example, \verb+$\pi^{\bm{\pi}}$+ gives a bold
+lowercase pi in the superscript position: $^{\pi\bm{\pi}}$.
+
+Note that \cmd\bm\marg{math} is a fragile command and, thus, should be
+preceded by \cmd\protect\ in commands with moving arguments.
+
+\section{Footnotes}
+\LaTeX's standard \cmd\footnote\ command is available in
+\revtex~4.1. The footnote text can either appear at the bottom of a page or
+as part of the bibliography. This choice can be controlled by two class options:
+\classoption{footinbib} and \classoption{nofootinbib}. \revtex~4.1
+defaults to the former. Specific journal options may select a
+different value than the default.
+
+Please note that even if Bib\TeX\ is not being used for the references, you
+may have to run Bib\TeX\ if you are using footnotes without the \classoption{nofootinbib} option.
+The log file will contain errors about missing references such as \texttt{Note1} in this case and a file ending in
+\texttt{Notes.bib} will have been produced during the processing of the \TeX\ file.
+
+Note that in the latter case, the
+argument of the
+\cmd\footnote\ command is a moving argument in the sense of the \LUG,
+Appendix~C.1.3: any fragile command within that argument must be
+preceded by a \cmd\protect\ command.
+
+The \cmd\footnote\ macro \emph{should not} be used in the front
+matter for indicating author/affiliation relationships or to provide
+additional information about authors (such as an e-mail
+address). See Section~\ref{sec:footau} for the proper way to do
+this.
+
+Finally, footnotes that appear in tables behave differently. They
+will be typeset as part of the table itself. See
+Section~\ref{sec:tablenote} for details.
+
+\section{Citations and References}\label{sec:endnotes}
+
+\revtex~4.1 adds significant new functionality to \revtex~4's
+typesetting of citations and references. The new functionality is
+designed to make it easier to use Bib\TeX\ and produce the desired output
+in the reference section without having to edit Bib\TeX's output. The new features include:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Endnotes created with the \cmd\footnote\ command are automatically interleaved with the bibliographic references. \revtex~4 would typeset all endnotes at the end of the bibliography.
+\item Combining multiple references automatically into a single entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of Bib\TeX\ output. This is achieved by prepending an asterisk (*) to the reference's \textit{key} in the \cmd\cite\ command. \verb+\cite{{key1,*key2}+ would make a single entry in the bibliography by combining into one \cmd\bibitem\ the entries from the \texttt{.bib} file with keys \textit{key1} and \textit{key2}. See Section~\ref{sec:multiple} for more details.
+\item Text can be prepended or appended to an entry in the bibliography. \revtex~4 required by-hand editing of the Bib\TeX\ output. See Section~\ref{sec:prepend} for an example of how to do this.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Proper formatting of references requires Patrick Daly's \classname{natbib} citation package. \BibTeX\ style files
+for APS and AIP journals are created using his \classname{custom-bib} tool kit. From an author's point of view, all this means is that a proper
+\revtex~4.1 installation requires having \classname{natbib} (version 8.31a
+or higher) installed. It also means that the full set of
+\classname{natbib} functionality is available from within \revtex~4.1
+(but see the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1} and \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1} for restrictions if
+submitting to an APS or AIP journal). The \classname{natbib} documentation contains many examples; see in
+particular the \verb+natnotes.tex+ file for a convenient summary. Please also note that \classname{natbib 8.3} and later now gives an error (rather than merely a warning as in earlier versions) if you try to use a Bib\TeX\ file that isn't compatible with author-year style citations with a journal style that requires author-year citations (such as \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}).
+
+\subsection{Citing a reference}
+As in standard \LaTeX, references are cited in text using the
+\cmd\cite\marg{key} command and are listed in the bibliography using
+the \cmd\bibitem\marg{key} command. The \cmd\cite{} macro enables
+\revtex~4.1 to automatically number the references in the manuscript.
+
+A typical example might be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+String theory\cite{GSW} attempts to
+provide a theory of everything.
+\end{verbatim}
+The corresponding \cmd\bibitem{} would be:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibitem{GSW} M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and
+E.~Witten, \textit{Superstring Theory:
+Introduction}, (Cambridge University
+Press, London, 1985).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Journals differ in how the \cmd\cite\ will be displayed. Most APS journals
+display the citation in-line, as a number, enclosed in square brackets,
+\textit{e.g.}, ``String theory[1] attempts\dots.'' Other journals
+(most notably \textit{Physical Review B})
+instead use a number in a superscript: ``String theory$^{1}$ attempts\dots.''
+Selecting the journal substyle using a class option (such as
+\classoption{prb}) will invoke the appropriate style.
+In journal substyles using superscripts,
+the macro the \cmd\onlinecite\marg{key} is necessary to get the number
+to appear on the baseline.
+For example, ``String theory (see, for example,
+\verb+Ref.~\onlinecite{GSW}+)'' will give the output
+``String theory (see, for example, Ref.~1).''
+
+The \cmd{\onlinecite} command has the same semantics as
+\classname{natbib}'s \cmd{\citealp} command.
+
+A \cmd\cite\ command with multiple keys is formatted with consecutive
+reference numbers collapsed; e.g., [1,2,3,5] will be output as
+[1--3,5]. To split the list over more than one line, use
+a \verb+%+ character immediately following a comma:
+\begin{verbatim}
+. . . \cite{a,b,c,d,e,f,%
+g,h,i,j,k,l,m,n,o,p,q,r,s,t,u,v,w,x,y,z}
+\end{verbatim}
+The \verb+%+ avoids unwanted spaces.
+
+\subsection{Author/Year (Non-numeric) Citations}
+
+\textit{Reviews of Modern Physics} uses a citation style based on the
+first author's last name and the year of the reference rather than a
+simple number. Support for this style of citing references is the
+primary reason \revtex~4.1 uses the \classname{natbib}
+package. \classname{natbib} uses an optional argument to the
+\cmd\bibitem\ macro to specify what text to use for the \cmd\cite\
+text:
+\begin{quote}
+\cmd\bibitem\verb+[+\meta{short-name}\verb+(+\meta{year}\verb+)+\meta{long-name}\verb+]+
+\end{quote}
+where \meta{short-name} is the author name used in a parenthetical citation,
+\meta{long-name} that used in a textual citation, and
+\meta{year} is the year. More concretely, the \cmd\bibitem\ example
+above would appear as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibitem[Greene et al.(1985)Green,
+Schwarz, and Witten]{GSW}
+M.~Greene, J.~Schwarz, and E.~Witten,
+\textit{Superstring Theory},
+(Cambridge Press, London, 1985).
+\end{verbatim}
+
+When the citation constitutes part of the grammar of the sentence,
+the \cmd\textcite\marg{key} command may be used (analogous to the
+\cmd\onlinecite\ command above). Both \cmd\textcite\ and
+\cmd\onlinecite\ are built upon \classname{natbib}'s rich repertoire of
+macros (\cmd\citep{}, \cmd\citet{}, etc.). These macros are available in
+\revtex~4.1; however, APS authors must follow the
+\textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1}
+guidelines regarding \classname{natbib}'s macros.
+
+\subsection{Combined Author/Year and Numeric Citations}
+
+AIP's \textit{Journal of Mathematical Physics} uses a combined author/year and numerical citation style. \revtex~4.1 supports this referencing style. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1} for more information about this style.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:use-bib}Using Bib\TeX}
+
+The \cmd\bibitem{} entries can be coded by hand as above, of course, but the
+use of \BibTeX\ with the new style files provided with \revtex~4.1 makes
+it particularly simple to generate marked-up references that can, for
+instance, take advantage of packages like
+\classname{hyperref} for linking. They also save the trouble of having
+to specify formatting like the italics for the book title in the above
+example. And, for those wishing to use author/year citations, \BibTeX\
+will automatically generate the appropriate optional arguments for the
+\cmd\bibitem\ commands.
+
+\BibTeX\ is an adjunct to \LaTeX\ that aids in the
+preparation of bibliographies. \BibTeX\ allows authors to build up a
+database or collection of bibliography entries that may be used for many
+manuscripts. A \BibTeX\ style file then specifies how to transform the
+entries into a proper \cmd\bibitem{} for a particular journal. Here we
+give a brief summary of how to get started with \BibTeX. More details can be
+found in the LaTeX books listed in the references.
+
+Selecting a journal style by using an appropriate class option will
+automatically select the correct \BibTeX\ style file from those included in
+\revtex~4.1. Four basic \BibTeX\ style files are included: \file{apsrev4-1.bst} (APS journals using a numeric citation style, \textit{i.e.}, all but RMP), \file{apsrmp4-1.bst} (author/year style citations for RMP),
+\file{aipauth4-1.bst} (AIP journal using an author/year citation style), and \file{aipnum4-1.bst} (AIP journals using a numeric citation style). In addition, there are ``long" versions for each of these that add the titles of cited articles to the bibliography. The selection can be overridden by specifying an
+alternative \file{.bst} file using the standard \LaTeXe
+\cmd\bibliographystyle\ macro. This must appear in the preamble
+before the \envb{document} line in \revtex~4.1 (this differs from
+standard \LaTeX).
+
+The \BibTeX\ database files will contain entries such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+ at Book{GSW,
+ author=``M. Greene, J. Schwarz,
+ E. Witten'',
+ title=``Superstring theory:
+ Introduction'',
+ publisher=``Cambridge University
+ Press'',
+ address=``London'',
+ year=``1985''
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+There are entry formats for articles, technical reports, e-prints,
+theses, books, proceedings, and articles that appear in books or
+proceedings. The styles provided with
+\revtex~4.1 also allows URL's and e-print identifiers to be specified
+for any of the different entry types. There is also an additional
+``collaboration'' field that can be used in addition to ``author'.'
+
+To actually create the bibliography in the manuscript, the
+\cmd\bibliography\marg{bib files} macro is used.
+Here \meta{bib files} is a comma-separated list of \BibTeX\ bibliography
+database files, each with the \file{.bib} extension. The
+\cmd\bibliography\ macro should be placed at the location where the
+references are to appear (usually after the main body of the
+paper). When the manuscript is processed with \LaTeX\ for the first
+time, the keys corresponding for the \cmd\cite{} macros used in the
+manuscript are written out to the \file{.aux} file. Then \BibTeX\ should
+be run (if the manuscript is called \file{paper.tex}, the command would
+be \verb+bibtex paper+. This will produce a \file{.bbl} file containing all
+of the \cmd\bibitem{}'s for the manuscript. Subsequent runs of \LaTeXe\
+will call this file in to resolve the references. \LaTeXe\ should be run
+repeatedly until all references are resolved.
+
+The \BibTeX-produced \cmd\bibitem{}'s created using the \revtex\ style files appear considerably more complex than the example given
+above. This is because the style files add in \cmd\bibinfo{},
+\cmd\bibnamefont{}, \cmd\eprint{}, and \cmd\url{} macros for
+specifying additional formatting and tagging. The \cmd\bibinfo\ macro
+is mostly a do-nothing macro that serves merely to tag the information with
+the field information from the original entry in the \BibTeX\ database.
+The \cmd\eprint\ and \cmd\url\ macros can be used to create the
+appropriate hyperlinks in target formats such as PDF.
+
+For more information on using \BibTeX\ with \LaTeX, see Sections~4.3.1
+and~C.11.3 of the \LUG\cite{LaTeXman}, Section~13.2 of \cite{Compan},
+or the online \BibTeX\ manual \file{btxdoc.tex} from
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/distribs/doc/}.
+
+\subsubsection{\texttt{arXiv.org} support in Bib\TeX}
+
+
+\revtex~4.1 has better support for citing e-prints from \texttt{arXiv.org} For instance, the \texttt{.bib} entry
+\begin{verbatim}
+ at Unpublished{Ginsparg:1988ui,
+ author = "Ginsparg, Paul H.",
+ title = "{Applied Conformal Field Theory}",
+ year = "1988",
+ eprint = "hep-th/9108028",
+ archivePrefix = "arXiv",
+ SLACcitation = "%%CITATION=HEP-TH/9108028;%%"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+will include the arXiv.org e-print identifier as \texttt{arXiv:hep-th/9108028} and hyperlink it (if using \texttt{hyperref}). The newer format for arXiv identifiers with primary classificiations will produce output such as \texttt{arXiv:0905.1949 [hep-ph]}.
+
+
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:multiple}Multiple references in a single bibliography entry}
+One of the most frequently requested features since the release of \revtex~4 has been to allow more than one reference to appear in a single bibliography entry when using Bib\TeX. This can now be done in \revtex~4.1 by using a starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command. This requires the latest version of \texttt{natbib}, developed in conjunction with \revtex~4.1, and the new \texttt{bst} files that come with \revtex~4.1. To combine multiple references into a single \cmd\bibitem, precede the second, third, etc. citation keys in the \cmd\cite\ command with an asterisk (*). For example \verb+\cite{bethe, *feynman, *bohr}+ will combine the \cmd\bibitem\relax s with keys \texttt{bethe}, \texttt{feynman}, and \texttt{bohr} into a single entry in the bibliography separated by semicolons.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:prepend}Prepending and/or appending text to a citation}
+The expanded syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command argument can also be used to specify text before and/or after a citation. For instance, a citation such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+[19] A similar expression was derived in
+A. V. Andreev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99, 247204
+(2007) in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that no
+integration over ky is present there.
+\end{verbatim}
+may be created by the following \cmd\cite\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{*[{A similar expression was derived
+in }] [{ in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that
+no integration over ky is present
+there.}] andreev2007}
+\end{verbatim}
+Please note the use of curly braces to enclose the text within the square brackets as well as the spaces next to the brackets.
+
+\section{Figures and Artwork}\label{sec:figures}
+\subsection{\texttt{figure} environment}
+
+Figures may be included into a \revtex~4.1 manuscript by using the
+standard \LaTeXe\ macros. It should be noted that \LaTeXe\ includes
+several powerful packages for including the files in various
+formats. The two main packages are \classname{graphics} and
+\classname{graphicx}. Both offer a macro called
+\cmd\includegraphics\oarg{args}\marg{filename};
+they mainly differ in how arguments for
+controlling figure scaling, translation, and orientation
+are specified. For more information on the enhancements of the \classname{graphicx} package,
+see \cite{CompanG} or the guide \file{grfguide.pdf} available at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/}.
+\revtex~4.1 no longer has the \classoption{epsf} class option, though
+the \classname{epsfig} package provides a similar interface.
+
+
+The \env{figure} environment should be used to add a caption to the figure and
+to allow \LaTeX\ to number and place the figures where they fit best.
+\LaTeX\ will label and automatically number the captions FIG.~1,
+FIG.~2, etc. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}
+ \includegraphics{fig1.eps}
+ \caption{\label{fig1}Text of first caption.}
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note how the \cmd\label\marg{key} command is used to cross-reference
+figures in text. The \cmd\label\marg{key} command should be inserted
+inside the figure caption. As usual, the \cmd\ref\marg{key} macro can
+then by used to refer to the label: ``As depicted in
+FIG.\verb+~\ref{fig1}+\dots''.
+
+Figures are normally set to the width of the column in
+which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the figure
+will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide figures, the
+\cmd\figure\verb+*+ environment should be used
+instead. This will place the figure across both columns (the figure
+usually will
+appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page).
+
+
+Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure,
+otherwise they span the width of the figure.
+
+Note that is unnecessary (and undesirable) to use explicit centering
+commands inside the float environments.
+
+\subsection{\texttt{video} environment}
+Papers often refer to multimedia material such as videos. The \texttt{video} environment is identical to the \texttt{figure} environment, but the caption will be labeled as a \textbf{Video} (with its own counter independent of figures). A URL can also be specified so that the caption label can be linked to the online video (if using the \texttt{hyperref} package). The included graphic (using \cmd\includegraphics\ from the \texttt{graphics} or \texttt{graphicx} package) would be a representation frame from the video. A \texttt{\cmd\listofvideos} is also provided. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{video}
+\includegraphics{videoframe.jpg}
+\setfloatlink{http://some.video.com/fun.mov}
+\caption{\label{vid:interest}This is a video
+of something fun.}
+\end{video}
+\end{verbatim}
+There is also a corresponding \cmd\listofvideos\ command.
+
+\section{Tables}\label{sec:tables}
+
+Tables are very similar to figures. They should be input using the
+\env{table} environment as detailed below, and
+\LaTeX\ will label and number the captions TABLE~1, TABLE~2, etc.
+(or in whatever format required by the chosen journal
+substyle). Tables without captions won't be numbered.
+
+Each table must begin with \envb{table}, end with \enve{table}. A
+caption can be specified using the \cmd\caption\marg{text} command.
+Captions less than one line long are centered under the figure,
+otherwise they span the width of the figure.
+To refer to the table via cross-referencing, a \cmd\label\marg{key}
+command should appear within the \cmd{\caption}. Use the
+\cmd\ref\marg{key} command to cite tables in text. The \env{table}
+environment will set the table to the width of the column. Thus, in
+two-column mode, the table will be confined to a single column. To set a
+table to the full width of the page, rather than the column, use the
+\env{table*} environment.
+
+The heart of the table is the
+\env{tabular} environment. This will behave for the most part as in
+standard \LaTeXe\ (please refer to Section~3.6.3 and Appendix~C.10.2 of the
+\LUG{} for more details about the \env{tabular} environment).
+Note that \revtex~4.1 no longer automatically adds double (Scotch) rules
+around tables. Nor does the \env{tabular} environment set various
+table parameters for column spacing as before. Instead, a new
+environment \env{ruledtabular} provides this functionality. This
+environment should surround the \env{tabular} environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{<key>}....}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}
+...
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+A basic table looks as follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:example}Text of table caption.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ Heading 1 & Heading 2\\
+ Cell 1 & Cell 2\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The \env{quasitable} environment is no longer in \revtex~4.1. The
+standard \env{tabular} environment can be used instead because it
+no longer puts in the double rules.
+
+\subsection{Aligning on a decimal point}
+Numerical columns should align on the decimal point (or
+decimal points if more than one is is present). This is accomplished
+by again using a standard \LaTeXe\ package, \classname{dcolumn} which
+must be loaded in the manuscript's preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{dcolumn}
+\end{verbatim}
+Once this package is loaded, the column specifier `\texttt{d}' can be
+used in the table's \env{tabular}\marg{preamble} enviroment preamble.
+The `\texttt{d}' should be used for simple numeric data with a single
+decimal point.
+%
+The entry of a \texttt{d} column is typeset in math mode; do not
+insert any \verb+$+ math delimiters into a `\texttt{d}' column. Items
+without a decimal point are simply set in math mode, centered. If
+text is required in the column, use \cmd\text\ or \cmd\mbox\ as
+appropriate. If multiple decimal points are present then the last is
+used for alignment. To escape from the `\texttt{d}' column use
+\cmd\multicolumn\ as usual. See the sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for examples.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes in Tables}\label{sec:tablenote}
+
+Footnotes in a table are labeled \emph{a}, \emph{b}, \emph{c},
+etc. They can be specified by using the \LaTeX\ \cmd\footnote\
+command. Furthermore,
+\cmd\footnotemark\ and \cmd\footnotetext\ can be used so that multiple entries
+can to refer to the same footnote. The footnotes for a table are typeset
+at the bottom of the table, rather than at the bottom of the page or
+at the end of the references. The arguments for \cmd\footnotemark\ and
+\cmd\footnotetext\ should be numbers 1, 2, \dots. The journal style
+will convert these to letters. See sample file \file{apssamp.tex} for
+examples and explanations of use.
+
+\subsection{Dealing with Long Tables}
+By default, tables are set in a smaller size than the text body
+(\cmd\small). The \cmd\squeezetable\ declaration makes the table font
+smaller still (\cmd\scriptsize). Thus, putting the
+\cmd\squeezetable\ command before the \envb{table} line in a table
+will reduce the font size. If this isn't sufficient to fit
+the table on a page, the standard \LaTeXe\ \classname{longtable}
+package may be used. The scope of the
+\cmd\squeezetable\ command must be limited by enclosing it with a group:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\squeezetable
+\begin{table}
+[...]
+\end{table}
+\endgroup
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Tables are normally set to the width of the column in
+which they are placed. This means that in two-column mode, the table
+will be placed in a single, narrow column. For wide tables, the
+\cmd\table\verb+*+ environment should be used
+instead. This will place the table across both columns (the table
+usually will
+appear either at the top or the bottom of the following page).
+
+
+To break tables across pages, \revtex~4.1requires adding to the
+table a float placement option of [H] (meaning put the table ``here''
+and effectively ``unfloating'' the table) to the \envb{table}
+command. The commands \verb+\\*+ and \cmd{\samepage} can be used to
+control where the page breaks occur (these are the same as for the
+\env{eqnarray} environment).
+
+Long tables are more robustly handled by using the
+\classname{longtable.sty} package included with the standard \LaTeXe\
+distribution (put \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ in the preamble). This
+package gives precise control over the layout of the table.
+The \revtex~4.1 package contains patches that enable the
+\classname{longtable} package to work in two-column mode. Of course, a
+table set in two-column mode needs to be narrow enough to fit within
+the column. Otherwise, the columns may overlap. \revtex~4.1 provides
+an additional environment \env{longtable*} which allows a longtable to
+span the whole page width. Currently, the \env{longtable*} and
+\env{ruledtabular} environments are incompatible. In order to get the
+double (Scotch) rule, it is necessary to add the \verb+\hline\hline+
+manually (or define \verb+\endfirsthead+ and \verb+\endlastfoot+
+appropriately). For more documentation on the \env{longtable}
+environment and on the package options of the
+\classname{longtable} package, please see the documentation available at
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/longtable.dtx} or
+refer to \cite{Compan}.
+
+\section{Placement of Figures, Tables, and Other Floats}
+\label{sec:place}
+
+By default, figures and tables (and any other ``floating'' environments
+defined by other packages) float to the top or bottom of the page
+using the standard \LaTeX\ float placement mechanism. Initially, each
+\env{figure} or \env{table} environment should be put immediately
+following its first reference in the text; this will usually result in
+satisfactory placement on the page. An optional argument for either
+environment adjusts the float placement. For example:
+\begin{quote}
+\envb{figure}\oarg{placement}\\
+\dots\\
+\enve{figure}
+\end{quote}
+where \meta{placement} can be any combination of \verb|htbp!|, signifying
+``here'', ``top'', ``bottom'', ``page'', and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. The same placement argument may be added to a
+\envb{table}. For more details about float placement,
+see the instructions in the \LUG, Appendix~C.9.1.
+
+In two-column mode, a page may contain both a \env{widetext}
+environment and a float. \revtex~4.1 may not always be able to
+automatically put the float in the optimal place. For instance, a
+float may be placed at the bottom of a column just before the
+\env{widetext} begins. To workaround this, try moving the float
+environment below the \env{widetext} environment. Alternative
+\meta{placements} may also alleviate the problem.
+
+\env{figure} and \env{table} environments should not
+be enclosed in a \env{widetext} environment to make them span
+the page to accommodate wide figures or tables. Rather, the
+\env{figure*} or \env{table*} environments should be used instead.
+
+Sometimes in \LaTeX\ the float placement mechanism breaks down and a
+float can't be placed. Such a ``stuck'' float may mean that it and all
+floats that follow are moved to the end of the job (and if there are
+too many of floats, the fatal error \texttt{Too many unprocessed floats}
+will occur). \revtex~4.1 provides the class option
+\classoption{floatfix} which attempts to invoke emergency float
+processing to avoid creating a ``stuck'' float. \revtex~4.1 will provide
+a message suggesting the use of
+\classoption{floatfix}. If \classoption{floatfix} doesn't work or if
+the resulting positioning of the float is poor, the float should be
+repositioned by hand.
+
+\revtex~4.1 offers an additional possibility for placing the floats. By
+using the either the \classoption{endfloats} or the
+\classoption{endfloats*} class option all floats may be held
+back (using an external file) and then set elsewhere in the document
+using the the commands \cmd\printtables\ and \cmd\printfigures{},
+placed where the tables and figures are to be printed (usually at the
+end of the document). (This is similar to the standard
+\cmd\printindex\ command). Using a \texttt{*}-form of the commands
+(\cmd\printfigures\verb+*+ and
+\cmd\printtables\verb+*+) will begin the figures
+or tables on a new page. Alternatively, the option
+\classoption{endfloats*} may be used to change the behavior of the
+non-\texttt{*}-forms so that every float will appear on a separate
+page at the end.
+
+Without one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options, these float
+placement commands are silently ignored, so it is always safe to use
+them. If one of the \classoption{endfloats} class options is given,
+but the \cmd\printtables\ command is missing, the tables will be
+printed at the end of the document. Likewise, if \cmd\printfigures\ is
+missing, the figures will be printed at the end of the document.
+Therefore it is also safe to omit these commands as long as \revtex's
+default choices for ordering figures and tables are satisfactory.
+
+The \classoption{endfloats} option (or perhaps some journal substyle
+that invokes it), requires explicit \envb{figure}, \enve{figure},
+\envb{table}, and \enve{table} lines. In particular, do \emph{not}
+define typing shortcuts for table and figure environments, such as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\def\bt{\begin{table}}% Incompatible!
+\def\et{\end{table}}%
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Please note that it is generally undesirable to have all floats moved
+to the end of the manuscript. APS no longer requires this for
+submissions. In fact, the editors and referees will have an easier time
+reading the paper if the floats are set in their normal positions.
+
+\section{Rotating Floats}
+
+Often a figure or table is too wide to be typeset in the standard
+orientation and it is necessary to rotate the float 90
+degrees. \revtex~4.1 provides a new environment \env{turnpage} as an
+easy means to accomplish this. The \env{turnpage} environment depends
+on one of the packages \classname{graphics} or \classname{graphicx}
+being loaded. To use the \env{turnpage} environment, simply enclose
+the \env{figure} or \env{table} environment with the \env{turnpage}
+environment:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[...]{revtex4}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+[...]
+\begin{turnpage}
+\begin{figure} or \begin{table}
+[...]
+\end{figure} or \end{table}
+\end{turnpage}
+\end{verbatim}
+A turnpage float will be typeset on a page by itself. Currently, there
+is no mechanism for breaking such a float across multiple pages.
+
+\section{\revtex~4.1 symbols and the \classname{revsymb4-1} package}
+
+Symbols made available in earlier versions of \revtex\ are
+defined in a separate package, \classname{revsymb4-1},
+so that they may be used with other classes.
+This might be useful if, say, copying text from a \revtex\ document to
+a non-\revtex\ document. \revtex~4.1 automatically includes these
+symbols so it is not necessary to explicitly call them in with a
+\cmd\usepackage\ statement.
+
+Table~\ref{tab:revsymb} summarizes the symbols defined in this package.
+Note that \cmd{\overcirc}, \cmd{\overdots}, and \cmd{\corresponds} are
+no longer in \revtex~4.1. Use \cmd{\mathring} (standard in \LaTeXe),
+\cmd{\dddot} (with the \classoption{amsmath} package loaded), and
+\cmd\triangleq\ (with the \classoption{amssymb} class option) respectively.
+\cmd{\succsim}, \cmd{\precsim}, \cmd{\lesssim}, and \cmd{\gtrsim} are
+also defined either in \classname{amsmath} or \classname{amssymb}. The
+AMS versions of these commands will be used if the appropriate AMS
+package is loaded.
+
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:revsymb}Special \revtex~4.1 symbols, accents, and
+boldfaced parentheses defined in \file{revsymb.sty}}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ll|ll}
+\cmd\lambdabar & $\lambdabar$ &\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\
+\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ & \cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\
+\cmd\alt & $\alt$ & \cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\
+\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ & \cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\
+\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ & \cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$ \\
+\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ &
+\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb )& $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\
+& & \\
+\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ &
+\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$ \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+\section{Other \revtex~4.1 Features}
+%\subsection{Hooks}
+%To be written....
+
+\subsection{Job-specific Override Files}
+\revtex~4.1 allows manuscript-specific macro definitions to be put
+in a file separate from the main \TeX\ file. One merely creates a file
+with the same basename as the \TeX\ file, but with the extension
+`.rty'. Thus, if the \TeX\ file is names man.tex, the macro
+definitions would go in man.rty. Note that the .rty file should be in
+the same directory as the \TeX\ file. APS authors should follow the
+guidelines in the \textit{APS Author Guide for \revtex~4.1} when
+submitting. Similarly, AIP authors should refer to the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{}\label{sec:TeXbooks}
+\bibitem[Knuth(1986)]{TeXbook} D.E. Knuth, \emph{The \TeX book},
+(Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1986).
+\bibitem[Lamport(1996)]{LaTeXman} L. Lamport, \emph{\LaTeX, a Document
+Preparation System}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1996).
+\bibitem[Kopka(1995)]{Guide} H. Kopka and P. Daly, \emph{A Guide to
+\LaTeXe}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1995).
+\bibitem[Goossens(1994)]{Compan} M. Goossens, F. Mittelbach, and
+A. Samarin, \emph{The \LaTeX\
+Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1994).
+\bibitem[Goossens(1997)]{CompanG} M. Goossens, S. Rahtz, and
+F. Mittelbach, \emph{The
+\LaTeX\ Graphics Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1997).
+\bibitem[Rahtz(1999)]{CompanW} S. Rahtz, M. Goossens, \emph{et
+al.},\emph{The \LaTeX\ Web Companion}, (Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 1999).
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/auguide4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,129 @@
+% authguide.rty - macros for processing revguide.tex under \documentclass{revtex4}
+% Text entities
+\DeclareRobustCommand\SNG{\emph{Physical Review Style and Notation Guide}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\LUG{\emph{\LaTeX{} User's Guide \& Reference Manual}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\marglat{\marginpar[\textbf{2e}]{\textbf{2e}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\margrev{\marginpar[\textbf{4}]{\textbf{4}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmS{%
+ {\protect\the\textfont\tw@ A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\AmSLaTeX{\AmS-\LaTeX}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\BibTeX{{\rm B}{\sc ib}\TeX}
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\m}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\m at th\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\aarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}#1{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+ }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd at to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd at to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd at to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name at idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\file}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+%
+% Needed for index:
+%
+\def\ttt{\texttt}%
+\def\pfill{\ }%
+\def\efill{\ }%
+\let\scan at allowedfalse\relax
+%\makeindex
+\AtEndDocument{\@input@{\jobname.ind}\null}%
+%
+% Processing options
+%
+%
+% Layout: override revtex4|aps
+\c at secnumdepth2
+\prepdef\@verbatim{\topsep.5\baselineskip}%
+\renewenvironment{quotation}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \listparindent 10\p@
+ \itemindent\listparindent
+ \leftmargin10\p@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ \parsep \z@ \@plus\p@
+ \small
+ }%
+ \item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\renewenvironment{quote}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \leftmargin\z@
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ }\item[]%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\leftmargini\parindent
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{%
+ \hspace\labelsep\ignorespaces
+ #1\unskip
+}%
+\def\toprule{\hline\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\colrule{\hline\frstrut}%
+\def\frstrut{\vrule height2.5ex width\z@ depth\z@\relax}%
+\def\lrstrut{\vrule height\z@ width\z@ depth.5ex\relax}%
+%
+% Klootches
+%
+\let\savenofiles\nofiles
+%
+% Patches:
+%
+%
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/docs.sty
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+%% ****** Start of file summary4-1.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August, 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2000, 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[%
+twocolumn,secnumarabic,amssymb, amsmath, nofootinbib,tightenlines,
+nobibnotes, aps,
+prl,
+%outputdebug,
+]{revtex4-1}
+%\usepackage{amsmath}%
+\usepackage{longtable}%
+\usepackage{bm}%
+\usepackage{docs}
+%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\title[Command Option Summary]{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}%
+
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+\email{revtex4 at aps.org}
+\affiliation{One Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 2010}%
+\maketitle
+
+This is the \textit{\revtex~4.1 Command and Options Summary}. It details
+usage for many of the new commands and options that are available in
+\revtex~4. Please see the \textit{\revtex~4.1 Author's Guide} for
+complete information on how to use \revtex~4.1. Class options for the
+\verb+\documentclass+ line are marked with square
+brackets. Environments are indicated by \verb+\begin{<env>}+ and always
+require a matching \verb+\end{<env>}+.
+
+\setlength\LTleft{0pt}
+\setlength\LTright{0pt}
+%
+\begin{longtable*}{@{\extracolsep{0in}}p{3in}p{4in}}
+\caption{\label{tab:summary}\revtex~4.1 Command Summary}\\*
+%
+\noalign{\vspace{3pt}}%
+\toprule\rule{0pt}{12pt}
+\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt]
+\endfirsthead
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{TABLE~\ref{tab:summary} (continued): \revtex~4.1 Command Summary}%
+\rule{0pt}{12pt}\\[3pt]
+\colrule\rule{0pt}{12pt}
+\textbf{\revtex~4/\LaTeXe\ Markup}&\textbf{Details and Usage}\\*[3pt]
+\endhead
+%
+\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}%
+\colrule
+\endfoot
+%
+\noalign{\nobreak\vspace{3pt}}%
+\botrule
+\endlastfoot
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frequently Used Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+[aps]+ & \textit{American Physical Society} styling. Default.\\
+\verb+[aip]+ & \textit{American Institute of Physics} styling.\\
+\verb+[prl]+, \verb+[pra]+, \verb+[prb]+, \verb+[prc]+, \verb+[prd]+, \verb+[pre]+, \verb+[prstab]+, \verb+[prstper]+, \verb+[rmp]+& Further customize \verb+[aps]+ styling for APS journals.\\
+\verb+[apl]+, \verb+[bmf]+, \verb+[cha]+, \verb+[jap]+, \verb+[jcp]+, \verb+[jmp]+, \verb+[rse]+, \verb+[pof]+, \verb+[pop]+, \verb+[rsi]+& Further customize \verb+[aip]+ styling for AIP journals.\\
+%\verb+[rmp]+ & Further customize \verb+[aps]+ styling for \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}.\\
+\verb+[twocolumn]+ & Two-column formatting.\\
+\verb+[onecolumn]+ & Single-column formatting.\\
+\verb+[preprint]+ & Single-column formatting with increased interline spacing.\\
+\verb+[reprint]+ & Closely approximate a given journal's style. Can be either single or two-column formatting depending on the journal.\\
+\verb+[10pt]+, \verb+[11pt]+, \verb+[12pt]+ & Set font size. \verb+[preprint]+ gives \verb+[12pt]+, \verb+[twocolumn]+ gives
+\verb+[10pt]+ by default.\\
+\verb+[groupedaddress]+ & Group authors with same affiliations together. Default. \\
+\verb+[superscriptaddress]+ & Associate authors with affiliations via superscript numbers. Appropriate for collaborations or if several authors share some, but not all, affiliations.\\
+\verb+[draft]+ & Mark overfull lines.\\
+\verb+[linenumbers]+ & Number lines (requires lineno.sty).\\
+\verb+[longbibliography]+ & Use alternative Bib\TeX\ style files that show journal article titles in the bibliography.\\
+\verb+[amsfonts]+, \verb+[noamsfonts]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amsfonts+ package. Adds AMS font support.\\
+\verb+[amssymb]+, \verb+[noamssymb]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amssymb+ package. Adds additional AMS symbols.\\
+\verb+[amsmath]+, \verb+[noamsmath]+ & Load (don't load)
+\verb+amsmath+ package. Adds AMS-\LaTeX\ features.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Other Class Options}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+[preprintnumbers]+, \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ & Control display of preprint numbers given by \verb+\preprint+ command. \verb+[preprintnumbers]+ is default for \verb+[preprint]+; otherwise \verb+[nopreprintnumbers]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[floatfix]+ & Invoke emergency processing to avoid the \LaTeX\ error \verb+``Too many unprocessed floats''+ or all subsequent floats being moved to the end of the job. \revtex~4 will display a message recommending this option if warranted.\\
+\verb+[bibnotes]+, \verb+[nobibnotes]+ & Control location of author footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\
+\verb+[footinbib]+, \verb+[nofootinbib]+ & Control location of footnotes. Default varies with journal style.\\
+\verb+[altaffilletter]+, \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ & Use letters or symbols for
+\verb+\altaffiliation+ superscripts. \verb+[altaffillsymbol]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[unsortedaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but doesn't combine authors together who share the same affiliations.\\
+\verb+[runinaddress]+ & Like \verb+[groupedaddress]+, but joins multiple affiliations together into a single sequence separated by commas.\\
+\verb+[showpacs]+, \verb+[noshowpacs]+ & Control display of PACS: line.\\
+\verb+[showkeys]+, \verb+[noshowkeyws]+ & Control display of Keywords: line.\\
+\verb+[tightenlines]+ & Single space manuscript (for use with \verb+[preprint]+).\\
+\verb+[floats]+ & Position floats near call outs. Default.\\
+\verb+[endfloats]+ & Move all floats to the end of the document.\\
+\verb+[endfloats*]+ & Move all floats to the end of the document and put each on a separate page.\\
+\verb+[titlepage]+, \verb+[notitlepage]+ & Control appearance of title page.\\
+\verb+[final]+ & Don't mark overfull lines. Default.\\
+\verb+[letterpaper]+, \verb+[a4paper]+, \verb+[a5paper]+ & Select paper size. \verb+[letterpaper]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[oneside]+, \verb+[twoside]+ & Control book syle layout. \verb+[oneside]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[fleqn]+ & Flush displayed equations left. \\
+\verb+[eqsecnum]+ & Number equations by section.\\
+\verb+[balancelastpage]+, \verb+[nobalancelastpage]+ & Control
+\verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing on last page. \verb+[balancelastpage]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[raggedbottom]+, \verb+[flushbottom]+ & Control \verb+[twocolumn]+ balancing. \verb+[flushbottom]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[raggedfooter]+, \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ & Control positioning of footer. \verb+[noraggedfooter]+ is default.\\
+\verb+[byrevtex]+ & Display ``Typeset by \revtex~4''.\\
+\verb+[citeautoscript]+ & Fix up spacing and punctuation when switching from non-superscript style citations to superscript citation styles. \verb+\cite+ commands and associated spacing and punctuation should be as for the non-superscript style.\\
+\verb+[galley]+ & Typeset in a single narrow column.\\
+\verb+[nomerge]+ & Allows processing of legacy documents that use square brackets as part of the key in a \verb+cite+ command.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Frontmatter Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\title{<title>}+ & The manuscript title.\\
+\verb+\author{One Author}+ & Specify one author's name.\\
+\verb+\surname{Lloyd Weber}+, \verb+\surname{Mao}+ & Indicate which part of a name within
+\verb+\author+ should be used for alphabetizing and indexing.\\
+\verb+\email[<optional text>]{author at any.edu}+& Specify an e-mail address for an author.\\
+\verb+\homepage[<optional text>]+ \verb+ {http://any.edu/homepage/}+& Specify a URL for an author's web site.\\
+\verb+\altaffiliation[optional text]+ \verb+ {affiliation information}+&Specify an alternate or temporary address for an author.\\
+\verb+\thanks{text}+& Additional information about an author not covered by the more specific macros above.\\
+\verb+\collaboration{<The Collaboration>}+ & Specify a collaboration name for a group of authors. Should be placed after the authors. \\
+\verb+\affiliation{text}+ & Specify a single affiliation. Applies to all previous authors without a specified affiliation.\\
+\verb+\noaffiliation+ & For an author or collaboration without an affiliation.\\
+\verb+\date{<date>}+ & Show the date on the manuscript. \verb+\date{\today}+ gives the current date.\\
+\verb+\begin{abstract}+ & Start the manuscript's abstract. Must appear before \verb+\maketitle+ command.\\
+\verb+\pacs{<pacs codes>}+& PACS codes for manuscript. Multiple PACS codes should be specified together in a single \verb+\pacs+ macro.\\
+\verb+\keywords{<keywords>}+ & Suggested keywords for indexing.\\
+\verb+\preprint{<report number>}+ & Specify an institutional report number to appear in the upper-righthand corner of the first page. Multiple
+\verb+\preprint+ macros may be supplied, but space may limit how many can appear.\\
+\verb+\maketitle+ & Typeset the title/author/abstract block.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Sectioning Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\section{<heading>}, \subsection{<heading>}+,
+\verb+\subsubsection{<heading>}+ & Start a new section or subsection.\\
+\verb+\section*{<heading>}+ & Start a new section without a number.\\
+\verb+\appendix+ & Makes all following sections appendices.\\
+\verb+\appendix*+ & Signifies there is a single appendix section to follow.\\
+\verb+\begin{acknowledgments}+ & Start an Acknowledgments section. Note spelling.\\
+\verb+\lowercase{<text>}+ & Escape a letter or word from being uppercased in a top-level \verb+\section+ heading.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Citation, Footnote, and Cross-referencing Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\bibliography{<bib file basename>}+ & Specify a list of .bib
+files in which to find references. Read in the resulting .bbl file. For use with Bib\TeX\ . \\
+\verb+\bibliographystyle{<bst stylefile>}+ & Specify a Bib\TeX\ (.bst) style file to use. APS journal options select the proper default (\texttt{apsrev} or \texttt{apsrmp}).\\
+\verb+\begin{thebibliography}+ & Start the reference section (when not using Bib\TeX). \\
+\verb+\bibitem[<optional text>]{<key>}+ & Specify a single reference.\\
+\verb+\cite{<list of keys>}+ & Cite one or more references. \verb+<key>+ is same as that of \verb+\bibitem+. Prepend a * in front of a key to merge the reference with the previous one in the bibliography.\\
+\verb+\cite{*[{<prepended>}][{<appended>}]{<keys>}+ & Prepend and/or append text to a bibliography entry. Note use of curly braces within the square brackets.\\
+\verb+\onlinecite{<key>}+ & For superscript style citations, place the corresponding number on the baseline rather than as a superscript.\\
+\verb+\bibinfo[<tag>]{<text>}+ & A pure markup macro that adds tagging information to the components of a reference. \revtex~4 Bib\TeX\ style files automatically add them appropriately. Doesn't affect the typesetting.\\
+\verb+\url{<url>}+ & Typeset a URL (\revtex~4 automatically loads \texttt{url.sty}).Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\
+\verb+\eprint{<e-print id>}+ & Typeset an e-print identifier. Bib\TeX\ styles automatically add this markup.\\
+\verb+\footnote{<text>}+ & Create a footnote or endnote in bibliography depending on class options. \verb+\footnote+ within a table will create a footnote attached to the table.\\
+\verb+\footnotemark{<key>}+, \verb+\footnotetext[<key>]{<text>}+ & In a table, allows for multiple items to share the note. \\
+\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an item for cross-referencing. \verb+\label+ should appear within the argument of the cross-referenced item (e.g., \verb+\section{\label{<key>}...}+ or \verb+\caption{\label{<key>}...}+.\\
+\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+.\\
+\verb+\pageref{<key>}+ & Refer to the page on which an item labeled by \verb+\label{<key>}+ appears.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Math and Equation Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+$+ & Inline math delimiter.\\
+\verb+\begin{equation}+ & Display numbered one-line equation.\\
+\verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ & Display unnumbered one-line equation.\\
+\verb+\begin{eqnarray}+ & Display multiple equations together or a
+long equation that requires multiple lines. Use \verb+widetext+
+environment for an equation that must span the page in two-column formatting.\\
+\verb+\nonumber+ & Suppress numbering of an equation with
+\verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+ & Display multiple equations with no equation
+numbering at all.\\
+\verb+&+ & Alignment character for equations within \verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\\+ & End a row in \verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\\*+ & Prevent a page break at this point in an
+\verb+eqnarray+.\\
+\verb+\label{<key>}+ & Label an equation or group of equations for
+cross-referencing.\\
+\verb+\ref{<key>}+ & Refer to an equation by its label (e.g.,
+\verb+Eq~(ref{<key>})+).\\
+\verb+\tag{<key}}+ & Specify an alternative labeling separate from the
+automatic numbering of equations. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\
+\verb+\text{<text>}+ & Non-italicized text within a math
+context. Requires \verb+[amsmath]+. Do not use \verb+\rm+,
+\verb+\textrm+, or \verb+\mbox+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Some} AMS-\LaTeX\ \textsc{Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{split}+ & Split equations with alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{multline}+ & Split equations without alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{align}+ & Equation groups with alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{gather}+ & Equation groups without alignment.\\
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ & Create an equation array in which each
+equation is individually numbered (4a, 4b, 4c, etc.) as part of a
+single group of equations that can be referenced as a whole.\\
+\verb+\intertext+ & Textual interjections witin a display equation.\\
+\verb+\usepackage{amscd}+ & Create commutative diagrams.\\
+\verb+\begin{pmatrix}+ & Matrices with parentheses as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{bmatrix}+ & Matrices with square brackets as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{Bmatrix}+ & Matrices with curly braces as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{vmatrix}+ & Matrices with vertical bars as delimiters.\\
+\verb+\begin{Vmatrix}+ & Matrices with double vertical bars as
+delimiters.\\
+\verb+\hdotsfor+ & Row of dots in a matrix.\\
+\verb+\Hat+ & Alternative \verb+\hat+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Check+ & Alternative \verb+\check+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Tilde+ & Alternative \verb+\tilde+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Acute+ & Alternative \verb+\acute+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Grave+ & Alternative \verb+\grave+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Dot+ & Alternative \verb+\dot+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Ddot+ & Alternative \verb+\ddot+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Breve+ & Alternative \verb+\breve+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\Vec+ & Alternative \verb+\vec+ accent for stacking.\\
+\verb+\xleftarrow+ & Extensible left arrow.\\
+\verb+\xrightarrow+ & Extensible right arrow.\\
+\verb+\overset+ & Place a symbol over another.\\
+\verb+\underset+ & Place a symbol under another.\\
+\verb+\lvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a left delimiter.\\
+\verb+\rvert+ & Vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a right delimiter.\\
+\verb+\lVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a left delimiter.\\
+\verb+\rVert+ & Double vertical bar with spacing rules appropriate for use as
+a right delimiter.\\
+\verb+\DeclareMathOperator+ & Declare a new math operator so that
+spacing and font is correct.\\
+\verb+\text+ & Words and phrases in display math.\\
+\verb+\boldsymbol+ & Make symbol bold. Also available in bm.sty.\\
+\verb+\sideset+ & Sets subscripts and superscripts at the corners of a
+summation or product.\\
+\verb+\substack+ & Create a stack of subexpressions (for example,
+stacked summation limits).\\
+\verb+\begin{subarray}+ & Like \verb+\substack+, but allows finer
+control of subexpression alignment.\\
+\verb+\mathfrak+ & Replaces \verb+\frak+.\\
+\verb+\mathbb+ & Replaces \verb+\Bbb+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Font Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\textbf{<text>}+ & Text boldface font.\\
+\verb+\textit{<text>}+ & Text italicixed font.\\
+\verb+\textrm{<text>}+ & Text Roman font.\\
+\verb+\textsl{<text>}+ & Text Slanted font.\\
+\verb+\textsc{<text>}+ & Text Small Caps font.\\
+\verb+\textsf{<text>}+ & Text Sans Serif font.\\
+\verb+\textmd{<text>}+ & Text Medium Series font.\\
+\verb+\textnormal{<text>}+ & Text Normal Series font.\\
+\verb+\textup{<text>}+ & Text Upright Series font.\\
+\verb+\texttt{<text>}+ & Text Typewriter font.\\
+\verb+\mathit{<text>}+ & Math italics font. \\
+\verb+\mathbf{<text>}+ & Math boldface font.\\
+\verb+\mathtt{<text>}+ & Math typewriter font.\\
+\verb+\mathsf{<text>}+ & Math sans serif font.\\
+\verb+\mathcal{<text>}+ & Math calligraphic font. \\
+\verb+\mathfrak{<text>}+ & Math fraktur font. Requires
+\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\verb+\mathbb{<text>}+ & Math blackboard bold font. Requires
+\verb+[amsfonts]+ or \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\verb+\bm{<text>}+ & Bold math symbols (Greek and other symbols). Requires \verb+\usepackage{bm}+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Table Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{table}[<placement>]+ & Start a table float environment set to the
+current column width. The
+placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying
+here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. A placement option of H will allow a long table to break
+across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement
+requests.\\
+\verb+\begin{table*}+ & Start a non-floating table environment set to the
+current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\
+\verb+\begin{ruledtabular}+ & Adds \textit{Physical Review} style double
+(Scotch) rules around a table and adjusts the intercolumn spacing.\\
+\verb+\begin{tabular}[<position>]{<column specs>}+ & The
+\verb+\tabular+ envrionment sets the positions and the number of
+columns (as well as alignment) in the table.\\
+\verb+\begin{tabular*}{<width>}[<pos>]{<col specs>}+ & Like
+\verb+tabular+, but with a set width.\\
+\verb+\squeezetable+ & Set table in a smaller font smaller. Place this
+macro before the \verb+\begin{table}+ line and sandwich everything
+between \verb+\begingroup+ and \verb+\endgroup+.\\
+\verb+\begin{longtable}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the current column
+width that spans more than one
+page or column. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\
+\verb+\begin{longtable*}{<column specs>}+ & Create a table set to the
+current page width that spans more than one page. \verb+\usepackage{longtable}+ required.\\
+\verb+\caption{<text>}+ & Adds a caption for the table.\\
+\verb+\printtables+ & With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the
+held back tables actually appear.\\
+\verb+\begin{turnpage}+ & Rotate a table or figure by 90 degrees
+(landscape mode). Will put figure or table on a page by
+itself. Requires \verb+\graphics+ package.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Graphics Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{figure}[<placement>]+ & Start a figure float environment
+set to the current column width.
+The placement options may be any combination of h, t, b, p, or ! signifying
+here, top, bottom, page, and ``as soon as possible'',
+respectively. A placement option of H will allow a long table to break
+across pages. \LaTeX\ may not be able to honor placement
+requests.\\
+\verb+\begin{figure*}+ & Start a non-floating figure environment set
+to the current page width. Will be deferred to the following page.\\
+\verb+\includegraphics[<scale,rotation>]+\verb+{fig file}+& Defined
+by invoking either \verb+\usepackage{graphics}+ or
+\verb+\usepackage{graphicx}+, the standard \LaTeXe\ packages for calling
+in figures. \verb+graphicx+ is the same as \verb+graphics+, but uses
+key-value pairs for optional arguments.\\
+\verb+\usepackage{epsfig}+ & Provides an alternative interface to the
+\verb+graphics+ package similar to the epsf class option in \revtex~3.\\
+\verb+\printfigures+ & With \verb+[endfloats]+, control where the
+held back figures actually appear.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{Miscellaneous Commands}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\begin{widetext}+ & Change column width to be the page
+width. Will add guiding rules.\\
+\verb+\twocolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a two column layout.\\
+\verb+\onecolumngrid+ & Low-level switch to a single page-wide column layout.\\
+\verb+\protect+ & Protect a fragile command within a macro with a
+``moving'' argument. \verb+\caption+ and \verb+\footnote+ are common
+macros that have moving arguments.\\
+\verb+\frac{numerator}{denominator}+ & Create a fraction. Use in place of \verb+\over+.\\
+%
+\multicolumn{2}{c}{\textsc{\revtex~4 and Miscellaneous Symbols}\rule[-6pt]{0pt}{18pt}}\\*
+\verb+\textemdash+ & \textemdash\\
+\verb+\textendash+ & \textendash\\
+\verb+\textexclamdown+ & \textexclamdown\\
+\verb+\textquestiondown+ & \textquestiondown\\
+\verb+\textquotedblleft+ & \textquotedblleft\\
+\verb+\textquotedblright+ & \textquotedblright\\
+\verb+\textquoteleft+ & \textquoteleft\\
+\verb+\textquoteright+ & \textquoteright\\
+\verb+\textbullet+ & \textbullet\\
+\verb+\textperiodcentered+ & \textperiodcentered\\
+\verb+\textvisiblespace+ & \textvisiblespace\\
+\verb+\textcompworkmark+ & Break a ligature.\\ % ``fluffier''
+%vs. ``f\textcompworkmark luf\textcompworkmark fier''.\\
+\verb+\textcircled{<char>}+ & Circle a character. \textcircled{e}.\\
+\verb+\lambdabar+ & $\lambdabar$ \\
+\cmd\openone & $\openone$\\
+\cmd\altsuccsim & $\altsuccsim$ \\
+\cmd\altprecsim & $\altprecsim$ \\
+\cmd\alt & $\alt$ \\
+\cmd\agt & $\agt$ \\
+\cmd\tensor\ x & $\tensor x$ \\
+\cmd\overstar\ x & $\overstar x$ \\
+\cmd\loarrow\ x & $\loarrow x$ \\
+\cmd\roarrow\ x & $\roarrow x$ \\
+\verb+\mathring{x}+ & $\mathring{x}$ (Replaces
+\verb+\overcir+). Standard \LaTeXe\ . \\
+\verb+\dddot{x}+ & $\dddot{x}$ (Replaces \verb+\overdots+). Requires \verb+[amsmath]+.\\
+\verb+\triangleq+ & $\triangleq$ (Replaces
+\verb+\corresponds+). Requires \verb+[amssymb]+.\\
+\cmd\biglb\ ( \cmd\bigrb ) & $\biglb( \bigrb)$ \\
+\cmd\Biglb\ ( \cmd\Bigrb ) & $\Biglb( \Bigrb)$ \\
+\cmd\bigglb\ ( \cmd\biggrb ) & $\bigglb( \biggrb)$ \\
+\cmd\Bigglb\ ( \cmd\Biggrb\ ) & $\Bigglb( \Biggrb)$
+\end{longtable*}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/summary4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+%% ****** Start of file whatsnew4-1.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August, 2010
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4.1 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+\documentclass[%
+%prl%
+%,preprint%
+,twocolumn%
+,secnumarabic%
+%,tightenlines%
+,amssymb,aps,pra,nobibnotes]{revtex4-1}
+\usepackage{docs}
+%\usepackage{acrofont}%NOTE: Comment out this line for the release version!
+%\usepackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+%\nofiles
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\usepackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand\revtex{REV\TeX}
+\begin{document}
+\title{What's New in \revtex~4.1}%
+\author{American Physical Society}%
+%\email{revtex4 at aps.org}
+\affiliation{1 Research Road, Ridge, NY 11961}
+\date{August 2010}%
+
+%\tableofcontents
+
+\begin{abstract}
+This document gives a brief summary of what's new in \revtex~4.1. The changes include bug fixes, improved functionality, and support for a wider range of journals, including those of the American Institute of Physics (AIP). \revtex~4.1 was developed jointly by APS, AIP, and Arthur Ogawa. Additional work was done by Patrick Daly to incorporate our suggested improvements into \texttt{natbib 8.3} to address many new features concerning bibliographies. \texttt{natbib 8.31a} or later is required to run \revtex~4.1.
+\end{abstract}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{New Syntax and Features in \revtex~4.1}
+\revtex~4.1 introduces support for more journals, several new commands, and some new syntax. This section outlines these changes. \textbf{A document using these new features will not process under \revtex~4}. See Sec.~\ref{sec:additional} for more details about these items.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Added support for APS journal \textit{Physical Review Special Topics -- Physics Education Research}}.
+\item \textbf{Added support for AIP journals.} There is now an explicit \texttt{aip} society option along with support for AIP journals. Please see the \textit{Author's Guide to AIP Substyles for \revtex~4.1}. In addition, \revtex~4.1 provides an extensible system for the easy addition of new collections of journals.
+\item \textbf{Endnotes now ordered correctly.} Endnotes in the bibliography now appear in the correct order, interleaved with citations.
+\item \textbf{Multiple references in a single citation supported using a special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} One of the major new features in 4.1 made possible by the joint work on \texttt{natbib 8.3}. Multiple Bib\TeX\ entries can be combined into a single \cmd\bibitem\ command.
+\item \textbf{Bib\TeX\ style files can now display journal article titles in the bibliography.} Use the \texttt{longbibliography} class option.
+\item \textbf{Free form text can be prepended and appended to a bibliographic entry using the special starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command.} Often a citation in the bibliography will have explanatory text such as \textit{See also} or \textit{and references therein} before and after the actual citation. The new \revtex~4.1 \cmd\cite\ command allows the specification of both text to precede and follow a citation.
+\item \textbf{Structured Abstracts.} Use of the \texttt{description} environment in abstracts now provides for ``structured" abstracts.
+\item \textbf{Figures referring to videos now supported.} A ``figure" may now be labeled as a \textbf{Video} by using the \texttt{video} environment. A frame from the video may be included in the figure and a URL to link the caption's label to the online video also may be included. There is also a \cmd\listofvideos\ command.
+\item \textbf{Better support for arXiv.org in Bib\TeX\ } Three more Bib\TeX\ fields have been added: \texttt{SLACcitation}, \texttt{archivePrefix}, and \texttt{primaryClass} in addition to the existing field \texttt{eprint}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Bug Fixes in \revtex~4.1}
+One of the main goals of \revtex~4.1 is, of course, to fix the bugs that were released in \revtex~4. The following is a list of bugs that have been fixed.
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \textbf{Improved Bib\TeX\ \texttt{bst} files.} In addition to the new features above, numerous other improvements to the APS \texttt{bst} files have been made, including support for displaying journal article titles and many fixes for \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics}. Also, long author lists are no longer automatically truncated.
+\item \textbf{\cmd\footnote\ in \cmd\widetext\ and \texttt{table*} environments improved.} \cmd\footnote\relax s in the \cmd\widetext\ or \texttt{table*} environments are now correctly placed and formatted.
+\item \textbf{Email addresses no longer print twice on papers less than one page long.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{eqnarray} alignment improved.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\collaboration\ can be used with the \texttt{groupedaddress} option now.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{letterpaper} now ensured as default paper size.}
+\item \textbf{Table of Contents formatting improved.}
+\item \textbf{Support for \texttt{longtable} and \texttt{lscape} packages improved.}
+\item \textbf{\texttt{reftest} restored.}
+\item \textbf{Compatibility with the \texttt{geometry, lineno,} and \texttt{colortbl} packages improved.} For line numbering, rather than using \texttt{lineno.sty} directly, the \texttt{linenumbers} class option should be used (this will call in \texttt{lineno.sty} with a proper set of default parameters).
+\item \texttt{hyperref} \textbf{fixes}. Improved compatibility between footnotes and the \texttt{hyperref} package. In particular, table footnotes were fixed. More anchors for \texttt{hyperref} were also added (titlepage, abstract, and acknowledgements).
+\item \textbf{Documents can have more than 256 \cmd\cite\ commands now.}
+\item \textbf{\cmd\listoffigures\ and \cmd\listoftables\ fixed.}
+\item \textbf{Figure and table labels in captions now reflect proper APS style.}
+\item \textbf{RMP style files conform better to RMP style guidelines.}
+\item \textbf{Section heading upper-casing improved.}
+\item \textbf{Repeated characters at start of affiliation no longer disappear when using \texttt{groupedaddress} option.}
+\item \textbf{There have been many other bug fixes and improvements to the internal \texttt{ltxgrid} package as well.}
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{\revtex~4 Backwards Compatibility}
+The vast majority of documents prepared under \revtex~4 should process correctly under \revtex~4.1. However, the formatting of the pages and, if using Bib\TeX, the references may change. Also, the behavior of some macros may be different. For instance, the \texttt{title} macro now requires the use of \texttt{protect} for fragile arguments. This may cause some documents prepared under \revtex~4 to fail under 4.1. Some macro packages that depend on the internals of \revtex~4 may also no longer work. Documents using those packages will, of course, also will not process under 4.1.
+
+\section{\label{sec:additional}Additional Details}
+
+\subsection{Multiple references in a single bibliography entry}
+One of the most frequently requested features since the release of \revtex~4 has been to allow more than one reference to appear in a single bibliography entry when using Bib\TeX. This can now be done in \revtex~4.1 by using a starred (*) argument to the \cmd\cite\ command. This requires the latest version of \texttt{natbib}, developed in conjunction with \revtex~4.1, and the new \texttt{bst} files that come with \revtex~4.1. To combine multiple references into a single \cmd\bibitem, precede the second, third, etc. citation keys in the \cmd\cite\ command with an asterisk (*). For example \verb+\cite{bethe, *feynman, *bohr}+ will combine the \cmd\bibitem\relax s with keys \texttt{bethe}, \texttt{feynman}, and \texttt{bohr} into a single entry in the bibliography separated by semicolons.
+
+\subsection{Prepending and/or appending text to a citation}
+The expanded syntax for the \cmd\cite\ command argument can also be used to specify text before and/or after a citation. For instance, a citation such as:
+\begin{verbatim}
+[19] A similar expression was derived in
+A. V. Andreev, Phys. Rev. Lett. 99, 247204
+(2007) in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that no
+integration over ky is present there.
+\end{verbatim}
+may be created by the following \cmd\cite\ command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\cite{*[{A similar expression was derived
+in }] [{ in the context of carbon nanotube
+p-n junctions. The only difference is that no
+integration over ky is present there.}]andreev2007]
+\end{verbatim}
+Please note the use of curly braces to enclose the text within the square brackets.
+\subsection{Structured Abstracts}
+A ``structured" abstract is an abstract divided into labeled sections. For instance, \textit{Physical Review C} would like authors to provide abstracts with sections summarizing the paper's \textbf{Background}, \textbf{Purpose}, \textbf{Method}, \textbf{Results}, and \textbf{Conclusions}. This can be accomplished by using the \texttt{description} environment within the \texttt{abstract} environment. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{abstract}
+\begin{description}
+\item[Background] This part would describe the
+context needed to understand what the paper
+is about.
+\item[Purpose] This part would state the purpose
+of the present paper.
+\item[Method] This part describe the methods
+used in the paper.
+\item[Results] This part would summarize the
+results.
+\item[Conclusions] This part would state the
+conclusions of the paper.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Video Environment}
+Papers often refer to multimedia videos. The \texttt{video} environment is identical to the \texttt{figure} environment, but the caption will be labeled as a \textbf{Video} (with its own counter independent of figures). A URL can also be specified so that the caption label can be linked to the online video (if using the \texttt{hyperref} package). The included graphic (using \cmd\includegraphics\ from the \texttt{graphics} or \texttt{graphicx} package) would be a representation frame from the video. A \texttt{\cmd\listofvideos} is also provided. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{video}
+\includegraphics{videoframe.jpg}
+\setfloatlink{http://some.video.com/fun.mov}
+\caption{\label{vid:interest}This is a video of
+something fun.}
+\end{video}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Better arXiv.org support in Bib\TeX\ }
+
+
+There have been substantial improvements in the \revtex\ Bib\TeX\ style files. For instance, the \texttt{.bib} entry
+\begin{verbatim}
+ at Unpublished{Ginsparg:1988ui,
+ author = "Ginsparg, Paul H.",
+ title = "{APPLIED CONFORMAL FIELD THEORY}",
+ year = "1988",
+ eprint = "hep-th/9108028",
+ archivePrefix = "arXiv",
+ SLACcitation = "%%CITATION = HEP-TH/9108028;%%"
+}
+\end{verbatim}
+will include the arXiv.org e-print identifier as \texttt{arXiv:hep-th/9108028} and hyperlink it (if using \texttt{hyperref}). The newer format for arXiv identifiers with primary classificiations will produce output such as \texttt{arXiv:0905.1949 [hep-ph]}.
+
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+The development of \revtex~4.1 was managed by Mark Doyle (APS). The development of the new AIP style files and their accompanying documentation was managed by Susan Joy (AIP) with the help of Chris McMahon (AIP) and Rich O'Keeffe (AIP). Testing and evaluation were done by Michele Hake (APS), Liz Belmont (AIP), Brian Goss (AIP), Alison Waldron (AIP), and Phil Robertson (AIP). Additional detailed testing and feedback were provided by Lev Bishop (Yale).
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/auguide/whatsnew4-1.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,482 @@
+ at PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}"
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%"
+}
+
+ at BOOK{Bire82,
+ author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+ year = 1982,
+ title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+ publisher = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{feyn54,
+ author = "R. P. Feynman",
+ year = "1954",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "94",
+ pages = "262",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{epr,
+ author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen",
+ year = "1935",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "47",
+ pages = "777",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+ author = "Berman, Jr., G. P. and Izrailev, Jr., F. M.",
+ title = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+ journal = "Physica D",
+ volume = "88",
+ pages = "445",
+ year = "1983",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+ author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns",
+ title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides",
+ journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.",
+ volume = "51",
+ pages = "477--492",
+ year = "1988",
+}
+
+ at MISC{witten2001,
+ author = "Edward Witten",
+ eprint = "hep-th/0106109",
+ year = "2001",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ title = "Williams Hematology",
+ chapter = "7",
+ pages = "654--662",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ year = "1994",
+
+ edition = "5",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{inbook-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ title = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+ volume = 1,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+ type = "Section",
+ chapter = "1.2",
+ pages = "10--119",
+ note = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+ author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson",
+ journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B",
+ title = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ volume = "777",
+ pages = "1395",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+ author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+ author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+ author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+ title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+ month = nov # ", " # dec,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+ at MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007,
+
+ author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "personal communication",
+ month = "1~" # may,
+ year = "2007",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007,
+ title = "AIP Conf. Proc.",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ editor = "J. Smith",
+ volume = "841",
+ number = "21",
+ series = "",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ organization = "",
+ publisher = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "Boston",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+ author = "Y. Burstyn",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}",
+ note = "(unpublished)",
+
+ month = "5--8~" # oct,
+ year = "2004",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001,
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ editor = "B. Quinn",
+ address = "New York",
+ publisher = "Wiley",
+ note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+ author = "A. G. Agarwal",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}",
+ journal = "Semiconductors",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ volume = "66",
+ pages = "1238",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+ author = "R. Smith",
+ title = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+ journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+ year = "",
+ volume = "",
+ number = "",
+ pages = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2007a,
+ author = "J. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "Proc. SPIE",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ volume = "124",
+ pages = "367",
+ note = "Required title is missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+ author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+ title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+ institution = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "Wishful Research Result",
+ number = "7",
+ address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+ month = oct,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Nelson1999,
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ type = "{TWI Report}",
+ number = "666/1999",
+ institution = "",
+ year = jan # "~1999",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Fields2005,
+ author = "W. K. Fields",
+ type = "{ECE Report No.}",
+ number = "AL944",
+ institution = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Zalkins2008,
+
+ author = "Y. M. Zalkins",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426",
+ month = "",
+ year = "2008",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Nelson2005,
+
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000",
+ year = "12~" # dec # "~2005",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+ author = "J. K. Nelson",
+ title = "",
+ school = "New York University",
+ year = "1999",
+
+ type = "M.{S}. thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+ author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+ title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+ school = "Stanford University",
+ type = "Master's project",
+ address = "English Department",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+ author = "S. M. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ type = "{Ph.D.} thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+ author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "J. Geophys. Res.",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ volume = "108",
+ number = "D6",
+ pages = "4201",
+ month = "",
+ note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+ author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+ title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+ school = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+ address = "Department of French",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOK{book-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+ volume = 2,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+ note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+ author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+ title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+ howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+ address = "Stanford, California",
+ month = feb,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ year = "2000",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at inBook{Magnetism,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+}
+ year = "1965",
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Smith80,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ title = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ year = "1980",
+ address = "New York",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+ at article{ZS71,
+ author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+ year = "1971",
+ title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+ journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+ volume = "61",
+ pages = "118--134",
+ translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ year = "1994",
+ booktitle = "Williams Hematology",
+ edition = "5",
+ chapter = "7",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+ pages = "654--662",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ year = "2000",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+ booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ year = "1965",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ year = "1980",
+ booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ address = "New York",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+ key = "incol-ful",
+ author = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+ year = 1977,
+ title = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+ booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+ edition = "Third",
+ series = "Fast Computers",
+ number = 23,
+ chapter = 3,
+ type = "Part",
+ editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ month = sep,
+ pages = "179--183",
+ note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+ author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ pages = "133--139",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "Boston",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at MANUAL{manual-full,
+ author = "Larry Manmaker",
+ title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+ organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+ address = "Silicon Valley",
+ edition = "Silver",
+ month = apr # "-" # may,
+ year = 1986,
+ note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.bib
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,613 @@
+% ****** Start of file aipsamp.tex ******
+%
+% This file is part of the AIP files in the AIP distribution for REVTeX 4.
+% Version 4.1 of REVTeX, October 2009
+%
+% Copyright (c) 2009 American Institute of Physics.
+%
+% See the AIP README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.1
+%
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+% 1) latex aipsamp
+% 2) bibtex aipsamp
+% 3) latex aipsamp
+% 4) latex aipsamp
+%
+% Use this file as a source of example code for your aip document.
+% Use the file aiptemplate.tex as a template for your document.
+\documentclass[%
+ aip,
+ jmp,%
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+%preprint,%
+ reprint,%
+%author-year,%
+%author-numerical,%
+]{revtex4-1}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{AIP/123-QED}
+
+\title[Sample title]{Sample Title:\\with Forced Linebreak\footnote{Error!}}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{Footnote to title of article.}
+
+\author{A. Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{B. Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author at institution.edu.}
+\affiliation{
+Authors' institution and/or address%\\This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\author{C. Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author.}
+\affiliation{%
+Second institution and/or address%\\This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+ % but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article. It is used for
+secondary publications and for information retrieval purposes.
+%
+Valid PACS numbers may be entered using the \verb+\pacs{#1}+ command.
+\end{abstract}
+
+\pacs{Valid PACS appear here}% PACS, the Physics and Astronomy
+ % Classification Scheme.
+\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+ %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{quotation}
+The ``lead paragraph'' is encapsulated with the \LaTeX\
+\verb+quotation+ environment and is formatted as a single paragraph before the first section heading.
+(The \verb+quotation+ environment reverts to its usual meaning after the first sectioning command.)
+Note that numbered references are allowed in the lead paragraph.
+%
+The lead paragraph will only be found in an article being prepared for the journal \textit{Chaos}.
+\end{quotation}
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.1 (and
+\LaTeXe) in manuscripts prepared for submission to AIP
+journals. Further information can be found in the documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://authors.aip.org} and in the documentation for
+REV\TeX~4.1 itself.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in both the \texttt{preprint} (the default) and
+\texttt{reprint} styles; the latter format may be used to
+mimic final journal output. Either format may be used for submission
+purposes; however, for peer review and production, AIP will format the
+article using the \texttt{preprint} class option. Hence, it is
+essential that authors check that their manuscripts format acceptably
+under \texttt{preprint}. Manuscripts submitted to AIP that do not
+format correctly under the \texttt{preprint} option may be delayed in
+both the editorial and production processes.
+
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ to get the page number right automatically.) The
+width-changing commands only take effect in \texttt{twocolumn}
+formatting. It has no effect if \texttt{preprint} formatting is chosen
+instead.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{sec:level3}Third-level heading: Citations and Footnotes}
+
+Citations in text refer to entries in the Bibliography;
+they use the commands \verb+\cite{#1}+ or \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+.
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly,
+its entire repertoire of commands are available in your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details.
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ is a comma-separated list of \emph{keys};
+a key may consist of letters and numerals.
+
+By default, citations are numerical; \cite{feyn54} author-year citations are an option.
+To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+: (Refs.~\onlinecite{witten2001,epr,Bire82}).
+REV\TeX\ ``collapses'' lists of consecutive numerical citations when appropriate.
+REV\TeX\ provides the ability to properly punctuate textual citations in author-year style;
+this facility works correctly with numerical citations only with \texttt{natbib}'s compress option turned off.
+To illustrate, we cite several together \cite{feyn54,witten2001,epr,Berman1983},
+and once again (Refs.~\onlinecite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983}).
+Note that, when numerical citations are used, the references were sorted into the same order they appear in the bibliography.
+
+A reference within the bibliography is specified with a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command,
+where the argument is the citation key mentioned above.
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by using Bib\TeX.
+The AIP styles for REV\TeX~4 include Bib\TeX\ style files
+\verb+aipnum.bst+ and \verb+aipauth.bst+, appropriate for
+numbered and author-year bibliographies,
+respectively.
+REV\TeX~4 will automatically choose the style appropriate for
+the document's selected class options: the default is numerical, and
+you obtain the author-year style by specifying a class option of \verb+author-year+.
+
+This sample file demonstrates a simple use of Bib\TeX\
+via a \verb+\bibliography+ command referencing the \verb+aipsamp.bib+ file.
+Running Bib\TeX\ (in this case \texttt{bibtex
+aipsamp}) after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\verb+aipsamp.bbl+ which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ commands). If not using Bib\TeX, the
+\verb+thebibiliography+ environment should be used instead.
+
+\paragraph{Fourth-level heading is run in.}%
+Footnotes are produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command.
+Numerical style citations put footnotes into the
+bibliography\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.}.
+Author-year and numerical author-year citation styles (each for its own reason) cannot use this method.
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography, \emph{you
+must re-run BibTeX every time you change any of your document's
+footnotes}.
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by
+default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations, the most common kind:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+A few notes on \verb=\tag{#1}=. \verb+\tag{#1}+ requires
+\texttt{amsmath}. The \verb+\tag{#1}+ must come before the
+\verb+\label{#1}+, if any. The numbering set with \verb+\tag{#1}+ is
+\textit{transparent} to the automatic numbering in REV\TeX{};
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time, and it must be
+manually adjusted if other equations are added. \verb+\tag{#1}+ works
+with both single-line and multiline equations. \verb+\tag{#1}+ should
+only be used in exceptional case - do not use it to number all
+equations in a paper.
+
+Enclosing single-line and multiline equations in
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are ``numbered'' with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below:
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+Putting a \verb+\label{#1}+ command right after the
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+, allows one to
+reference all the equations in a subequations environment. For
+example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans
+across the full page. The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot be easily broken into four lines or less:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;. \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show the output is in wide format.
+(Since there is no input line between \verb+\equation+ and
+this paragraph, there is no paragraph indent for this paragraph.)
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number sections, equations, figure
+captions, and tables. In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands. To reference a
+particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear in a section heading, within an
+equation, or in a table or figure caption. The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in the text where the citation is to be displayed. Some
+examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}This is a narrow table which fits into a
+text column when using \texttt{twocolumn} formatting. Note that
+REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically. This table illustrates left-aligned, centered, and
+right-aligned columns. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcr}
+Left\footnote{Note a.}&Centered\footnote{Note b.}&Right\\
+\hline
+1 & 2 & 3\\
+10 & 20 & 30\\
+100 & 200 & 300\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.
+
+\section{Figures and Tables}
+Figures and tables are typically ``floats''; \LaTeX\ determines their
+final position via placement rules.
+\LaTeX\ isn't always successful in automatically placing floats where you wish them.
+
+Figures are marked up with the \texttt{figure} environment, the content of which
+imports the image (\verb+\includegraphics+) followed by the figure caption (\verb+\caption+).
+The argument of the latter command should itself contain a \verb+\label+ command if you
+wish to refer to your figure with \verb+\ref+.
+
+Import your image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages. These packages both define the
+\verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command, but they differ in the optional
+arguments for specifying the orientation, scaling, and translation of the figure.
+Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}%
+\begin{figure}
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+is small enough to fit in a single column, while
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the \texttt{figure*} environment to get a wide
+figure, spanning the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+is too wide for a single column,
+so instead the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.
+
+The analog of the \texttt{figure} environment is \texttt{table}, which uses
+the same \verb+\caption+ command.
+However, you should type your caption command first within the \texttt{table},
+instead of last as you did for \texttt{figure}.
+
+The heart of any table is the \texttt{tabular} environment,
+which represents the table content as a (vertical) sequence of table rows,
+each containing a (horizontal) sequence of table cells.
+Cells are separated by the \verb+&+ character;
+the row terminates with \verb+\\+.
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are displayed in each of the columns.
+For instance, a column
+may be centered (\verb+c+), left-justified (\verb+l+), right-justified (\verb+r+),
+or aligned on a decimal point (\verb+d+).
+(Table~\ref{tab:table4}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}Numbers in columns Three--Five have been
+aligned by using the ``d'' column specifier (requires the
+\texttt{dcolumn} package).
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without
+a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point.
+Use the
+``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+ &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+ & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+illustrates the use of decimal column alignment.)
+
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well, although
+REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table.
+Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command.
+The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved by enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment.
+Rows whose columns span multiple columns can be typeset using \LaTeX's
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command
+(for example, see the first row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstrates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnote{This is a footnote in a table that spans the full page
+width in \texttt{twocolumn} mode. It is supposed to set on the full width of the page, just as the caption does. }
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+The tables in this document illustrate various effects.
+Tables that fit in a narrow column are contained in a \texttt{table}
+environment.
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, therefore set with the
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Lengthy tables may need to break across pages.
+A simple way to allow this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+Alternatively, using the standard \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable}
+gives more control over how tables break and allows headers and footers
+to be specified for each page of the table.
+An example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography).
+The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters.
+However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote.
+In this case,
+create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value.
+Each time the same value for \texttt{\#1} is used,
+the same mark is produced in the table.
+The \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment.
+Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and
+\ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}A table with more columns still fits
+properly in a column. Note that several entries share the same
+footnote. Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see
+exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+for an illustration.
+
+All AIP journals require that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order.
+\LaTeX's automatic numbering of floats is your friend here:
+just put each \texttt{figure} environment immediately following
+its first reference (\verb+\ref+), as we have done in this example file.
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to set up the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+\subsubsection{\label{app:subsubsec}A subsubsection in an appendix}
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+\nocite{*}
+\bibliography{aipsamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aipsamp.tex ******
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aipsamp.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+%% ****** Start of file aiptemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%% This file is part of the files in the distribution of AIP substyles for REVTeX4.
+%% Version 4.1 of 9 October 2009.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing documents for use with
+% the REVTEX 4.1 document class and the AIP substyles.
+%
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+
+\documentclass[aip,graphicx]{revtex4-1}
+%\documentclass[aip,reprint]{revtex4-1}
+
+\draft % marks overfull lines with a black rule on the right
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report number
+% on the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+%\preprint{}
+
+\title{} %Title of paper
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current author.
+% Explanatory text should go in the []'s,
+% actual e-mail address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro for the type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last \affiliation command.
+% The \affiliation command should follow the other information.
+
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+% Collaboration name, if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress option in \documentclass).
+% \noaffiliation is required (may also be used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+\pacs{}% insert suggested PACS numbers in braces on next line
+
+\maketitle %\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract and \pacs
+
+% Body of paper goes here. Use proper sectioning commands.
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+%\label{}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column format so that long equations can be displayed.
+% Use only when necessary.
+%\begin{widetext}
+%$$\mbox{put long equation here}$$
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% Figures should be put into the text as floats.
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e).
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach for examples.
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command.
+% Put the label that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+%
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}%
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Tables may be be put in the text as floats.
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{} }
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% Put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{your-bib-file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file aiptemplate.tex ******
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/aiptemplate.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_1.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aip/fig_2.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,484 @@
+ at PREAMBLE{
+ "\providecommand{\noopsort}[1]{}"
+ # "\providecommand{\singleletter}[1]{#1}%"
+}
+
+ at BOOK{Bire82,
+ author = {N. D. Birell and P. C. W. Davies},
+ year = 1982,
+ title = {Quantum Fields in Curved Space},
+ publisher = {Cambridge University Press}
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{feyn54,
+ author = "R. P. Feynman",
+ year = "1954",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "94",
+ pages = "262",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{epr,
+ author = "A. Einstein and {\relax Yu} Podolsky and N. Rosen",
+ collaboration = "EPR",
+ year = "1935",
+ journal = "Phys.\ Rev.",
+ volume = "47",
+ pages = "777",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Berman1983,
+ author = "G. P. Berman, Jr. and F. M. Izrailev, Jr.",
+ title = "Stability of nonlinear modes",
+ journal = "Physica D",
+ volume = "88",
+ pages = "445",
+ year = "1983",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Davies1998,
+ author = "E. B. Davies and L. Parns",
+ title = "Trapped modes in acoustic waveguides",
+ journal = "Q. J. Mech. Appl. Math.",
+ volume = "51",
+ pages = "477--492",
+ year = "1988",
+}
+
+ at MISC{witten2001,
+ author = "Edward Witten",
+ eprint = "hep-th/0106109",
+ year = "2001",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Beutler1994,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ booktitle = "Williams Hematology",
+ chapter = "7",
+ pages = "654--662",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ year = "1994",
+
+ edition = "5",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Beutler1994a,
+ author = "E. Beutler",
+ editor = "E. Beutler and M. A. Lichtman and B. W. Coller and T. S. Kipps",
+ booktitle = "Williams Hematology",
+ chapter = "7",
+ pages = "654--662",
+ publisher = "McGraw-Hill",
+ year = "1994",
+
+ edition = "5",
+ address = "New York",
+ volume = "2",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{inbook-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ booktitle = "Fundamental Algorithms",
+ volume = 1,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973b}1973",
+ type = "Section",
+ chapter = "1.2",
+ pages = "10--119",
+ note = "A full INBOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2005,
+ author = "J. S. Smith and G. W. Johnson",
+ journal = "Philos. Trans. R. Soc. London, Ser. B",
+ title = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ volume = "777",
+ pages = "1395",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010,
+ author = "W. J. Smith and T. J. Johnson and B. G. Miller",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (unpublished)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "2010",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Smith2010a,
+ author = "V. K. Smith and K. Johnson and M. O. Klein",
+ title = "Surface chemistry and preferential crystal orientation on a silicon surface",
+ note = "{J. Appl. Phys.} (submitted)",
+
+ month = "",
+ year = "2010",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{unpublished-full,
+ author = "Ulrich {\"{U}}nderwood and Ned {\~N}et and Paul {\={P}}ot",
+ title = "Lower Bounds for Wishful Research Results",
+ month = nov # ", " # dec,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "Talk at Fanstord University (A full UNPUBLISHED entry)",
+}
+
+ at MISC{JohnsonMillerSmith2007,
+
+ author = "M. P. Johnson and K. L. Miller and K. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "personal communication",
+ month = "1~" # may,
+ year = "2007",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Smith2007,
+ title = "AIP Conf. Proc.",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ editor = "J. Smith",
+ volume = "841",
+ number = "21",
+ series = "",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ organization = "",
+ publisher = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{proceedings-full,
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "Boston",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full PROCEEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at UNPUBLISHED{Burstyn2004,
+ author = "Y. Burstyn",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 5th International Molecular Beam Epitaxy Conference, Santa Fe, NM}",
+ note = "(unpublished)",
+
+ month = "5--8~" # oct,
+ year = "2004",
+}
+
+ at PROCEEDINGS{Quinn2001,
+ title = "{Proceedings of the 2003 Particle Accelerator Conference, Portland, OR, 12-16 May 2005}",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ editor = "B. Quinn",
+ address = "New York",
+ publisher = "Wiley",
+ note = "Albeit the conference was held in 2005, it was the 2003 conference, and the proceedings were published in 2001; go figure",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Agarwal2001,
+ author = "A. G. Agarwal",
+ title = "{Proceedings of the Fifth Low Temperature Conference, Madison, WI, 1999}",
+ journal = "Semiconductors",
+ year = "2001",
+
+ volume = "66",
+ pages = "1238",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{SmithDA01,
+ author = "R. Smith",
+ title = "Hummingbirds are our friends",
+ journal = {J. Appl. Phys. (these proceedings)},
+ year = "2001",
+ volume = "",
+ number = "",
+ pages = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "Abstract No. DA-01",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{Smith2007a,
+ author = "J. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "Proc. SPIE",
+ year = "2007",
+
+ volume = "124",
+ pages = "367",
+ note = "Required title is missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{techreport-full,
+ author = "Tom T{\'{e}}rrific",
+ title = "An {$O(n \log n / \! \log\log n)$} Sorting Algorithm",
+ institution = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "Wishful Research Result",
+ number = "7",
+ address = "Computer Science Department, Fanstord, California",
+ month = oct,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full TECHREPORT entry",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Nelson1999,
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ type = "{TWI Report}",
+ number = "666/1999",
+ institution = "",
+ year = jan # "~1999",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at TECHREPORT{Fields2005,
+ author = "W. K. Fields",
+ type = "{ECE Report No.}",
+ number = "AL944",
+ institution = "",
+ year = "2005",
+
+ note = "Required institution missing",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Zalkins2008,
+
+ author = "Y. M. Zalkins",
+ title = "",
+ howpublished = "e-print arXiv:cond-mat/040426",
+ month = "",
+ year = "2008",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MISC{Nelson2005,
+
+ author = "J. Nelson",
+ howpublished = "{U.S. Patent No.} 5,693,000",
+ year = "12~" # dec # "~2005",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{Nelson1999a,
+ author = "J. K. Nelson",
+ title = "",
+ school = "New York University",
+ year = "1999",
+
+ type = "M.{S}. thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at MASTERSTHESIS{mastersthesis-full,
+ author = "{\'{E}}douard Masterly",
+ title = "Mastering Thesis Writing",
+ school = "Stanford University",
+ type = "Master's project",
+ address = "English Department",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full MASTERSTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{Smith2003,
+ author = "S. M. Smith",
+ title = "",
+ school = "Massachusetts Institute of Technology",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ type = "{Ph.D.} thesis",
+ address = "",
+ month = "",
+ note = "",
+}
+
+ at ARTICLE{KawaLin2003,
+ author = "S. R. Kawa and S.-J. Lin",
+ title = "",
+ journal = "J. Geophys. Res.",
+ year = "2003",
+
+ volume = "108",
+ number = "D6",
+ pages = "4201",
+ month = "",
+ note = "{DOI:10.1029/2002JD002268}",
+}
+
+ at PHDTHESIS{phdthesis-full,
+ author = "F. Phidias Phony-Baloney",
+ title = "Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning {F}rench Phrases",
+ school = "Fanstord University",
+ type = "{PhD} Dissertation",
+ address = "Department of French",
+ month = jun # "-" # aug,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full PHDTHESIS entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOK{book-full,
+ author = "Donald E. Knuth",
+ title = "Seminumerical Algorithms",
+ volume = 2,
+ series = "The Art of Computer Programming",
+ publisher = "Addison-Wesley",
+ address = "Reading, Massachusetts",
+ edition = "Second",
+ month = "10~" # jan,
+ year = "\noopsort{1973c}1981",
+ note = "A full BOOK entry",
+}
+
+ at BOOKLET{booklet-full,
+ author = "Jill C. Knvth",
+ title = "The Programming of Computer Art",
+ howpublished = "Vernier Art Center",
+ address = "Stanford, California",
+ month = feb,
+ year = 1988,
+ note = "A full BOOKLET entry",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{ballagh2000,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids, Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ year = "2000",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{ballagh2000a,
+ author = "R. Ballagh and C.M. Savage",
+ title = "Bose-Einstein condensation: from atomic physics to quantum fluids",
+ editor = "C.M. Savage and M. Das",
+ booktitle = "Proceedings of the 13th Physics Summer School",
+ year = "2000",
+ publisher = "World Scientific",
+ address = "Singapore",
+ eprint = "cond-mat/0008070",
+}
+
+ at inBook{Magnetism,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Magnetisma,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{Magnetismb,
+ author = "W. Opechowski and R. Guccione",
+ title = "Introduction to the Theory of Normal Metals",
+ editor = "G. T. Rado and H. Suhl",
+ booktitle = "Magnetism",
+ volume = "IIa",
+ pages = "105",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ year = "1965",
+}
+
+ at INBOOK{Smith80,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ title = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ year = "1980",
+ address = "New York",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+}
+
+ at article{ZS71,
+ author = "V. E. Zakharov and A. B. Shabat",
+ title = "Exact theory of two-dimensional self-focusing and one-dimensional self-modulation of waves in nonlinear media",
+ journal = "Zh. Eksp. Teor. Fiz.",
+ volume = "61",
+ year = "1971",
+ pages = "118--134",
+ translation = "Sov. Phys. JETP \textbf{34}, 62 (1972)"
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{Smith80a,
+ author = "J. M. Smith",
+ booktitle = "Molecular Dynamics",
+ editor = "C. Brown",
+ publisher = "Academic",
+ year = "1980",
+ address = "New York",
+}
+
+ at INCOLLECTION{incollection-full,
+ author = "Daniel D. Lincoll",
+ title = "Semigroups of Recurrences",
+ editor = "David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh",
+ booktitle = "High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization",
+ number = 23,
+ series = "Fast Computers",
+ chapter = 3,
+ type = "Part",
+ pages = "179--183",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ address = "New York",
+ edition = "Third",
+ month = sep,
+ year = 1977,
+ note = "A full INCOLLECTION entry",
+}
+
+ at INPROCEEDINGS{inproceedings-full,
+ author = "Alfred V. Oaho and Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ title = "On Notions of Information Transfer in {VLSI} Circuits",
+ editor = "Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis",
+ booktitle = "Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM",
+ bookaddress = "Boston, 1982",
+ number = 17,
+ series = "All ACM Conferences",
+ pages = "133--139",
+ month = mar,
+ year = 1983,
+ address = "New York",
+ organization = "ACM",
+ publisher = "Academic Press",
+ note = "A full INPROCEDINGS entry",
+}
+
+ at MANUAL{manual-full,
+ author = "Larry Manmaker",
+ title = "The Definitive Computer Manual",
+ organization = "Chips-R-Us",
+ address = "Silicon Valley",
+ edition = "Silver",
+ month = apr # "-" # may,
+ year = 1986,
+ note = "A full MANUAL entry",
+}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.bib
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,757 @@
+% ****** Start of file apssamp.tex ******
+%
+% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4.1 distribution.
+% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%
+% Copyright (c) 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%
+% See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%
+% TeX'ing this file requires that you have AMS-LaTeX 2.0 installed
+% as well as the rest of the prerequisites for REVTeX 4.1
+%
+% See the REVTeX 4 README file
+% It also requires running BibTeX. The commands are as follows:
+%
+% 1) latex apssamp.tex
+% 2) bibtex apssamp
+% 3) latex apssamp.tex
+% 4) latex apssamp.tex
+%
+\documentclass[%
+ reprint,
+%superscriptaddress,
+%groupedaddress,
+%unsortedaddress,
+%runinaddress,
+%frontmatterverbose,
+%preprint,
+%showpacs,preprintnumbers,
+%nofootinbib,
+%nobibnotes,
+%bibnotes,
+ amsmath,amssymb,
+ aps,
+%pra,
+%prb,
+%rmp,
+%prstab,
+%prstper,
+%floatfix,
+]{revtex4-1}
+
+\usepackage{graphicx}% Include figure files
+\usepackage{dcolumn}% Align table columns on decimal point
+\usepackage{bm}% bold math
+%\usepackage{hyperref}% add hypertext capabilities
+%\usepackage[mathlines]{lineno}% Enable numbering of text and display math
+%\linenumbers\relax % Commence numbering lines
+
+%\usepackage[showframe,%Uncomment any one of the following lines to test
+%%scale=0.7, marginratio={1:1, 2:3}, ignoreall,% default settings
+%%text={7in,10in},centering,
+%%margin=1.5in,
+%%total={6.5in,8.75in}, top=1.2in, left=0.9in, includefoot,
+%%height=10in,a5paper,hmargin={3cm,0.8in},
+%]{geometry}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\preprint{APS/123-QED}
+
+\title{Manuscript Title:\\with Forced Linebreak}% Force line breaks with \\
+\thanks{A footnote to the article title}%
+
+\author{Ann Author}
+ \altaffiliation[Also at ]{Physics Department, XYZ University.}%Lines break automatically or can be forced with \\
+\author{Second Author}%
+ \email{Second.Author at institution.edu}
+\affiliation{%
+ Authors' institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\collaboration{MUSO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation
+
+\author{Charlie Author}
+ \homepage{http://www.Second.institution.edu/~Charlie.Author}
+\affiliation{
+ Second institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced% with \\
+}%
+\affiliation{
+ Third institution, the second for Charlie Author
+}%
+\author{Delta Author}
+\affiliation{%
+ Authors' institution and/or address\\
+ This line break forced with \textbackslash\textbackslash
+}%
+
+\collaboration{CLEO Collaboration}%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}% It is always \today, today,
+ % but any date may be explicitly specified
+
+\begin{abstract}
+An article usually includes an abstract, a concise summary of the work
+covered at length in the main body of the article.
+\begin{description}
+\item[Usage]
+Secondary publications and information retrieval purposes.
+\item[PACS numbers]
+May be entered using the \verb+\pacs{#1}+ command.
+\item[Structure]
+You may use the \texttt{description} environment to structure your abstract;
+use the optional argument of the \verb+\item+ command to give the category of each item.
+\end{description}
+\end{abstract}
+
+\pacs{Valid PACS appear here}% PACS, the Physics and Astronomy
+ % Classification Scheme.
+%\keywords{Suggested keywords}%Use showkeys class option if keyword
+ %display desired
+\maketitle
+
+%\tableofcontents
+
+\section{\label{sec:level1}First-level heading:\protect\\ The line
+break was forced \lowercase{via} \textbackslash\textbackslash}
+
+This sample document demonstrates proper use of REV\TeX~4.1 (and
+\LaTeXe) in mansucripts prepared for submission to APS
+journals. Further information can be found in the REV\TeX~4.1
+documentation included in the distribution or available at
+\url{http://authors.aps.org/revtex4/}.
+
+When commands are referred to in this example file, they are always
+shown with their required arguments, using normal \TeX{} format. In
+this format, \verb+#1+, \verb+#2+, etc. stand for required
+author-supplied arguments to commands. For example, in
+\verb+\section{#1}+ the \verb+#1+ stands for the title text of the
+author's section heading, and in \verb+\title{#1}+ the \verb+#1+
+stands for the title text of the paper.
+
+Line breaks in section headings at all levels can be introduced using
+\textbackslash\textbackslash. A blank input line tells \TeX\ that the
+paragraph has ended. Note that top-level section headings are
+automatically uppercased. If a specific letter or word should appear in
+lowercase instead, you must escape it using \verb+\lowercase{#1}+ as
+in the word ``via'' above.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:level2}Second-level heading: Formatting}
+
+This file may be formatted in either the \texttt{preprint} or
+\texttt{reprint} style. \texttt{reprint} format mimics final journal output.
+Either format may be used for submission purposes. \texttt{letter} sized paper should
+be used when submitting to APS journals.
+
+\subsubsection{Wide text (A level-3 head)}
+The \texttt{widetext} environment will make the text the width of the
+full page, as on page~\pageref{eq:wideeq}. (Note the use the
+\verb+\pageref{#1}+ command to refer to the page number.)
+\paragraph{Note (Fourth-level head is run in)}
+The width-changing commands only take effect in two-column formatting.
+There is no effect if text is in a single column.
+
+\subsection{\label{sec:citeref}Citations and References}
+A citation in text uses the command \verb+\cite{#1}+ or
+\verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ and refers to an entry in the bibliography.
+An entry in the bibliography is a reference to another document.
+
+\subsubsection{Citations}
+Because REV\TeX\ uses the \verb+natbib+ package of Patrick Daly,
+the entire repertoire of commands in that package are available for your document;
+see the \verb+natbib+ documentation for further details. Please note that
+REV\TeX\ requires version 8.31a or later of \verb+natbib+.
+
+\paragraph{Syntax}
+The argument of \verb+\cite+ may be a single \emph{key},
+or may consist of a comma-separated list of keys.
+The citation \emph{key} may contain
+letters, numbers, the dash (-) character, or the period (.) character.
+New with natbib 8.3 is an extension to the syntax that allows for
+a star (*) form and two optional arguments on the citation key itself.
+The syntax of the \verb+\cite+ command is thus (informally stated)
+\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{key} \verb+}+, or\\
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+}+, or\\
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \emph{optarg+key} \verb+,+ \emph{optarg+key}\ldots \verb+}+,
+\end{quotation}\noindent
+where \emph{optarg+key} signifies
+\begin{quotation}\flushleft\leftskip1em
+\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{*}\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or\\
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}, or even\\
+\texttt{*}\texttt{[}\emph{pre}\texttt{]}\texttt{[}\emph{post}\texttt{]}\emph{key}.
+\end{quotation}\noindent
+where \emph{pre} and \emph{post} is whatever text you wish to place
+at the beginning and end, respectively, of the bibliographic reference
+(see Ref.~[\onlinecite{witten2001}] and the two under Ref.~[\onlinecite{feyn54}]).
+(Keep in mind that no automatic space or punctuation is applied.)
+It is highly recommended that you put the entire \emph{pre} or \emph{post} portion
+within its own set of braces, for example:
+\verb+\cite+ \verb+{+ \texttt{[} \verb+{+\emph{text}\verb+}+\texttt{]}\emph{key}\verb+}+.
+The extra set of braces will keep \LaTeX\ out of trouble if your \emph{text} contains the comma (,) character.
+
+The star (*) modifier to the \emph{key} signifies that the reference is to be
+merged with the previous reference into a single bibliographic entry,
+a common idiom in APS and AIP articles (see below, Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}]).
+When references are merged in this way, they are separated by a semicolon instead of
+the period (full stop) that would otherwise appear.
+
+\paragraph{Eliding repeated information}
+When a reference is merged, some of its fields may be elided: for example,
+when the author matches that of the previous reference, it is omitted.
+If both author and journal match, both are omitted.
+If the journal matches, but the author does not, the journal is replaced by \emph{ibid.},
+as exemplified by Ref.~[\onlinecite{epr}].
+These rules embody common editorial practice in APS and AIP journals and will only
+be in effect if the markup features of the APS and AIP Bib\TeX\ styles is employed.
+
+\paragraph{The options of the cite command itself}
+Please note that optional arguments to the \emph{key} change the reference in the bibliography,
+not the citation in the body of the document.
+For the latter, use the optional arguments of the \verb+\cite+ command itself:
+\verb+\cite+ \texttt{*}\allowbreak
+\texttt{[}\emph{pre-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak
+\texttt{[}\emph{post-cite}\texttt{]}\allowbreak
+\verb+{+\emph{key-list}\verb+}+.
+
+\subsubsection{Example citations}
+By default, citations are numerical\cite{Beutler1994}.
+Author-year citations are used when the journal is RMP.
+To give a textual citation, use \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+:
+Refs.~\onlinecite{[][{, and references therein}]witten2001,Bire82}.
+By default, the \texttt{natbib} package automatically sorts your citations into numerical order and ``compresses'' runs of three or more consecutive numerical citations.
+REV\TeX\ provides the ability to automatically change the punctuation when switching between journal styles that provide citations in square brackets and those that use a superscript style instead. This is done through the \texttt{citeautoscript} option. For instance, the journal style \texttt{prb} automatically invokes this option because \textit{Physical
+Review B} uses superscript-style citations. The effect is to move the punctuation, which normally comes after a citation in square brackets, to its proper position before the superscript.
+To illustrate, we cite several together
+\cite{[See the explanation of time travel in ]feyn54,*[The classical relativistic treatment of ][ is a relative classic]epr,witten2001,Berman1983,Davies1998,Bire82},
+and once again in different order (Refs.~\cite{epr,feyn54,Bire82,Berman1983,witten2001,Davies1998}).
+Note that the citations were both compressed and sorted. Futhermore, running this sample file under the \texttt{prb} option will move the punctuation to the correct place.
+
+When the \verb+prb+ class option is used, the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command
+displays the reference's number as a superscript rather than in
+square brackets. Note that the location of the \verb+\cite{#1}+
+command should be adjusted for the reference style: the superscript
+references in \verb+prb+ style must appear after punctuation;
+otherwise the reference must appear before any punctuation. This
+sample was written for the regular (non-\texttt{prb}) citation style.
+The command \verb+\onlinecite{#1}+ in the \texttt{prb} style also
+displays the reference on the baseline.
+
+\subsubsection{References}
+A reference in the bibliography is specified by a \verb+\bibitem{#1}+ command
+with the same argument as the \verb+\cite{#1}+ command.
+\verb+\bibitem{#1}+ commands may be crafted by hand or, preferably,
+generated by Bib\TeX.
+REV\TeX~4.1 includes Bib\TeX\ style files
+\verb+apsrev4-1.bst+, \verb+apsrmp4-1.bst+ appropriate for
+\textit{Physical Review} and \textit{Reviews of Modern Physics},
+respectively. To display titles for cited journal articles, use the \texttt{longbibliography} class option.
+
+\subsubsection{Example references}
+This sample file employs the \verb+\bibliography+ command,
+which formats the \texttt{\jobname .bbl} file
+and specifies which bibliographic databases are to be used by Bib\TeX\
+(one of these should be by arXiv convention \texttt{\jobname .bib}).
+Running Bib\TeX\ (via \texttt{bibtex \jobname})
+after the first pass of \LaTeX\ produces the file
+\texttt{\jobname .bbl} which contains the automatically formatted
+\verb+\bibitem+ commands (including extra markup information via
+\verb+\bibinfo+ and \verb+\bibfield+ commands).
+If not using Bib\TeX, you will have to create the \verb+thebibiliography+ environment
+and its \verb+\bibitem+ commands by hand.
+
+Numerous examples of the use of the APS bibliographic entry types appear in the bibliography of this sample document.
+You can refer to the \texttt{\jobname .bib} file,
+and compare its information to the formatted bibliography itself.
+
+\subsection{Footnotes}%
+Footnotes, produced using the \verb+\footnote{#1}+ command,
+usually integrated into the bibliography alongside the other entries.
+Numerical citation styles do this%
+\footnote{Automatically placing footnotes into the bibliography requires using BibTeX to compile the bibliography.};
+author-year citation styles place the footnote at the bottom of the text column.
+Note: due to the method used to place footnotes in the bibliography,
+\emph{you must re-run Bib\TeX\ every time you change any of your document's footnotes}.
+
+\section{Math and Equations}
+Inline math may be typeset using the \verb+$+ delimiters. Bold math
+symbols may be achieved using the \verb+bm+ package and the
+\verb+\bm{#1}+ command it supplies. For instance, a bold $\alpha$ can
+be typeset as \verb+$\bm{\alpha}$+ giving $\bm{\alpha}$. Fraktur and
+Blackboard (or open face or double struck) characters should be
+typeset using the \verb+\mathfrak{#1}+ and \verb+\mathbb{#1}+ commands
+respectively. Both are supplied by the \texttt{amssymb} package. For
+example, \verb+$\mathbb{R}$+ gives $\mathbb{R}$ and
+\verb+$\mathfrak{G}$+ gives $\mathfrak{G}$
+
+In \LaTeX\ there are many different ways to display equations, and a
+few preferred ways are noted below. Displayed math will center by
+default. Use the class option \verb+fleqn+ to flush equations left.
+
+Below we have numbered single-line equations; this is the most common
+type of equation in \textit{Physical Review}:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\chi_+(p)\alt{\bf [}2|{\bf p}|(|{\bf p}|+p_z){\bf ]}^{-1/2}
+\left(
+\begin{array}{c}
+|{\bf p}|+p_z\\
+px+ip_y
+\end{array}\right)\;,
+\\
+\left\{%
+ \openone234567890abc123\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}%
+\label{eq:one}.
+\end{eqnarray}
+Note the open one in Eq.~(\ref{eq:one}).
+
+Not all numbered equations will fit within a narrow column this
+way. The equation number will move down automatically if it cannot fit
+on the same line with a one-line equation:
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ ab12345678abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}%
+\right\}.
+\end{equation}
+
+When the \verb+\label{#1}+ command is used [cf. input for
+Eq.~(\ref{eq:one})], the equation can be referred to in text without
+knowing the equation number that \TeX\ will assign to it. Just
+use \verb+\ref{#1}+, where \verb+#1+ is the same name that used in
+the \verb+\label{#1}+ command.
+
+Unnumbered single-line equations can be typeset
+using the \verb+\[+, \verb+\]+ format:
+\[g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \]
+
+
+\subsection{Multiline equations}
+
+Multiline equations are obtained by using the \verb+eqnarray+
+environment. Use the \verb+\nonumber+ command at the end of each line
+to avoid assigning a number:
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+\delta_{\sigma_1,-\sigma_2}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_jl_i\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1),
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\nonumber \\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}
+ \sum_\tau c^f_\tau~.
+\end{eqnarray}
+\textbf{Note:} Do not use \verb+\label{#1}+ on a line of a multiline
+equation if \verb+\nonumber+ is also used on that line. Incorrect
+cross-referencing will result. Notice the use \verb+\text{#1}+ for
+using a Roman font within a math environment.
+
+To set a multiline equation without \emph{any} equation
+numbers, use the \verb+\begin{eqnarray*}+,
+\verb+\end{eqnarray*}+ format:
+\begin{eqnarray*}
+\sum \vert M^{\text{viol}}_g \vert ^2&=&g^{2n-4}_S(Q^2)~N^{n-2}
+ (N^2-1)\\
+ & &\times \left( \sum_{i<j}\right)
+ \left(
+ \sum_{\text{perm}}\frac{1}{S_{12}S_{23}S_{n1}}
+ \right)
+ \frac{1}{S_{12}}~.
+\end{eqnarray*}
+
+To obtain numbers not normally produced by the automatic numbering,
+use the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command, where \verb+#1+ is the desired
+equation number. For example, to get an equation number of
+(\ref{eq:mynum}),
+\begin{equation}
+g^+g^+ \rightarrow g^+g^+g^+g^+ \dots ~,~~q^+q^+\rightarrow
+q^+g^+g^+ \dots ~. \tag{2.6$'$}\label{eq:mynum}
+\end{equation}
+
+\paragraph{A few notes on \texttt{tag}s}
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ requires the \texttt{amsmath} package.
+Place the \verb+\tag{#1}+ command before the \verb+\label{#1}+, if any.
+The numbering produced by \verb+\tag{#1}+ \textit{does not affect}
+the automatic numbering in REV\TeX;
+therefore, the number must be known ahead of time,
+and it must be manually adjusted if other equations are added.
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ works with both single-line and multiline equations.
+\verb+\tag{#1}+ should only be used in exceptional cases---%
+do not use it to number many equations in your paper.
+Please note that this feature of the \texttt{amsmath} package
+is \emph{not} compatible with the \texttt{hyperref} (6.77u) package.
+
+Enclosing display math within
+\verb+\begin{subequations}+ and \verb+\end{subequations}+ will produce
+a set of equations that are labeled with letters, as shown in
+Eqs.~(\ref{subeq:1}) and (\ref{subeq:2}) below.
+You may include any number of single-line and multiline equations,
+although it is probably not a good idea to follow one display math
+directly after another.
+\begin{subequations}
+\label{eq:whole}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+{\cal M}=&&ig_Z^2(4E_1E_2)^{1/2}(l_i^2)^{-1}
+(g_{\sigma_2}^e)^2\chi_{-\sigma_2}(p_2)\nonumber\\
+&&\times
+[\epsilon_i]_{\sigma_1}\chi_{\sigma_1}(p_1).\label{subeq:2}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\begin{equation}
+\left\{
+ abc123456abcdef\alpha\beta\gamma\delta1234556\alpha\beta
+ \frac{1\sum^{a}_{b}}{A^2}
+\right\},\label{subeq:1}
+\end{equation}
+\end{subequations}
+Giving a \verb+\label{#1}+ command directly after the \verb+\begin{subequations}+,
+allows you to reference all the equations in the \texttt{subequations} environment.
+For example, the equations in the preceding subequations environment were
+Eqs.~(\ref{eq:whole}).
+
+\subsubsection{Wide equations}
+The equation that follows is set in a wide format, i.e., it spans the full page.
+The wide format is reserved for long equations
+that cannot easily be set in a single column:
+\begin{widetext}
+\begin{equation}
+{\cal R}^{(\text{d})}=
+ g_{\sigma_2}^e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^Z(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^Z(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)
+ + x_WQ_e
+ \left(
+ \frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(3,21)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{12}^2-M_W^2}
+ +\frac{[\Gamma^\gamma(13,2)]_{\sigma_1}}{Q_{13}^2-M_W^2}
+ \right)\;.
+ \label{eq:wideeq}
+\end{equation}
+\end{widetext}
+This is typed to show how the output appears in wide format.
+(Incidentally, since there is no blank line between the \texttt{equation} environment above
+and the start of this paragraph, this paragraph is not indented.)
+
+\section{Cross-referencing}
+REV\TeX{} will automatically number such things as
+sections, footnotes, equations, figure captions, and table captions.
+In order to reference them in text, use the
+\verb+\label{#1}+ and \verb+\ref{#1}+ commands.
+To reference a particular page, use the \verb+\pageref{#1}+ command.
+
+The \verb+\label{#1}+ should appear
+within the section heading,
+within the footnote text,
+within the equation, or
+within the table or figure caption.
+The \verb+\ref{#1}+ command
+is used in text at the point where the reference is to be displayed.
+Some examples: Section~\ref{sec:level1} on page~\pageref{sec:level1},
+Table~\ref{tab:table1},%
+\begin{table}[b]%The best place to locate the table environment is directly after its first reference in text
+\caption{\label{tab:table1}%
+A table that fits into a single column of a two-column layout.
+Note that REV\TeX~4 adjusts the intercolumn spacing so that the table fills the
+entire width of the column. Table captions are numbered
+automatically.
+This table illustrates left-, center-, decimal- and right-aligned columns,
+along with the use of the \texttt{ruledtabular} environment which sets the
+Scotch (double) rules above and below the alignment, per APS style.
+}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{lcdr}
+\textrm{Left\footnote{Note a.}}&
+\textrm{Centered\footnote{Note b.}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Decimal}}&
+\textrm{Right}\\
+\colrule
+1 & 2 & 3.001 & 4\\
+10 & 20 & 30 & 40\\
+100 & 200 & 300.0 & 400\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+and Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}.%
+\begin{figure}[b]
+\includegraphics{fig_1}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:epsart} A figure caption. The figure captions are
+automatically numbered.}
+\end{figure}
+
+\section{Floats: Figures, Tables, Videos, etc.}
+Figures and tables are usually allowed to ``float'', which means that their
+placement is determined by \LaTeX, while the document is being typeset.
+
+Use the \texttt{figure} environment for a figure, the \texttt{table} environment for a table.
+In each case, use the \verb+\caption+ command within to give the text of the
+figure or table caption along with the \verb+\label+ command to provide
+a key for referring to this figure or table.
+The typical content of a figure is an image of some kind;
+that of a table is an alignment.%
+\begin{figure*}
+\includegraphics{fig_2}% Here is how to import EPS art
+\caption{\label{fig:wide}Use the figure* environment to get a wide
+figure that spans the page in \texttt{twocolumn} formatting.}
+\end{figure*}
+\begin{table*}
+\caption{\label{tab:table3}This is a wide table that spans the full page
+width in a two-column layout. It is formatted using the
+\texttt{table*} environment. It also demonstates the use of
+\textbackslash\texttt{multicolumn} in rows with entries that span
+more than one column.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ &\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^1$}&\multicolumn{2}{c}{$D_{4h}^5$}\\
+ Ion&1st alternative&2nd alternative&lst alternative
+&2nd alternative\\ \hline
+ K&$(2e)+(2f)$&$(4i)$ &$(2c)+(2d)$&$(4f)$ \\
+ Mn&$(2g)$\footnote{The $z$ parameter of these positions is $z\sim\frac{1}{4}$.}
+ &$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(4e)$&$(2a)+(2b)$\\
+ Cl&$(a)+(b)+(c)+(d)$&$(2g)$\footnotemark[1]
+ &$(4e)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ He&$(8r)^{\text{a}}$&$(4j)^{\text{a}}$&$(4g)^{\text{a}}$\\
+ Ag& &$(4k)^{\text{a}}$& &$(4h)^{\text{a}}$\\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table*}
+
+Insert an image using either the \texttt{graphics} or
+\texttt{graphix} packages, which define the \verb+\includegraphics{#1}+ command.
+(The two packages differ in respect of the optional arguments
+used to specify the orientation, scaling, and translation of the image.)
+To create an alignment, use the \texttt{tabular} environment.
+
+The best place to locate the \texttt{figure} or \texttt{table} environment
+is immediately following its first reference in text; this sample document
+illustrates this practice for Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart}, which
+shows a figure that is small enough to fit in a single column.
+
+In exceptional cases, you will need to move the float earlier in the document, as was done
+with Table~\ref{tab:table3}: \LaTeX's float placement algorithms need to know
+about a full-page-width float earlier.
+
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide}
+has content that is too wide for a single column,
+so the \texttt{figure*} environment has been used.%
+\begin{table}[b]
+\caption{\label{tab:table4}%
+Numbers in columns Three--Five are aligned with the ``d'' column specifier
+(requires the \texttt{dcolumn} package).
+Non-numeric entries (those entries without a ``.'') in a ``d'' column are aligned on the decimal point.
+Use the ``D'' specifier for more complex layouts. }
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{ccddd}
+One&Two&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Three}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Four}}&
+\multicolumn{1}{c}{\textrm{Five}}\\
+%\mbox{Three}&\mbox{Four}&\mbox{Five}\\
+\hline
+one&two&\mbox{three}&\mbox{four}&\mbox{five}\\
+He&2& 2.77234 & 45672. & 0.69 \\
+C\footnote{Some tables require footnotes.}
+ &C\footnote{Some tables need more than one footnote.}
+ & 12537.64 & 37.66345 & 86.37 \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\end{table}
+
+The content of a table is typically a \texttt{tabular} environment,
+giving rows of type in aligned columns.
+Column entries separated by \verb+&+'s, and
+each row ends with \textbackslash\textbackslash.
+The required argument for the \texttt{tabular} environment
+specifies how data are aligned in the columns.
+For instance, entries may be centered, left-justified, right-justified, aligned on a decimal
+point.
+Extra column-spacing may be be specified as well,
+although REV\TeX~4 sets this spacing so that the columns fill the width of the
+table. Horizontal rules are typeset using the \verb+\hline+
+command. The doubled (or Scotch) rules that appear at the top and
+bottom of a table can be achieved enclosing the \texttt{tabular}
+environment within a \texttt{ruledtabular} environment. Rows whose
+columns span multiple columns can be typeset using the
+\verb+\multicolumn{#1}{#2}{#3}+ command (for example, see the first
+row of Table~\ref{tab:table3}).%
+
+Tables~\ref{tab:table1}, \ref{tab:table3}, \ref{tab:table4}, and \ref{tab:table2}%
+\begin{table}[b]
+\caption{\label{tab:table2}
+A table with numerous columns that still fits into a single column.
+Here, several entries share the same footnote.
+Inspect the \LaTeX\ input for this table to see exactly how it is done.}
+\begin{ruledtabular}
+\begin{tabular}{cccccccc}
+ &$r_c$ (\AA)&$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$&
+ &$r_c$ (\AA) &$r_0$ (\AA)&$\kappa r_0$\\
+\hline
+Cu& 0.800 & 14.10 & 2.550 &Sn\footnotemark[1]
+& 0.680 & 1.870 & 3.700 \\
+Ag& 0.990 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Pb\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.450 & 1.930 & 3.760 \\
+Au& 1.150 & 15.90 & 2.710 &Ca\footnotemark[3]
+& 0.750 & 2.170 & 3.560 \\
+Mg& 0.490 & 17.60 & 3.200 &Sr\footnotemark[4]
+& 0.900 & 2.370 & 3.720 \\
+Zn& 0.300 & 15.20 & 2.970 &Li\footnotemark[2]
+& 0.380 & 1.730 & 2.830 \\
+Cd& 0.530 & 17.10 & 3.160 &Na\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.760 & 2.110 & 3.120 \\
+Hg& 0.550 & 17.80 & 3.220 &K\footnotemark[5]
+& 1.120 & 2.620 & 3.480 \\
+Al& 0.230 & 15.80 & 3.240 &Rb\footnotemark[3]
+& 1.330 & 2.800 & 3.590 \\
+Ga& 0.310 & 16.70 & 3.330 &Cs\footnotemark[4]
+& 1.420 & 3.030 & 3.740 \\
+In& 0.460 & 18.40 & 3.500 &Ba\footnotemark[5]
+& 0.960 & 2.460 & 3.780 \\
+Tl& 0.480 & 18.90 & 3.550 & & & & \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{ruledtabular}
+\footnotetext[1]{Here's the first, from Ref.~\onlinecite{feyn54}.}
+\footnotetext[2]{Here's the second.}
+\footnotetext[3]{Here's the third.}
+\footnotetext[4]{Here's the fourth.}
+\footnotetext[5]{And etc.}
+\end{table}
+show various effects.
+A table that fits in a single column employs the \texttt{table}
+environment.
+Table~\ref{tab:table3} is a wide table, set with the \texttt{table*} environment.
+Long tables may need to break across pages.
+The most straightforward way to accomplish this is to specify
+the \verb+[H]+ float placement on the \texttt{table} or
+\texttt{table*} environment.
+However, the \LaTeXe\ package \texttt{longtable} allows headers and footers to be specified for each page of the table.
+A simple example of the use of \texttt{longtable} can be found
+in the file \texttt{summary.tex} that is included with the REV\TeX~4
+distribution.
+
+There are two methods for setting footnotes within a table (these
+footnotes will be displayed directly below the table rather than at
+the bottom of the page or in the bibliography). The easiest
+and preferred method is just to use the \verb+\footnote{#1}+
+command. This will automatically enumerate the footnotes with
+lowercase roman letters. However, it is sometimes necessary to have
+multiple entries in the table share the same footnote. In this case,
+there is no choice but to manually create the footnotes using
+\verb+\footnotemark[#1]+ and \verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+.
+\texttt{\#1} is a numeric value. Each time the same value for
+\texttt{\#1} is used, the same mark is produced in the table. The
+\verb+\footnotetext[#1]{#2}+ commands are placed after the \texttt{tabular}
+environment. Examine the \LaTeX\ source and output for
+Tables~\ref{tab:table1} and \ref{tab:table2}
+for examples.
+
+Video~\ref{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101}
+illustrates several features new with REV\TeX4.1,
+starting with the \texttt{video} environment, which is in the same category with
+\texttt{figure} and \texttt{table}.%
+\begin{video}
+\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1a.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1a}}%
+ \quad
+\href{http://prst-per.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101/e010101_vid1b.mpg}{\includegraphics{vid_1b}}
+ \setfloatlink{http://link.aps.org/multimedia/PRSTPER/v4/i1/e010101}%
+ \caption{\label{vid:PRSTPER.4.010101}%
+ Students explain their initial idea about Newton's third law to a teaching assistant.
+ Clip (a): same force.
+ Clip (b): move backwards.
+ }%
+\end{video}
+The \verb+\setfloatlink+ command causes the title of the video to be a hyperlink to the
+indicated URL; it may be used with any environment that takes the \verb+\caption+
+command.
+The \verb+\href+ command has the same significance as it does in the context of
+the \texttt{hyperref} package: the second argument is a piece of text to be
+typeset in your document; the first is its hyperlink, a URL.
+
+\textit{Physical Review} style requires that the initial citation of
+figures or tables be in numerical order in text, so don't cite
+Fig.~\ref{fig:wide} until Fig.~\ref{fig:epsart} has been cited.
+
+\begin{acknowledgments}
+We wish to acknowledge the support of the author community in using
+REV\TeX{}, offering suggestions and encouragement, testing new versions,
+\dots.
+\end{acknowledgments}
+
+\appendix
+
+\section{Appendixes}
+
+To start the appendixes, use the \verb+\appendix+ command.
+This signals that all following section commands refer to appendixes
+instead of regular sections. Therefore, the \verb+\appendix+ command
+should be used only once---to setup the section commands to act as
+appendixes. Thereafter normal section commands are used. The heading
+for a section can be left empty. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A'' and
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\section{Background}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce an appendix heading that says ``APPENDIX A: BACKGROUND''
+(note that the colon is set automatically).
+
+If there is only one appendix, then the letter ``A'' should not
+appear. This is suppressed by using the star version of the appendix
+command (\verb+\appendix*+ in the place of \verb+\appendix+).
+
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+
+Observe that this appendix was started by using
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{A little more on appendixes}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Note the equation number in an appendix:
+\begin{equation}
+E=mc^2.
+\end{equation}
+
+\subsection{\label{app:subsec}A subsection in an appendix}
+
+You can use a subsection or subsubsection in an appendix. Note the
+numbering: we are now in Appendix~\ref{app:subsec}.
+
+Note the equation numbers in this appendix, produced with the
+subequations environment:
+\begin{subequations}
+\begin{eqnarray}
+E&=&mc, \label{appa}
+\\
+E&=&mc^2, \label{appb}
+\\
+E&\agt& mc^3. \label{appc}
+\end{eqnarray}
+\end{subequations}
+They turn out to be Eqs.~(\ref{appa}), (\ref{appb}), and (\ref{appc}).
+
+% The \nocite command causes all entries in a bibliography to be printed out
+% whether or not they are actually referenced in the text. This is appropriate
+% for the sample file to show the different styles of references, but authors
+% most likely will not want to use it.
+\nocite{*}
+
+\bibliography{apssamp}% Produces the bibliography via BibTeX.
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file apssamp.tex ******
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apssamp.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+%% ****** Start of file apstemplate.tex ****** %
+%%
+%%
+%% This file is part of the APS files in the REVTeX 4 distribution.
+%% Version 4.1r of REVTeX, August 2010
+%%
+%%
+%% Copyright (c) 2001, 2009, 2010 The American Physical Society.
+%%
+%% See the REVTeX 4 README file for restrictions and more information.
+%%
+%
+% This is a template for producing manuscripts for use with REVTEX 4.0
+% Copy this file to another name and then work on that file.
+% That way, you always have this original template file to use.
+%
+% Group addresses by affiliation; use superscriptaddress for long
+% author lists, or if there are many overlapping affiliations.
+% For Phys. Rev. appearance, change preprint to twocolumn.
+% Choose pra, prb, prc, prd, pre, prl, prstab, prstper, or rmp for journal
+% Add 'draft' option to mark overfull boxes with black boxes
+% Add 'showpacs' option to make PACS codes appear
+% Add 'showkeys' option to make keywords appear
+\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-1}
+%\documentclass[aps,prl,preprint,superscriptaddress]{revtex4-1}
+%\documentclass[aps,prl,reprint,groupedaddress]{revtex4-1}
+
+% You should use BibTeX and apsrev.bst for references
+% Choosing a journal automatically selects the correct APS
+% BibTeX style file (bst file), so only uncomment the line
+% below if necessary.
+%\bibliographystyle{apsrev4-1}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% Use the \preprint command to place your local institutional report
+% number in the upper righthand corner of the title page in preprint mode.
+% Multiple \preprint commands are allowed.
+% Use the 'preprintnumbers' class option to override journal defaults
+% to display numbers if necessary
+%\preprint{}
+
+%Title of paper
+\title{}
+
+% repeat the \author .. \affiliation etc. as needed
+% \email, \thanks, \homepage, \altaffiliation all apply to the current
+% author. Explanatory text should go in the []'s, actual e-mail
+% address or url should go in the {}'s for \email and \homepage.
+% Please use the appropriate macro foreach each type of information
+
+% \affiliation command applies to all authors since the last
+% \affiliation command. The \affiliation command should follow the
+% other information
+% \affiliation can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well.
+\author{}
+%\email[]{Your e-mail address}
+%\homepage[]{Your web page}
+%\thanks{}
+%\altaffiliation{}
+\affiliation{}
+
+%Collaboration name if desired (requires use of superscriptaddress
+%option in \documentclass). \noaffiliation is required (may also be
+%used with the \author command).
+%\collaboration can be followed by \email, \homepage, \thanks as well.
+%\collaboration{}
+%\noaffiliation
+
+\date{\today}
+
+\begin{abstract}
+% insert abstract here
+\end{abstract}
+
+% insert suggested PACS numbers in braces on next line
+\pacs{}
+% insert suggested keywords - APS authors don't need to do this
+%\keywords{}
+
+%\maketitle must follow title, authors, abstract, \pacs, and \keywords
+\maketitle
+
+% body of paper here - Use proper section commands
+% References should be done using the \cite, \ref, and \label commands
+\section{}
+% Put \label in argument of \section for cross-referencing
+%\section{\label{}}
+\subsection{}
+\subsubsection{}
+
+% If in two-column mode, this environment will change to single-column
+% format so that long equations can be displayed. Use
+% sparingly.
+%\begin{widetext}
+% put long equation here
+%\end{widetext}
+
+% figures should be put into the text as floats.
+% Use the graphics or graphicx packages (distributed with LaTeX2e)
+% and the \includegraphics macro defined in those packages.
+% See the LaTeX Graphics Companion by Michel Goosens, Sebastian Rahtz,
+% and Frank Mittelbach for instance.
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a figure:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Use the figure* environment if the figure should span across the
+% entire page. There is no need to do explicit centering.
+
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \end{figure}
+
+% Surround figure environment with turnpage environment for landscape
+% figure
+% \begin{turnpage}
+% \begin{figure}
+% \includegraphics{}%
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \end{figure}
+% \end{turnpage}
+
+% tables should appear as floats within the text
+%
+% Here is an example of the general form of a table:
+% Fill in the caption in the braces of the \caption{} command. Put the label
+% that you will use with \ref{} command in the braces of the \label{} command.
+% Insert the column specifiers (l, r, c, d, etc.) in the empty braces of the
+% \begin{tabular}{} command.
+% The ruledtabular enviroment adds doubled rules to table and sets a
+% reasonable default table settings.
+% Use the table* environment to get a full-width table in two-column
+% Add \usepackage{longtable} and the longtable (or longtable*}
+% environment for nicely formatted long tables. Or use the the [H]
+% placement option to break a long table (with less control than
+% in longtable).
+% \begin{table}%[H] add [H] placement to break table across pages
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \begin{ruledtabular}
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% Lines of table here ending with \\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{ruledtabular}
+% \end{table}
+
+% Surround table environment with turnpage environment for landscape
+% table
+% \begin{turnpage}
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{\label{}}
+% \begin{ruledtabular}
+% \begin{tabular}{}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{ruledtabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \end{turnpage}
+
+% Specify following sections are appendices. Use \appendix* if there
+% only one appendix.
+%\appendix
+%\section{}
+
+% If you have acknowledgments, this puts in the proper section head.
+%\begin{acknowledgments}
+% put your acknowledgments here.
+%\end{acknowledgments}
+
+% Create the reference section using BibTeX:
+\bibliography{basename of .bib file}
+
+\end{document}
+%
+% ****** End of file apstemplate.tex ******
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/apstemplate.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_1.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/fig_2.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 500 80
+0 0 moveto 500 0 lineto 500 80 lineto 0 80 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+200 40 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Wide Test Figure) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1a.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip A Frame) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/sample/aps/vid_1b.eps 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+%!PS-Adobe-3.0
+%%BoundingBox: 0 0 100 100
+0 0 moveto 100 0 lineto 100 100 lineto 0 100 lineto 0 0 lineto stroke
+20 50 moveto /Times-Roman findfont 10 scalefont setfont (Clip B Frame) show
+%%EOF
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/aip.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxdocext.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxfront.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxgrid.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/ltxutil.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 22:32:33 UTC (rev 49733)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/doc/latex/revtex/source/revtex4-1.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,2062 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+% aip.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2008 American Institute of Physics
+% mailto:tex at aip.org
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file aip.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% aip.rtx, aip.pdf, aip.ins, aip.drv.
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/aip/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex aip.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex aip.dtx; ...
+%
+% Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex aip.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+% pdflatex aip.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+% pdflatex aip.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:bibtex/bst/aip/
+% TDS:doc/latex/aip/
+% TDS:source/latex/aip/
+% TDS:tex/latex/aip/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from aip.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+%% This file requires docstrip version 2.4 or higher available from
+%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/unpacked/docstrip.tex
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README.
+
+Copyright (c) 2008 American Institute of Physics.
+mailto:tex at aip.org
+
+Maintained by Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)
+under contract to American Institute of Physics.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+% \file{aip.ins}{\from{aip.dtx}{install}}%
+% \file{aip.drv}{\from{aip.dtx}{driver}}%
+% \usedir{tex/latex/aip}%
+ \file{aip4-1.rtx}{\from{aip.dtx}{package}}%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* aip.rtx}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/aip/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run aip.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{aip.dtx}\CheckSum{1163}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "aip.dtx",
+%%% version = "4.1r",
+%%% date = "2010/07/25",
+%%% time = "20:32:00 GMT-8",
+%%% checksum = "1163",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Institute of Physics.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 2008 American Institute of Physics,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "AIP Journal Program
+%%% American Institute of Physics,
+%%% Suite 1NO1, 2 Huntington Quadrangle,
+%%% Melville, NY 11747 USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon tex at aip.org",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "aip substyle for REVTeX",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex aip.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the installer.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README aip.ins
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex aip.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%aip.rtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%aip.aux aip.idx aip.ind aip.log aip.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% The following may look a bit klootchy, but we
+% want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/12/01]%
+%</driver|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesFile{aip4-1.rtx}%
+%<*driver>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25 4.1r AIP substyle for REVTeX]% \fileversion
+%</driver|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{driver}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{.ins} installer and \file{README} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{driver} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``driver'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\relax\else
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\gdef\lquote{`}\gdef\rquote{'}%
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist aip
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o aip.gls aip.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+%\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/06}{Beta candidate b}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README}
+\title{%
+ The \classname{aip} substyle for REV\TeX%
+ \protect\thanks{%
+ \fileversion\ \copyright 2009 American Institute of Physics
+ % For version number and date,
+ % search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+ % or see the end of the README file.
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+Arthur Ogawa\thanks{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}%
+}%
+\date{Version \fileversion, dated \filedate}%
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the implementation of the
+AIP journal substyles for APS's \revtex\ 4.1 document class
+for electronic submissions to AIP journals.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://authors.aip.org/REVTEX}.
+The archive contains ready-to-Install files, documentation, and full source.
+
+This package is also distributed via CTAN:
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/aip}, and as a ready-to-install image as
+\url{http://www.ctan.org/pub/tex-archive/install/macros/latex/contrib/aip.tds.zip}.
+
+The \classname{aip} package was commissioned by the American Institute of Physics
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{aip.rtx}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{auguide.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Overview}%
+\revtex\ is a \LaTeXe\ document class, somewhat like a hybrid of
+the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} and \classname{article} classes.
+
+This document class implements the AIP society and journal substyles:
+the journals represent a set of mutually exclusive class options that, in this case, allow the
+document class to address multiple journals within the AIP family.
+This society is obtained with class option \classoption{aip}.
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{aip.rtx}
+is generated from this file, \file{aip.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex aip.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex aip.dtx| or |pdflatex aip.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{aip.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{aip.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the installer \file{aip.ins},
+and the file \file{README}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX\ twice, then \file{makeindex}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{aip.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{aip.rtx}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.rtx}
+by moving it to a location
+in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX,
+like \file{tex/latex/aip}.
+\item
+Install \classname{aip.pdf}
+by moving it to
+\file{doc/latex/aip}.
+\item
+Using the \file{.dbj} information herein,
+generate the needed \file{.bst} files and install them in
+\file{bibtex/bst/aip}.
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\newcommand\revtex{REV\TeX}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{AIP: A set of journal-specifc extensions to \revtex}
+%
+% To create a journal substyle, you create
+% a \file{.rtx} file, in our case \file{aip.rtx}.
+% Within that file, you override procedures and parameter assignments as you see fit.
+% Ideally they will be generally applicable to all of that society's
+% journals (see the file \file{aps.rtx} for a realization of this scheme).
+% Also within that file, you include a
+% section of code for each journal, that for JMP looks like:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \@ifx{\@journal\journal at jmp}{%
+% <code specific to the JMP>
+% }{}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{The \classoption{aip} class option: the \texttt{aip} module}
+% The file \file{aip.rtx} is read in by the \classname{revtex4} document class
+% if \cmd\@society\ has the value \classoption{aip}.
+%
+% Here, code specific to AIP journals appears.
+%
+% We first give some text entities (amounting to journal abbreviations),
+% then some AIP-specific initialisations,
+% then code for particular AIP journals.
+% In the latter case, the choice is
+% keyed off the macro \cmd\@journal.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\AtEndOfClass:
+% this file, like all journal substyles, is read in at \cmd\AtEndOfClass\ time,
+% so you should not use this command in this file.
+% Note for \LaTeX\ developers: It would be an improvement in \LaTeX\ to
+% \cmd\let\cmd\AtEndOfClass\ to something like \cmd\@firstofone.
+% This change would be effected in \cmd\@onefilewithoptions.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Defend Against Forseeable Errors}%
+% Protect this file from being read in by anything but \revtex.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\undefined\substyle at ext
+ \def\@tempa{%
+ \endinput
+ \GenericWarning{I must be read in by REVTeX! (Bailing out)}%
+ }%
+ \expandafter\else
+ \def\@tempa{}%
+ \expandafter\fi\@tempa
+ \class at info{RevTeX society AIP selected}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Substyle Options}%
+%
+% Here are the class options relating to the AIP:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{jcp}{\change at journal{jcp}}%
+\DeclareOption{pop}{\change at journal{pop}}%
+\DeclareOption{rsi}{\change at journal{rsi}}%
+\DeclareOption{jap}{\change at journal{jap}}%
+\DeclareOption{apl}{\change at journal{apl}}%
+\DeclareOption{cha}{\change at journal{cha}}%
+\DeclareOption{pof}{\change at journal{pof}}%
+\DeclareOption{bmf}{\change at journal{bmf}}%
+\DeclareOption{rse}{\change at journal{rse}}%
+\DeclareOption{jmp}{\change at journal{jmp}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Option allowing for ``numerical author-year'' bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{author-numerical}{%
+ \@booleantrue\authoryear at sw
+ \@booleantrue\authornum at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Optionally allow article title in bibliography entries.
+% A new switch is defined here: \cmd\aip at jtitx@sw\ signifies that
+% the numbered style bibliography is to be prepared without article titles in @ARTICLE entries.
+% Otherwise, such titles are incorporated if present in the \file{.bib} entry.
+% By default, exclude the article titles.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{article-title}{%
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+}%
+\@booleantrue \aip at jtitx@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Establish default options for this society.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+\@booleanfalse\authornum at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibdataout at aip}
+% \changes{4.1o}{2010/02/12}{(AO, 580) Control .bst at run time.}%
+% Procedure \cmd\@bibdataout at aip\ has the job of writing the control record into the
+% job's \cmd\jobname\filename{.bib} file, where it will adjust the options to \filename{.bst} processing.
+% It is installed into the initialization procedure \cmd\@bibdataout at init, and its meaning
+% is set by the society (AIP) and journal.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\@bibdataout at rev{\@bibdataout at aip}%
+\def\@bibdataout at aip{%
+ \immediate\write\@bibdataout{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% An entry that controls processing of the \filename{.bst} file has entry type \texttt{@CONTROL}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ @CONTROL{%
+ aip41Control%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Say whether we want long bibliography style (the default), or the abbreviated style.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \longbibliography at sw{\true at sw}{\aip at jtitx@sw{\false at sw}{\true at sw}}%
+ {%
+ ,pages="1",title="0"%
+ }{%
+ ,pages="0",title=""%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Place a \cmd\citation\ into the auxiliary file corresponding to this entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if at filesw
+ \immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{aip41Control}}%
+ \fi
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For AIP, the preprint style \classoption{preprint} is the default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\preprintsty at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\showPACS at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\showKEYS at sw}
+% If \cmd\showPACS at sw\ is true, print the PACS information in the title block,
+% otherwise not.
+% Similarly for \cmd\showKEYS at sw\ and the keywords.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\showPACS at sw
+\@booleantrue\showKEYS at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\refname}
+%
+% In reprint style only, we eliminate the head above the bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{%
+ \let\refname\@empty
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{AIP Setup}%
+% Here we define the default procedures for AIP journals.
+% Individual AIP journals may override these definitions.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Running header and footer}%
+%
+% Page style for all AIP journals.
+% We assert our own page style only if nobody else has done so.
+% Users wishing to customize their documents will be able to invoke a \cmd\pagestyle\
+% command anywhere in the preamble.
+%FIXME: \cmd\preprintsty at sw\ is defined?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{%
+ \ps at preprint
+ }{%
+ \ps at article
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The spc says: ``Running title must be provided on title page'',
+% and that journal classes 1b and 2 have no running title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps at preprint{%
+ \def\@oddhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+ \def\@evenhead{\@runningtitle\hfil}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{\hfil\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil}%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+ \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\ps at article{%
+ \def\@evenhead{\let\\\heading at cr\thepage\quad\checkindate\hfil\@runningtitle}%
+ \def\@oddhead{\let\\\heading at cr\@runningtitle\hfil\checkindate\quad\thepage}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{}%
+ \def\@evenfoot{}%
+ \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+ \let\sectionmark\@gobble
+ \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+}%
+\def\@runningtitle{\@shorttitle}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Title block}%
+%
+% The specifics of the title block.
+% Apply to all AIP journals; individual journals may override these settings.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titlepage}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{titlepage}{%
+ \let\wastwocol at sw\twocolumn at sw
+ \onecolumngrid
+ \newpage
+ \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+ \c at page\z@% article sets this to one not zero???
+}{%
+ \wastwocol at sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@fnsymbol}
+% On the title page, footnotes are lettered with right parenthesis: ``a)''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@fnsymbol at latex\@fnsymbol
+\let\@fnsymbol\@alph
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adjust at abstractwidth}
+% This procedure is used by many titlepage elements to indent on the left by a particular
+% amount. The author list uses \cmd\frontmatter at authorformat\ to accomplish the same.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\adjust at abstractwidth{%
+ \parindent1em\relax
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractheading}
+% AIP Journals all set the abstract head the same way, with no head.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractheading{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractfont}
+% All AIP journals set the abstract body the same way.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractfont{%
+%\small
+ \adjust at abstractwidth
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% All AIP journal preprints use separate titlepage and full-width abstract.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{%
+ \@booleantrue\titlepage at sw
+% \def\frontmatter at affiliationfont{\it}%
+ \let\section\section at preprintsty
+% \let\@hangfrom at section\@hangfrom at section@preprintsty
+ \let\subsection\subsection at preprintsty
+ \let\subsubsection\subsubsection at preprintsty
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at authorformat}
+% All AIP journals set the author list the same.
+% The leading is 11.5 points, and
+% there is 11.5 points of extra space above the first author line
+% (which amounts to the same thing as 11.5 points extra below the title)
+% for a total of 23 points base-to-base.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter@@indent{%
+ \skip@\@flushglue
+ \@flushglue\z@ plus.3\hsize\relax
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+ \@flushglue\skip@
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at authorformat{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \sffamily
+%\advance\baselineskip\p@
+%\parskip11.5\p@\relax
+}%
+\renewcommand*\email[1][Electronic mail: ]{\begingroup\sanitize at url\@email{#1}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affilgroup}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at above@affilgroup{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affiliation}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script}
+% The default amount of space above affiliation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation at script{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+%\addvspace{3.5\p@}%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at above@affiliation{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at affiliationfont}
+% All AIP journals set the affiliation the same.
+% Like the author, but in italic.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at affiliationfont{%
+ \frontmatter@@indent
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{\small}%
+ \it
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at collaboration@above}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at collaboration@above{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Set up the default AIP style for title block authors and affiliations.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at setup}
+% All AIP journals set the title page using the same font and size.
+% However, justification varies for the title block elements, so
+% we assert none here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at setup{%
+ \normalfont
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@below}
+% All AIP journals set the article title 12 point Times Roman, bold, flush left.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at title@above{\addvspace{6\p@}}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@format{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{\Large}%
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ \parskip\z at skip
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@below{\addvspace{3\p@}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at makefnmark}
+% All AIP journals share this procedure for setting the titlepage footnote text:
+% superior lowercase letter, with right parenthesis.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at parskip{3\p@}%
+\@booleantrue\altaffilletter at sw
+\def\frontmatter at makefnmark{%
+ \@textsuperscript{%
+ \normalfont\@thefnmark%(
+ )%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at authorbelow{%
+ \addvspace{3\p@}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil at cutoff}
+% We override \cmd\affil at cutoff\ to enforce the rule that,
+% if a single affiliation appears on the title page, then
+% no affiliation superscript at all is produced.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\affil at cutoff\tw@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% De awa.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at RRAP@format}
+% All AIP journals use the same format for the ``Received, Revised, etc.'' block on the title page.
+%
+% Change note: 11.5 points b-b from author/affiliation down to date.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at RRAP@format{%
+ \addvspace{5\p@}%
+ \small
+ \raggedright
+ \advance\leftskip.5in\relax
+ \@totalleftmargin\leftskip
+% \preprintsty at sw{}{\parskip.5ex\relax}%
+ \everypar{%
+ \hbox\bgroup(\@gobble at leavemode@uppercase%)
+ }%
+ \def\par{%
+ \@ifvmode{}{%(
+ \unskip)\egroup\@@par
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\punct at RRAP{;\egroup\ \hbox\bgroup}%
+\def\@gobble at leavemode@uppercase#1#2{\expandafter\MakeTextUppercase}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at PACS@format}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at PACS@format{%
+ \addvspace{11\p@}%
+% \footnotesize
+ \adjust at abstractwidth
+ \parskip\z at skip
+ \samepage
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at keys@format}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at keys@format{%
+% \footnotesize
+ \adjust at abstractwidth
+ \samepage
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ps at titlepage}
+% Title page style. Currently empty except for preprint header,
+% which consists of all the \cmd\preprint\ arguments,
+% stacked flush right at the right margin.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps at titlepage{%
+ \def\@oddhead{%
+ \@runningtitle
+ \hfill
+ \produce at preprints\@preprint
+ }%
+ \let\@evenhead\@oddhead
+ \def\@oddfoot{%
+ \hb at xt@\z@{\byrevtex\hss}%
+ \hfil
+ \preprintsty at sw{\thepage}{}%
+ \quad\checkindate
+ \hfil
+ }%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+}%
+\def\byrevtex{\byrevtex at sw{Typeset by REV\TeX and AIP}{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\produce at preprints}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\produce at preprints#1{%
+ \preprint at sw{%
+ \vtop to \z@{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \small
+ \let\preprint\preprint at count
+ \count@\z@#1\@ifnum{\count@>\tw@}{%
+ \hbox{%
+ \let\preprint\preprint at hlist
+ #1\setbox\z@\lastbox
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \let\preprint\preprint at cr
+ \halign{\hfil##\cr#1\crcr}%
+ \par
+ \vss
+ }%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+\def\preprint at cr#1{#1\cr}%
+\def\preprint at count#1{\advance\count@\@ne}%
+\def\preprint at hlist#1{#1\hbox{, }}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Lead-in paragraph}%
+%
+% The \env{Lead-in paragraph} environment formats the AIP ``lead paragraph''.
+% To avoid introducing new syntax, we take over the \env{quotation} environment
+% until the first \cmd\section\ (or other sectioning command) appears.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{Lead at inParagraph}{%
+ \par
+ \bfseries
+ \@afterheading\@afterindentfalse
+}{%
+ \par
+ \hb at xt@\hsize{\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\leaders\hrule\hfil\hfil}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At the beginning of the document temporarily change the meaning of
+% the \env{quotation} environment, restoring it once the first sectioning
+% command is given.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let at environment{quotation at ltx}{quotation}%
+ \let at environment{quotation}{Lead at inParagraph}%
+}%
+\appdef\@startsection at hook{%
+ \let at environment{quotation}{quotation at ltx}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Stacked Heads}%
+% All AIP journals put a period (.), followed by quad space, after the section number.
+% Also, no hanging section number.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
+\def\@hang at from#1#2#3{#1#2#3}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Note that in the following, we wish to set the section head uppercase, so we use
+% David Carlisle's \cmd\MakeTextUppercase. However, because this procedure effectively
+% parses its argument (looking for things to \emph{not} translate), it has to be invoked
+% in such a way that the argument of the \cmd\section\ command is passed to it as its
+% own argument.
+%
+% To accomplish this, we use the \cmd\@hangfrom@\ hook, which was developed for this
+% purpose.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{%
+ \@startsection
+ {section}%
+ {1}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {0.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \small
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom at section#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+\def\@hangfroms at section#1#2{#1\MakeTextUppercase{#2}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044101\_1 (1) or BMF\_044103\_1 (1)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsection}%
+ {2}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \small
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See, e.g., BMF\_044104\_1 (1), JMP\_123520\_1 (48),
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsubsection}%
+ {3}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \small
+ \sffamily
+ \bfseries
+ \itshape
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Runin Heads}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{%
+ \@startsection
+ {paragraph}%
+ {4}%
+ {\parindent}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subparagraph}%
+ {5}%
+ {\parindent}%
+ {3.25ex \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {-1em}%
+ {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\section at preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection at preprintsty}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection at preprintsty}
+% Here are the formatting procedures specific to the preprint style;
+% the only difference is that the heads are flush left instead of centered.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section at preprintsty{%
+ \@startsection
+ {section}%
+ {1}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {0.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {0.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+%\def\@hangfrom at section@preprintsty#1#2#3{\@hangfrom{#1#2}\MakeTextUppercase{#3}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection at preprintsty{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsection}%
+ {2}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+ \bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection at preprintsty{%
+ \@startsection
+ {subsubsection}%
+ {3}%
+ {\z@}%
+ {.8cm \@plus1ex \@minus .2ex}%
+ {.5cm}%
+ {%
+ \normalfont
+% \small
+ \itshape\bfseries
+ \raggedright
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For examples of
+% \env{theorem}, \env{proposition}, \env{lemma}, \env{remark}, \env{corollary}, \env{example},
+% and \env{proof} (with optional title),
+% using independent numbering for each class,
+% and with numbered and roman lists therein,
+% see JMP\_122901\_1 (48).
+%
+% For theorems, etc, numbered by section, (and with theorems in the appendix)
+% but equations numbered throughout,
+% see JMP\_123301\_1 (48).
+%
+% For a (roman) list in text, theorem, and proof,
+% see JMP\_123514\_1 (48).
+%
+% For numbered list in text,
+% and equations numbered by section,
+% see JMP\_123518\_1 (48).
+%
+% All AIP journals use frontmatter footnotes by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\frontmatter at footnote@produce\frontmatter at footnote@produce at footnote
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table of Contents}%
+% The toc will itself make an entry in the toc,
+% but we temporarily turn off toc formatting for the duration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg {2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{2}
+\def\ltxu at dotsep{4.5pt}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth at munge}%
+ \print at toc{toc}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\string\tocdepth at restore}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth at munge{%
+ \let\l at section@saved\l at section
+ \let\l at section\@gobble at tw@
+}%
+\def\@gobble at tw@#1#2{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocdepth at restore{%
+ \let\l at section\l at section@saved
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l at part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \begingroup
+ \set at tocdim@pagenum{#2}%
+% \@tempdima 3em %
+ \parindent \z@
+ \rightskip\tocleft at pagenum plus 1fil\relax
+ \skip@\parfillskip\parfillskip\z@
+ \addvspace{2.25em plus\p@}%
+ \large \bf %
+ \leavevmode\ignorespaces#1\unskip\nobreak\hskip\skip@
+ \hb at xt@\rightskip{\hfil\unhbox\z@}\hskip-\rightskip\hskip\z at skip
+ \par
+ \nobreak %
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\l at section}
+% Determine which TOC elements are automatically indented.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tocleft@{\z@}%
+\def\tocdim at min{5\p@}%
+\def\l at section{%
+ \l@@sections{}{section}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l at f@section{%
+ \addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+ \addvspace{1.0em plus\p@}%
+ \bf
+}%
+\def\l at subsection{%
+ \l@@sections{section}{subsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l at subsubsection{%
+ \l@@sections{subsection}{subsubsection}% Implicit #3#4
+}%
+\def\l at paragraph#1#2{}%
+\def\l at subparagraph#1#2{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Activate the auto TOC processing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\toc at pre\toc at pre@auto
+\let\toc at post\toc at post@auto
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoffigures{\print at toc{lof}}%
+\def\l at figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\listoftables{\print at toc{lot}}%
+\let\l at table\l at figure
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Default column bottom}%
+% All AIP journal styles have flush bottoms.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\raggedcolumn at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Table alignment style}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\tableft at skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabmid at skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\tabright at skip@float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array at row@pre at float}
+% \begin{macro}{\array at row@pst at float}
+% All AIP publications have the same table specification:
+% Scotch rules above and below, centered in column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tableft at skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\tabmid at skip@float{\@flushglue}%
+\def\tabright at skip@float{\z@ plus\hsize}%
+\def\array at row@pre at float{\hline\hline\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}}%
+\def\array at row@pst at float{\noalign{\vskip\doublerulesep}\hline\hline}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnote formatting}%
+% We customize the formatting of footnotes for all AIP journals.
+% \begin{macro}{\@makefntext}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefntext#1{%
+ \def\baselinestretch{1}%
+ \leftskip1em%
+ \parindent1em%
+ \noindent
+ \nobreak\hskip-\leftskip
+ \hb at xt@\leftskip{%
+ \hss\@makefnmark\ %
+ }%
+ #1%
+ \par
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Appendix}%
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom at appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfroms at appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\@appendixcntformat}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\prepdef\appendix{%
+ \par
+ \let\@hangfrom at section\@hangfrom at appendix
+%\let\@hangfroms at section\@hangfroms at appendix
+ \let\@sectioncntformat\@appendixcntformat
+}%
+\def\@hangfrom at appendix#1#2#3{%
+ #1%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{%
+ #3%
+ }{%
+ #2\@if at empty{#3}{}{:\ #3}%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@hangfroms at appendix#1#2{%
+ #1#2%
+}%
+\def\@appendixcntformat#1{\appendixname\ \csname the#1\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Bibliography}%
+%
+% Customize the \revtex\ for the AIP society.
+% this task requires three components:
+% the \BibTeX\ \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst} style files,
+% customizing code for \file{natbib}, and
+% customizations of the \env{thebibliography} environment.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% Define the argument of the \cmd\bibliographystyle\ command.
+% The user must have installed a \file{.bst} file of the corresponding name.
+% This file will then be used by \BibTeX\ when compiling the document's \file{.bbl} file.
+%
+% The default bibliography style for the AIP journal substyles are \file{aipnum.bst} and \file{aipauth.bst}.
+% To generate them, use \classname{custom-bib} version 4.21 or later.
+% Run the \file{.bst} generator, \file{makebst.tex}, and
+% accept all defaults, with the following exceptions:
+%
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% ORDERING OF REFERENCES: c: seq-no (references in order of Citation);
+% \item
+% AUTHOR NAMES: i: nm-init,ed-au (Initials + surname);
+% \item
+% NUMBER OF AUTHORS: l: max 12, min 12 (there will be three prompts total);
+% \item
+% TYPEFACE FOR AUTHORS IN LIST OF REFERENCES: u: nmft,nmft-def (User defined author font);
+% \item
+% FONT FOR FIRST NAMES: u: fnm-def (First names in user defined font);
+% \item
+% EDITOR NAMES IN INCOLLECTION ETC: a: nmfted (Editors incollection like authors);
+% \item
+% DATE FORMAT: p: yr-par (Date in parentheses);
+% \item
+% SUPPRESS MONTH: x: xmth (Date is year only);
+% \item
+% TITLE OF ARTICLE: i: tit-it (Title italic)
+% \item
+% ARTICLE TITLE PRESENT: x: jtit-x (No article title);
+% \item
+% JOURNAL NAME FONT: r: jttl-rm (Journal title normal);
+% \item
+% TECHNICAL REPORT TITLE: b: trtit-b (Tech. report title like books);
+% \item
+% JOURNAL VOLUME: b: vol-bf (Volume bold);
+% \item
+% VOLUME PUNCTUATION: c: volp-com (Volume with comma);
+% \item
+% PAGE NUMBERS: f: jpg-1 (Only start page number);
+% \item
+% JOURNAL NAME PUNCTUATION: x: jnm-x (Space after journal);
+% \item
+% PUBLISHER IN PARENTHESES: d: pub-date (Publisher and date in parentheses);
+% \item
+% PUBLISHER POSITION: p: pre-pub (Publisher before chapter, pages);
+% \item
+% ISBN NUMBER: isbn: (Include ISBN for books, booklets)
+% \item
+% ISSN NUMBER: issn: (Include ISSN for periodicals)
+% \item
+% EDITOR IN COLLECTIONS: b: edby (Booktitle, edited by \dots);
+% \item
+% PUNCTUATION BETWEEN SECTIONS (BLOCKS): c: blk-com (Comma between blocks);
+% \item
+% ABBREVIATE WORD `PAGES': a: pp (`Page' abbreviated);
+% \item
+% ABBREVIATE WORD `EDITORS': a: ed (`Editor' abbreviated);
+% \item
+% OTHER ABBREVIATIONS: a: abr (Abbreviations);
+% \item
+% ABBREVIATION FOR `EDITION': a: ednx (`Edition' abbreviated as `ed');
+% \item
+% EDITION NUMBERS: n: ord (Numerical editions);
+% \item
+% STORED JOURNAL NAMES: a: jabr (Abbreviated journal names);
+% \item
+% FONT OF `ET AL': i: etal-it (Italic et al);
+% \item
+% ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: r: revdata, eprint, url, url-blk (Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, numpages, url)
+% \item
+% NEW FONT SELECTION SCHEME: n: nfss (NFSS);
+% \item
+% ADDITIONAL REVTeX DATA FIELDS: y: revdata (additional data fields);
+% \item
+% REFERENCE COMPONENT TAGS: y: reference component tags;
+% \item
+% URL ADDRESS: n: URL as note;
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% A file \file{aipnum.dbj} file equivalent to the following should result:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\input docstrip
+%\preamble
+%----------------------------------------
+%*** REVTeX-compatible aipnum4-1.bst 2009-10-08 ***
+%\endpreamble
+%\postamble
+%End of customized bst file
+%\endpostamble
+%\keepsilent
+%\askforoverwritefalse
+%\def\MBopts{\from{merlin.mbs}{%
+% head,\MBopta}
+%\from{physjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{geojour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{photjour.mbs}{\MBopta}
+%\from{merlin.mbs}{tail,\MBopta}}
+%\def\MBopta{%
+% lang,%: Use language field to switch hyphenation patterns for title
+% pres,pres-bf,%: Presentation, speaker bold face
+% seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% vonx,%: Sort without von part (de la Maire after Mahone)
+% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% nmft,nmft-def,%: User defined author font (\bibnamefont)
+% fnm-def,%: First names in user defined font (\bibfnamefont)
+% nmfted,%: Editors incollection like authors font
+% nmand-rm,%: `And' in normal font (JONES and JAMES)
+% lab,lab-def,%: User defined citation font (\citenamefont)
+% and-rm,%: Cited `and' in normal font
+% yr-par,%: Date in parentheses as (May 1993)
+% date-nil-x,%: If date is empty, then do not produce the surrounding punctuation (parens, brackets, colon, comma)
+% tit-qq,%: Title and punctuation in double quotes (``Title,'' ..)
+% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter, just as in InBook
+% jtit-x,%: Title is ignored
+% inproceedings-chapter,%: produce pages after chapter just as in InBook
+% article-booktitle,%: format booktitle
+% article-series,%: article can has series
+% jttl-rm,%: Journal name normal font
+% journal-address,%: Include address field (in parentheses) along with journal name
+% book-bt,%: Field `booktitle', or if absent field `title', is book title
+% thesis-title-o,%: Title is optional: no warning issued if empty
+% techreport-institution-par,%: format tech report institution like book publisher
+% vol-bf,%: Volume bold as {\bf vol}(num)
+% vnum-x,%: Journal vol, without number as 34
+% volp-com,%: Volume with comma as vol(num), ppp
+% jpg-1,%: Only start page number
+% book-editor-booktitle,%: Book permits empty author, produces title before editor in this case
+% inbook-editor-booktitle,%: Allow using both title/booktitle, both author/editor
+% bookaddress,%: Italic booktitle followed by bookaddress in roman
+% num-xser,%: Allows number without series and suppresses word "number"
+% number-cap,%: Capitalize word `number' as: "Number 123"
+% chapter-cap,%: Capitalize word `chapter' as: `Chapter 42'
+% series-number,%: Series number as: `Springer Lecture Notes No. 125'
+% numser-booktitle,%: After book title and conference address, and before editors
+% ser-vol,%: Series, vol. 23
+% ser-rm,%: format series roman , even when used with volume
+% volume-cap,%: Capitalize word `volume', as: `Volume 7 in Lecture Series'
+% ser-ed,%: Series and volume after booktitle and before editors
+% jnm-x,%: Space after journal name
+% pg-bk,book-chapter-pages,%: As chapter and page: chapter 42, page 345
+% pub-date,%: Publisher with address and date in parentheses (Oxford, 1994)
+% ay-empty-pub-parens-x,%: eliminate parentheses altogether if nothing inside
+% pre-pub,%: Publisher before volume, chapter, pages
+% pre-edn,%: Edition before publisher
+% pre-pub,pre-edn,%: Edition, publisher, volume, chapter, pages
+% isbn,%: Include ISBN for books, booklets, etc.
+% issn,%: Include ISSN for periodicals
+% doi-link,doi,%: Doi forms a link to the publication, anchored to the volume or title
+% edby,%: In booktitle, edited by .. (where .. is names)
+% blk-com,%: Comma between blocks
+% fin-endbibitem,%: Command at end instead of period
+% pp,%: `Page' abbreviated as p. or pp.
+% ed,%: `Editor' abbreviated as ed. or eds.
+% abr,%: Abbreviations of such words
+% ednx,%: `Edition' abbreviated as `ed'
+% ord,%: Numerical editions as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, etc
+% jabr,%: Abbreviated journal names
+% etal-it,%: Italic et al
+% revdata,eprint,url,url-blk,translation,%: Include REVTeX data fields collaboration, eid, eprint, archive, url, translation
+% SLACcitation,%: Produce SLACcitation field
+% numpages-x,%: Do not include numpages field
+% url,url-prefix-x,%: URL without prefix (default: `URL ')
+% bibinfo,%: Reference component tags like \bibinfo in the content of \bibitem
+% bibfield,%: Element tags like \bibfield in the content of \bibitem
+% nfss,%: Use LaTeX commands which may not work with Plain TeX
+%,{%
+% }}
+%\generate{\file{aipnum4-1.bst}{\MBopts}}
+%\endbatchfile
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% Between the two files \file{aipnum.dbj} and \file{aipauth.dbj},
+% the differences are limited:
+% \file{aipnum.dbj} has two lines lacking in \file{aipauth.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% seq-no,%: Citation order (unsorted, like unsrt.bst)
+% nm-init,ed-au,%: Initials + surname (J. F. Smith)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% thus, the ``numbered citation'' bibliography is sorted by citation order, and
+% the names are give first inital, then last name.
+%
+% Likewise, \file{aipauth.dbj} has one line lacking in \file{aipnum.dbj}:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% nm-rev,%: Surname + comma + initials (Smith, J. F.)
+% \end{verbatim}
+% Thus, the ``author-year'' bibliography is sorted by author name, and
+% names are given last name first, followed by initials.
+%
+% We ensure that the journal substyle has the first word
+% in the matter by installing the (default) AIP code
+% later on (see Section~\ref{sec:aip-defaults}).
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pre at bibdata}
+%
+% Set up to write endnotes to a .bib file; its data will be incorporated into the bibliography.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\pre at bibdata{\jobname\bibdata at app}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsection}
+% We define the sectioning command to use when starting the bibliography
+% (we use \cmd\refname).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}%
+\def\rtx at bibsection{%
+ \@ifx at empty\refname{%
+ \par\vspace{6\p@ plus 6\p@}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line has been commented out:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \let\@hangfroms at section\@hang at froms
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\section\expandafter*\expandafter{\refname}%
+ \@nobreaktrue
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpreamble}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\newblock}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bibpreamble\@empty
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \bibsep\z@\relax
+}%
+\def\newblock{\ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibfont}
+% We define the font switch that applies to the body of the bibliography.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \def\bibfont{%
+ \preprintsty at sw{}{\footnotesize}%
+ \@clubpenalty\clubpenalty
+ \labelsep\z@
+ }%
+}%
+\let\place at bibnumber\place at bibnumber@sup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Index}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{theindex}{%
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+ \c at secnumdepth-\maxdimen
+ \onecolumngrid at push
+ \section{\indexname}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem
+ \onecolumngrid at pop
+}{%
+}%
+%
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
+%
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{20\p@}}
+%
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@ \hspace*{30\p@}}
+%
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Typesize Processing}%
+% The formatting specification for the preprint option is:
+% Times Roman 12 pt, double spacing, with 1-inch margins on letter paper.
+% Paragraphs indented ``five spaces''.
+% Display math on standard indent, with equation number flush right in parenthesis, with subequations roman.
+%
+% That for reprint option is to format similar to the printed journal; with most journals
+% set (approximately analyzed) 10-point, 2-column grid, letter paper.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx at aip10pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname at class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps10pt\substyle at post}%
+ \class at info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname at class
+ \class at info{Overriding 10pt}%
+ \aipreprint
+}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx at aip11pt\endcsname{\csname rtx at aip12pt\endcsname}%
+\expandafter\def\csname rtx at aip12pt\endcsname{%
+ \let\@currname at class\@currname
+ \def\@currname{aps12pt\substyle at post}%
+ \class at info{Reading file \@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \input{\@currname.\substyle at ext}%
+ \let\@currname\@currname at class
+ \class at info{Overriding 12pt}%
+ \aippreprint
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\today}
+% Procedure \cmd\today\ is used in the article class, but not in
+% this document class.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\today{%
+ \number\day\space
+ \ifcase\month
+ \or January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June%
+ \or July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December%
+ \fi\space
+ \number\year
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{A. Running Title}
+% User-provided running title \cmd\@shorttitle\ to be set.
+%
+% \subsection{B. Equation numbering, figure and table numbering}
+% Equations can be numbered throughout, or by section, with appendix equations prepended by the appendix label.
+% Figures and tables are numbered throughout.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{C. Title}
+% Title page may break above abstract, within author list.
+% Title notes are signified by superior letter followed by right parenthesis.
+%
+% \subsection{D. Author footnote}
+% Set short line above these footnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{E. Author}
+% Class option \classoption{superscriptaddress} is standard.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \clo at superscriptaddress
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{F. Affiliations}
+% Set italic.
+%
+% \subsection{G. Received date}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{H. Abstract}
+% Single paragraph, no indent.
+%
+% \subsection{J. Lead Paragraph}
+% Set boldface, flush left before main text, single paragraph.
+% Separated from text by a short centered rule.
+%
+% \subsection{K. Headings}
+% Use labels: ROMAN, LETTER, arabic, letter.
+% Set ALLCAPS, boldface; Initial cap, boldface; Initial cap, bold-italic; Initial cap, italic.
+%
+% Theorem, proof title followed by colon. Follow author.
+%
+% \subsection{L. Text Footnotes}
+% Not permitted; use endnotes.
+%
+% \subsection{M. Citations and Bibliography}
+% Numerical \filename{aipnum.bst}, author-year \filename{aipauth.bst}, and numbered author-year \filename{aipnumauth.bst} are the available choices.
+% Numerical is standard, with all styles permitted in journal classes 3a and 4b.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{N. References}
+%
+% Article Title usage:
+%
+% Article title required in all journals with "unpublished", "to be published", "in press" and "submitted" refs.
+%
+% Exceptions:
+%
+% Journal classes 1a,1b,2,4a:
+%
+% Article title not allowed in published references, except in the case of "in press" or submitted" (see sample references below).
+%
+% Journal class 3a:
+%
+% Article title allowed but not required in author-year references (use must be consistent within a single manuscript).
+%
+% Journal class 3b:
+%
+% Article title required in all journal references and report references.
+%
+% Journal class 4b:
+%
+% Article title allowed in journal references in author-year mode.
+%
+% \subsection{O. Examples of Numerical References}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{P. References in Author-year mode}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Q. Numbered Author-year References}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{R. Tables}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with Roman numeral.
+%
+% Table caption placed above table, followed by space,
+% two double lines, space, table column headings, space,
+% single line, table contents, two double lines.
+%
+% Footnotes labeled with superior lower-case letter, set below table contents.
+%
+% \subsection{S. Figures}
+% Placed within text (floated), labeled with arabic numbers.
+%
+% Caption set below figure. A citation to be set inline, not superscripted.
+%
+% \subsection{Society defaults}%
+%
+% After this society file is read in, we will process the
+% \cmd\@journal- and \cmd\@pointsize-specific code.
+% Here we define the defaults.
+%
+% We select \textbf{Chaos} as the default journal substyle, because it is
+% the most permissive in terms of bibliography and citation style,
+% and it is formatted in two column in the reprint style.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@journal at default{cha}%
+\def\@pointsize at default{12}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Journal-Specific Code}%
+%
+% For AIP journals, we supply code specific to JCP, POP, RSI, JAP, APL, CHA, POF, BMF, RSE, JMP.
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jcp}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipjcp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jcp} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pop}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aippop{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pop} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rsi}}%
+%A member of the journal class 1a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aiprsi{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rsi} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jap}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 1b.
+%
+% No running title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipjap{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 1b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jap} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{apl}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 2.
+%
+% No running title.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipapl{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 2 uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \let\@runningtitle\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{apl} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{cha}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipcha{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{cha} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{pof}}%
+%Sole member of the journal class 3b.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aippof{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 3b uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Article titles are required, so we include them if available,
+% but if absent, we can do no more than make a warning in the \file{.blg}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{pof} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{bmf}}%
+% A member of the journal class 4a,
+% the Biomicrofluidics journal is single column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipbmf{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{bmf} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{rse}}%
+%A member of the journal class 4a.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aiprse{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Journal class 4a uses the (superscript) numerical citation style by default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\authoryear at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{rse} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\classoption{jmp}}%
+% Sole member of the journal class 4b, Journal of Mathematical Physics is single column.
+% For an example of \env{itemize}, see JMP\_122901\_1 (48).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rtx at aipjmp{%
+ \typeout{Using journal substyle \@journal.}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Article titles are allowed.
+% Journal is formatted in a single column.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\aip at jtitx@sw
+ \@booleanfalse\twocolumn at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% End of \classoption{jmp} code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Establish AIP Defaults\label{sec:aip-defaults}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\footinbib at sw}
+% All AIP journals invoke the \classoption{footinbib} option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\footinbib at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\place at bibnumber}
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibpunct}
+% We install code that will
+% govern the style in which \cmd\cite\ commands are
+% formatted,
+% select the presentation for \cmd\bibitem s
+% and control the \BibTeX\ processing.
+%
+% Note that a journal substyle may override these settings.
+% Likewise, document preamble may itself invoke \cmd\bibpunct\ or \cmd\bibliographystyle,
+% thereby overriding these settings and those of the journal substyle.
+%
+% The numbered citations of \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum}
+% are compatible with \classoption{footinbib} and
+% the compression and coalescing features of \classname{natbib},
+% while \file{aipauth}'s author-year citations are not.
+% Therefore, we de-select such options if we are selecting author-year citations.
+%
+% Note on \classname{natbib} presets:
+% \file{aipnum} and \file{aipauthnum} uses the Chicago \cmd\bibpunct\ style;
+% while \file{aipauth} uses that of Nature.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\NAT at mcite: if not using numerical citations, we set \cmd\NAT at mcite\
+% to a lower value, to turn off the mcite semantics of \classname{natbib}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\place at bibnumber\place at bibnumber@sup
+\appdef\setup at hook{%
+ \authoryear at sw{%
+ \aip at jtitx@sw{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle at post}%
+ }{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipauth\substyle at post}%
+ }%
+ \authornum at sw{%
+ \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+ \let\onlinecite\rev at citealpnum
+ }{%
+ \bibhang10\p@
+ \bibpunct{(%)
+ }{%(
+ )}{; }{a}{,}{,}%
+ \@booleanfalse\footinbib at sw
+ \let\NAT at mcite\@ne
+ \let\NAT at sort\z@
+ \def\NAT at cmprs{\z@}%
+ \let\NAT at def@citea\rtx at def@citea
+ \let\NAT at def@citea at close\rtx at def@citea at close
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \aip at jtitx@sw{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle at post}%
+ }{%
+ \def\@bibstyle{aipnum\substyle at post}%
+ }%
+ \bibpunct{}{}{,}{s}{}{\textsuperscript{,}}%
+ \let\onlinecite\rev at citealpnum
+ }%
+}%
+\def\make at footnote@endnote{%
+ \footinbib at sw{%
+ \authoryear at sw{\authornum at sw{\false at sw}{\true at sw}}{\false at sw}%
+ {}{%
+ \ltx at footnote@push
+ \def\thempfn{Note\thefootnote}%
+ \let\ltx at footmark\rev at citemark
+ \let\ltx at foottext\rev at endtext
+ \appdef\class at enddocumenthook{\auto at bib}%
+ \let\printendnotes\relax
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aipreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps10pt.rtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aipreprint{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aippreprint}%
+% We want to override \filename{aps12pt.rtx}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aippreprint{%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+% %Here ends the programmer's documentation.
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/aip.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,1257 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 108
+% ltxdocext.dtx: package to extend the ltxdoc class of standard LaTeX
+% Copyright (c) 2008 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxdocext.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% ltxdocext.sty, ltxdocext.pdf, ltxdocext.ins, ltxdocext.drv.
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex ltxdocext.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex ltxdocext.dtx; ...
+%
+% Program calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo
+% pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx
+% pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file README.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+ \file{ltxdocext.sty}{%
+ \from{ltxdocext.dtx}{package,kernel}%
+ }%
+ \file{acrofont.sty}{\from{ltxdocext.dtx}{fonts}}%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* ltxdocext.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run ltxdocext.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxdocext.dtx}\CheckSum{941}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*ltxdocext>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "ltxdocext.dtx",
+%%% version = "1.0",
+%%% date = "2008/08/13",
+%%% time = "11:23:00 GMT",
+%%% checksum = "929",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2008 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, ltxdoc",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "extensions to the ltxdoc class",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</ltxdocext>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{README} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{README}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{README}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.dtx
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxdocext.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under pdflatex
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%README ltxdocext.pdf
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxdocext.ins}}%
+% Typesetting this file with \TeX\ generates
+% the package file.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.sty acrofont.sty
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.pdf
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%ltxdocext.aux ltxdocext.idx ltxdocext.ind ltxdocext.log ltxdocext.toc
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver|package|fonts>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</driver|package|fonts>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesFile{ltxdocext.sty}%
+%<fonts>\ProvidesFile{acrofont.sty}%
+%<*driver>
+\expandafter\ProvidesFile\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<version>
+ [2008/08/04 1.1b2 ltxdoc extensions package]% \fileversion
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The driver module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{README} as required.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} document class, with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxdocext
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{README}
+\title{%
+ Extensions to the \classname{ltxdoc} class%
+ \thanks{%
+ This file has version number \fileversion,
+ last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+ Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2008 The American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+\author{%
+Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the README file.
+%\fi
+
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxdocext} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{publish.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains prebuilt runtime files, documentation, and full source,
+ready to add to a TDS-compliant \TeX\ installation.
+
+The \classname{ltxdocext} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself are distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the files \file{ltxdocext.sty} and \file{acrofont.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where they will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+If you will be using the \classname{acrofont} package, you must
+also install the virtual fonts
+\file{zpsynocmrv}, \file{zptmnocmr},
+\file{zptmnocmrm}, and \file{zpzcnocmry}.
+The corresponding \file{.tfm}, \file{.vf}, and \file{.vpl}
+files are part of this distribution.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxdocext.pdf}.
+The \file{.dtx} file, \file{ltxdocext.dtx}, constitutes
+in itself an instance of use of the \classname{ltxdocext}
+package and the \classname{acrofont} package.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package files \file{ltxdocext.sty} and \file{acrofont.sty}
+are generated from this file, \file{ltxdocext.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxdocext.dtx| (Note: do \emph{not} use \LaTeX\ for this step).
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxdocext.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxdocext.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxdocext.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxdocext.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex;
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxdocext.sty},
+and the package file \file{acrofont.sty}.
+Make sure that {\sc docstrip} receives permission
+to overwrite existing versions of these packages.
+\item
+Now
+typeset \file{ltxdocext.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the file \file{README}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxdocext.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxdocext.gls ltxdocext.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.sty} and
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{acrofont.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxdocext.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete;
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxutil\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using the \classname{ltxdoc} and \classname{acrofont} packages}%
+% These packages are an adjunct to the
+% standard \LaTeX\ \classname{ltxdoc} class and may be
+% simply invoked as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass[draft]{ltxdoc}
+%\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+%\RequirePackage{acrofont}%
+%\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Your document should simply cleave to the standards of the
+% \classname{ltxdoc} class, with extensions and alterations as noted.
+%
+% \subsection{Extensions to the \classname{ltxdoc} class}%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Extensions to the \env{verbatim} environment and \cs{verb} command}%
+%
+% The delimiters \verb$<<$ and \verb$>>$ within the scope of the verbatim environment
+% or within the argument of the \cmd\verb\ command produce
+% italics surrounded by angle brackets.
+% This typographic convention usually indicates
+% \emph{metalanguage}, i.e., a placeholder.
+%
+% To obtain the angle bracket character per se,
+% double the character, viz., ``\verb$the delimiter \verb+<<<<+$''.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The -\texttt{matter} Commands Work}
+% The sectioning commands \cmd\frontmatter, \cmd\mainmatter, and \cmd\backmatter
+% of the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{book} class are operative in the
+% \classname{ltxdoc} class.
+%
+% \subsubsection{The \cs{GetFileInfo} command}\label{sec:GetFileInfo}
+% You can use the \cmd\GetFileInfo\ command to extract
+% the date, version, and file info of a file which has registered itself
+% via the \cmd\ProvidesFile\ or \cmd\ProvidesClass\ command
+% (employing the optional argument thereto).
+%
+% For instance, if your document contains the following:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+%\GetFileInfo{ltxdocext.sty}%
+%\end{verbatim}
+% then the following control sequence names will have
+% a value corresponding to that package's \cmd\ProvidesFile\
+% command:
+% \cmd\filedate: the file's date,
+% \cmd\fileversion: the file's version, and
+% \cmd\fileinfo: the file's info.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Self-Indexing Commands}%
+% Certain commands automatically produce an index entry
+% (or several related entries) according to the meaning.
+%
+% \begin{unnumtable}
+% \begin{tabular}{ll}
+% meta-text &\cmd\marg\arg{text}\\
+% command &\cmd\cmd\cmd\csname\\
+% environment name &\cmd\env\arg{name}\\
+% \cmd\begin\verb`{foo}`&\cmd\envb\arg{foo}\\
+% \cmd\end\verb`{foo}` &\cmd\enve\arg{foo}\\
+% argument &\cmd\arg\arg{name}\\
+% optional &\cmd\oarg\arg{name}\\
+% filename &\cmd\file\arg{name}\\
+% url &\cmd\url\arg{name}\\
+% document class &\cmd\classname\arg{name}\\
+% document substyle &\cmd\substyle\arg{name}\\
+% class option &\cmd\classoption\arg{name}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{unnumtable}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Unnumbered Tables}%
+%
+% When your documentation requires the use of an unnumbered table,
+% use the \env{unnumtable} environment:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{unnumtable}
+%\begin{tabular}{ll}
+%<table rows>
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{unnumtable}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Structuring Tables}%
+% The commands \cmd\toprule, \cmd\colrule, and \cmd\botrule
+% allow you to mark the beginning of the column heads
+% the beginning of the table body, and the end of
+% the table body, respectively.
+% In context,
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\begin{tabular}{ll}
+%\toprule
+%<table head rows>
+%\colrule
+%<table rows>
+%\botrule
+%\end{tabular}
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{A Sectioning Command Below \cs{subsection}}%
+% The \cmd\subsubsection\ command is defined.
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Alterations to the \classname{ltxdoc} class}%
+% The following involve no new markup, but they
+% do change the appearance of your formatted documentation:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% Using the \classname{acrofont} package causes your
+% document to be formatted using the standard
+% Acrobat fonts to the greatest extent possible.
+% This means that for most documents, Computer Modern
+% is not used at all.
+% Math that unavoidable must use CM still exists, however.
+% \item
+% An index will be produced at the end of the document
+% without your needing to explicitly mark it up, and
+% it will have an entry in the TOC.
+% \item
+% The \env{quote} environment has a slightly smaller left margin.
+% \item
+% Array columns are set tight by default.
+% \item
+% A host of \cmd\DoNotIndex\ directives are invoked.
+% I intend this list to grow to encompass
+% even more commands. Send me your suggestions.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+%
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Extensions to the ltxdoc class}
+% The \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module comprises the
+% package \classname{ltxdocext.sty}, which provides extensions
+% to the standard \LaTeX\ \classname{ltxdoc} class.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% This portion of code is only present in the \LaTeX\ package (\texttt{.sty} file),
+% not in the kernel portion.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\class at name{ltxdocext}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\class at name}{%
+ An extension to the \protect\LaTeXe\space ltxdoc class
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur\_ogawa sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%
+% The bulk of the code is the kernel portion; a brief tail of \file{package} code then follows.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Incorporate \classname{ltxguide.cls} extensions}
+%
+% Code extracted from \classname{ltxguide.cls}, by Alan Jeffrey.
+% ``This code stolen from \classname{ltxguide.cls}:
+% Some hacks with verbatim... NB: this would be better done with the
+% verbatim package, but this document has to run on any \LaTeX
+% installation.''
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{verbatim}%
+\let\o at verbatim\verbatim
+\def\verbatim{%
+ \ifhmode\unskip\par\fi
+% \nopagebreak % Overridden by list penalty
+ \ifx\@currsize\normalsize
+ \small
+ \fi
+ \o at verbatim
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here we extend the font-setting command to include making \texttt{<>} active
+% (i.e., adjusting the input encoding).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand \verbatim at font {%
+ \normalfont \ttfamily
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make \verb$|...|$ a synonym for \cmd\verb\verb$|...|$.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{shortvrb}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \MakeShortVerb{\|}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Make active bracket characters produce italics surrounded by angle brackets
+% (used in \env{verbatim} and \cmd\verb).
+% \verb|<<| produces a less-than, and \verb|>>| produces a greater-than.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+ \gdef<{\@ifnextchar<\@lt\@meta}
+ \gdef>{\@ifnextchar>\@gt\@gtr at err}
+ \gdef\@meta#1>{\marg{#1}}
+ \gdef\@lt<{\char`\<}
+ \gdef\@gt>{\char`\>}
+\endgroup
+\def\@gtr at err{%
+ \ClassError{ltxguide}{%
+ Isolated \protect>%
+ }{%
+ In this document class, \protect<...\protect>
+ is used to indicate a parameter.\MessageBreak
+ I've just found a \protect> on its own.
+ Perhaps you meant to type \protect>\protect>?
+ }%
+}
+\def\verbatim at nolig@list{\do\`\do\,\do\'\do\-}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of code stolen from \file{ltxguide.cls}. Thanks, Alan.
+%
+% Add functionality from doc.dtx:
+% (code stolen from doc.dtx):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\GetFileInfo#1{%
+ \def\filename{#1}%
+ \def\@tempb##1 ##2 ##3\relax##4\relax{%
+ \def\filedate{##1}%
+ \def\fileversion{##2}%
+ \def\fileinfo{##3}}%
+ \edef\@tempa{\csname ver@#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\@tempb\@tempa\relax? ? \relax\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% (end of code stolen from doc.dtx. Thanks FMi.)
+%
+% Various forms of self-indexing commands:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\marg}[1]{%
+ \meta{#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\meta{#1} placeholder}\index{placeholder>#1=\string\meta{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\meta[1]{%
+ \mbox{\LANGLE\itshape#1\/\RANGLE}%
+}%
+\def\LANGLE{$\langle$}%
+\def\RANGLE{$\rangle$}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\arg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, argument}\index{argument>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\let\oarg\undefined
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\oarg}[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily[%]
+ }\meta{#1}{\ttfamily%[
+ ]}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}, optional argument}%
+ \index{argument, optional>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cmd{\begingroup\makeatletter\@cmd}%
+\long\def\@cmd#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\cmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\cmd at to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}%
+\def\cmd at to@index#1#2\@nil{%
+ \index{#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%\index{command>#2=\string\cmd#1#2}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{{\ttfamily\char`\\#1}}%
+\def\scmd#1{%
+ \cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\scmd at to@index\string#1\@nil
+}%
+\def\scmd at to@index#1#2\@nil#3{%
+ \index{\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+%\index{command>\string$#3=\string\cmd#1#2---#3}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\env{\name at idx{environment}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\envb[1]{%
+ {\ttfamily\string\begin\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\enve[1]{{\ttfamily\string\end\string{}\env{#1}{\ttfamily\string}}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\file}{\begingroup\@sanitize\@file}%
+\long\def\@file#1{\endgroup
+ {\ttfamily#1}%
+ \index{#1=\string\ttt{#1}}\index{file>#1=\string\ttt{#1}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\substyle{\name at idx{document substyle}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classoption{\name at idx{document class option}}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\classname{\name at idx{document class}}%
+\def\name at idx#1#2{%
+ {\ttfamily#2}%
+ \index{#2\space#1=\string\ttt{#2}\space#1}\index{#1>#2=\string\ttt{#2}}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\url at ltxdocext{\begingroup\catcode`\/\active\catcode`\.\active\catcode`\:\active\@url}%
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \ifx\url\undefined\let\url\url at ltxdocext\fi
+}%
+\def\@url#1{%
+ \url at break{\ttfamily#1}%
+ \url at char\edef\@tempa{#1=\string\url{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\index\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+ \expandafter\index\expandafter{\expandafter u\expandafter r\expandafter l\expandafter >\@tempa}%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+{\catcode`\:\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup:}{\active at colon}%
+\def\colon at break{\colon at char\allowbreak}%
+\def\colon at char{:}%
+{\catcode`\/\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup/}{\active at slash}%
+\def\slash at break{\slash at char\allowbreak}%
+\def\slash at char{/}%
+{\catcode`\.\active\aftergroup\def\aftergroup.}{\active at dot}%
+\def\dot at break{\dot at char\allowbreak}%
+\def\dot at char{.}%
+\def\url at break{\let\active at slash\slash at break\let\active at dot\dot at break\let\active at colon\colon at break}%
+\def\url at char{\let\active at slash\slash at char\let\active at dot\dot at char\let\active at colon\colon at char}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Changes to the base class of the ltxdoc class}
+% Modify \env{theindex} environment so that it produces a TOC entry
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+ {\if at twocolumn
+ \@restonecolfalse
+ \else
+ \@restonecoltrue
+ \fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35\p@
+\def\see##1##2{\textit{See} ##1}%
+\def\seealso##1##2{\textit{See also} ##1}%
+\long\def\cmd##1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd at to@cs\string##1}}%
+\def\@url##1{\url at break\ttt{##1}\endgroup}%
+\def\ttt{\begingroup\@sanitize\ttfamily\@ttt}%
+\def\@ttt##1{##1\endgroup}%
+\mathchardef\save at secnumdepth\c at secnumdepth
+\c at secnumdepth\m at ne
+ \twocolumn[\section{\indexname}]%
+% \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+% {\MakeUppercase\indexname}%
+\c at secnumdepth\save at secnumdepth
+ \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+ \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+ \let\item\@idxitem}
+ {\if at restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\renewenvironment{quote}
+ {\list{}{%
+ \leftmargin1em\relax
+ \rightmargin\leftmargin
+ }%
+ \item\relax}
+ {\endlist}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Extensions to the base class of \classname{ltxdoc.cls}}
+%
+% Matter commands from \classname{book.cls}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if at mainmatter
+\newif\if at openright
+\@openrighttrue
+\DeclareRobustCommand\frontmatter{%
+ \cleartorecto
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+ \pagenumbering{roman}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\mainmatter{%
+ \cleartorecto
+ \@mainmattertrue
+ \pagenumbering{arabic}%
+}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand\backmatter{%
+ \if at openright
+ \cleartorecto
+ \else
+ \clearpage
+ \fi
+ \@mainmatterfalse
+}%
+\ifx\undefined\cleartorecto
+ \def\cleartorecto{\cleardoublepage}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Unnumbered tables
+%
+% \begin{environment}{unnumtable}
+% An unnumbered table does not float.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@to{to}%
+\newenvironment{unnumtable}{%
+ \par
+ \addpenalty\predisplaypenalty
+ \addvspace\abovedisplayskip
+ \hbox\@to\hsize\bgroup\hfil\ignorespaces
+ \let\@Hline\@empty
+}{%
+ \unskip\hfil\egroup
+ \penalty\postdisplaypenalty
+ \vskip\belowdisplayskip
+ \aftergroup\ignorespaces
+ \@endpetrue
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% Emulate \cmd\toprule\ and friends
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\toprule{\hline\hline}%
+\providecommand\colrule{\\\hline}%
+\providecommand\botrule{\\\hline\hline}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Define sectioning command below \cmd\subsubsection.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\subsubsubsection{%
+ \@startsection{subsubsection}{4}%
+ {\z@}{-15\p@\@plus-5\p@\@minus-2\p@}%
+ {5\p@}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{In lieu of \file{ltxdoc.cfg}}
+% We don't want everything to appear in the index
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DoNotIndex{\',\.,\@M,\@@input,\@Alph,\@alph,\@addtoreset,\@arabic}
+\DoNotIndex{\@badmath,\@centercr,\@cite}
+\DoNotIndex{\@dotsep,\@empty,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ignoretrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@input,\@ixpt,\@m,\@minus,\@mkboth}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ne,\@nil,\@nomath,\@plus,\roman,\@set at topoint}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempboxa,\@tempcnta,\@tempdima,\@tempdimb}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue,\@viipt,\@viiipt,\@vipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@vpt,\@warning,\@xiipt,\@xipt,\@xivpt,\@xpt,\@xviipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\@xxpt,\@xxvpt,\\,\ ,\addpenalty,\addtolength,\addvspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\advance,\ast,\begin,\begingroup,\bfseries,\bgroup,\box}
+\DoNotIndex{\bullet}
+\DoNotIndex{\cdot,\cite,\CodelineIndex,\cr,\day,\DeclareOption}
+\DoNotIndex{\def,\DisableCrossrefs,\divide,\DocInput,\documentclass}
+\DoNotIndex{\DoNotIndex,\egroup,\ifdim,\else,\fi,\em,\endtrivlist}
+\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\end at dblfloat,\end at float,\endgroup}
+\DoNotIndex{\endlist,\everycr,\everypar,\ExecuteOptions,\expandafter}
+\DoNotIndex{\fbox}
+\DoNotIndex{\filedate,\filename,\fileversion,\fontsize,\framebox,\gdef}
+\DoNotIndex{\global,\halign,\hangindent,\hbox,\hfil,\hfill,\hrule}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip,\hspace,\hss,\if at tempswa,\ifcase,\or,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifvmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\input}
+\DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\let,\leftmark}
+\DoNotIndex{\list,\llap,\long,\m at ne,\m at th,\mark,\markboth,\markright}
+\DoNotIndex{\month,\newcommand,\newcounter,\newenvironment}
+\DoNotIndex{\NeedsTeXFormat,\newdimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\newlength,\newpage,\nobreak,\noindent,\null,\number}
+\DoNotIndex{\numberline,\OldMakeindex,\OnlyDescription,\p@}
+\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\par,\paragraph,\paragraphmark,\parfillskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\PrintChanges,\PrintIndex,\ProcessOptions}
+\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ProvidesClass,\raggedbottom,\raggedright}
+\DoNotIndex{\refstepcounter,\relax,\renewcommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\rightmargin,\rightmark,\rightskip,\rlap,\rmfamily}
+\DoNotIndex{\secdef,\selectfont,\setbox,\setcounter,\setlength}
+\DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\sfcode,\skip,\sloppy,\slshape,\space}
+\DoNotIndex{\symbol,\the,\trivlist,\typeout,\tw@,\undefined,\uppercase}
+\DoNotIndex{\usecounter,\usefont,\usepackage,\vfil,\vfill,\viiipt}
+\DoNotIndex{\viipt,\vipt,\vskip,\vspace}
+\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xiipt,\year,\z@}
+\DoNotIndex{\next}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Direct \classname{ltxdoc} to produce an index.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{\PrintIndex\PrintChanges}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Extension to \LaTeX's \env{filecontents} Environment}
+% We want to
+% coax the version number into \env{filecontents}-generated files.
+% Note that we expect \cmd\fileversion\ and \cmd\filedate\ to
+% hold the needed information. For this to be the case,
+% your document should execute the \cmd\GetFileInfo\ command
+% (as documented in section~\ref{sec:GetFileInfo}) before
+% any instances of \env{filecontents}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+\def\endfilecontents{%
+ \immediate\write\reserved at c{%
+ \string\iffalse\space ltxdoc klootch^^J%
+ \ifx\undefined\fileversion\else
+ \ifx\undefined\filedate\else
+ This file has version number \fileversion, last revised \filedate.%
+ \fi\fi
+ \string\fi
+ }%
+ \immediate\closeout\reserved at c
+ \def\T##1##2##3{%
+ \ifx##1\@undefined\else
+ \@latex at warning@no at line{##2 has been converted to Blank ##3e}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \T\L{Form Feed}{Lin}%
+ \T\I{Tab}{Spac}%
+ \immediate\write\@unused{}%
+}%
+\expandafter\let\csname endfilecontents*\endcsname\endfilecontents
+\makeatother
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Alter formatting in arrays; set them tight.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength\arraycolsep{0pt}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{kernel} {\sc docstrip} module}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Tail of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here is the remainder of the package code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Currently, there is little.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Font Package for Acrobat Compatability}%
+% The package \classname{acrofont}
+% substitutes Acrobat-standard fonts for Computer Modern where possible,
+% even in math mode.
+% Documents typeset with this package in effect will require as little
+% downloaded font data as possible, but will not be exemplars of
+% fine math typesetting.
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{fonts} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% The document class module comprises this and the next
+% four sections.
+% \begin{macro}{\class at base}
+% We define in exactly one spot the base class.
+% Typically that class will be one of \classname{book},
+% \classname{article}, or \classname{report}.
+% The base class effectively defines the use and the markup scheme
+% of the class of documents to be handled by this class.
+%
+% This class is a variant of the standard \LaTeX\ book class:
+% \url{ftp://ctan.tug.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/unpacked}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*fonts>
+\def\class at name{ltxdocext}%
+\expandafter\ClassInfo\expandafter{\class at name}{%
+ Written for \protect\LaTeXe\space
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Variants on psfonts packages}%
+% The following uses \file{times.sty} from \url{/packages/psnfss/psfonts.dtx}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{times}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following uses \file{mathptm.sty} from \url{/packages/psnfss/psfonts.dtx}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{mathptm}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{ot1ptmcm.fd}.
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zptmnocmr} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zptmcmr}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{ptmcm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ptmcm}{m}{n}{
+ <-> zptmnocmr
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{ptmcm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * ptmnocm/m/n}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omlptmcm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zptmnocmrm} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zptmcmrm}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OML}{ptmcm}{\skewchar \font =127}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{m}{it}{
+ <-> zptmnocmrm
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{l}{it}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/it}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OML}{ptmcm}{l}{sl}{<->ssub * ptmcm/m/sl}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omspzccm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zpzcnocmry} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zpzccmry}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{pzccm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{pzccm}{m}{n}{
+ <-> zpzcnocmry
+}{}% cmsy10 Symbol Zapf Chancery Medium-Italic Times-Roman
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{pzccm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * pzccm/m/n}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following is a customization of \file{omxpsycm.fd}
+% The virtual font referred to here \file{zpsynocmrv} is
+% a variant of Sebastian Rahtz's \file{zpsycmrv}, but with
+% even more glyphs moved from CM to Acrobat-standard fonts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMX}{psycm}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{psycm}{m}{n}{
+ <-> zpsynocmrv
+}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMX}{psycm}{l}{n}{<->ssub * psycm/m/n}{}
+%
+\DeclareFontEncoding{8r}{}{}% from file: 8renc.def
+\DeclareFontFamily{8r}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45 }% from file: 8rcmr.fd
+\DeclareFontShape{8r}{cmr}{m}{n}{
+ <-> cmr10
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Font definition files}%
+%
+% The following forces \LaTeX\ to do now what it would do anyway:
+% load the `font definition' information for the fonts that we
+% use. In this way, we prepare for faster processing through
+% the \cmd\dump\ of a preformatted macro package that will not
+% need to read in any packages or font definitions from disk.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\input{8rphv.fd}%
+\input{8rptm.fd}%
+\input{ot1phv.fd}%
+\input{ot1ptm.fd}%
+\input{t1ptm.fd}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{More math substitutions}%
+%
+% The following definitions arrange to get certain glyphs from the
+% text font instead of out of math pi fonts.
+% In particular, the copyright and registered symbols
+% are single glyphs instead of composites involving
+% the big circle from the \file{cmsy} font.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\eightRChar#1{{\def\encodingdefault{8r}\fontencoding\encodingdefault\selectfont\char"#1}}%
+ \def\LANGLE{$<$}%{\eightRChar{8B}}%
+ \def\RANGLE{$>$}%{\eightRChar{9B}}%
+%\def\ASTER{\eightRChar{2A}}%
+%\def\DAGGER{\eightRChar{86}}%
+%\def\DDAGGER{\eightRChar{87}}%
+ \def\BULLET{\eightRChar{95}}%
+%\def\SECTION{\eightRChar{A7}}%
+%\def\PARAGRAPH{\eightRChar{B6}}%
+ \def\VERTBAR{\eightRChar{7C}}%
+ \def\COPYRIGHT{\eightRChar{A9}}%
+ \def\REGISTERED{\eightRChar{AE}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\textbar{\VERTBAR}%
+ \def\textbullet{\BULLET}%
+ \def\textcopyright{\COPYRIGHT}%
+ \def\textregistered{\REGISTERED}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% I have removed \cmd\ensuremath\ from the following definition, and
+% all commands like \cmd\mathsection have been converted to
+% e.g., \cmd\textsection.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark{\@thefnmark}%
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
+ \textsection\or \textparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
+ \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{End of the \file{fonts} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% Here ends the module.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</fonts>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{Programming Conventions}%
+% In writing the above code, I cleave to certain conventions, noted
+% here.
+% My goal in explaining them is to encourage others maintaining this
+% body of code to consider following them as well.
+% The benefits are twofold:
+% Some of the coding conventions aim to avoid programming pitfalls;
+% following them reduces maintenance costs.
+% Others make the code easier to read; following these eases the
+% process of understanding how the code works.
+%
+% And, for my part, I prefer to read code of this type.
+%
+% \subsection{Whitespace Conventions}%
+% Exactly where code lines break and indent, and where additional
+% whitespace is inserted is explained here.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item
+% Each new macro definition or register assignment begins a new line.
+% Therefore, \cmd\def, \cmd\newcommand, and their ilk will start in column~1.
+% \item
+% Code is indented one space for each level of nesting within braces
+% \verb|{}|.
+% \item
+% Likewise, if possible, for \cmd\if\dots and matching \cmd\fi.
+% \item
+% However, the closing brace or \cmd\fi\ is outdented by one so that it
+% falls
+% at the same level of indentation as its matching brace or \cmd\if,
+% and it appears alone on its line.
+% \item
+% Use of the |tab| character is deprecated
+% (tabs are not standardized across all applications and operating
+% systems).
+% \item
+% Lines of code are limited to 72 characters.
+% I follow this convention mostly to ease the transmission of files
+% via email (a deprecated practice) and to accomodate people with
+% small monitors.
+% But \classname{ltxdoc} output looks better with the shorter lines, too.
+% \item
+% Extraneous whitespace in the replacement part of a macro definition
+% is avoided by using the comment character |%|.
+% In most cases, if falling at the end of a line of code,
+% a brace will be immediately followed by a comment character,
+% as will the macro parameter |#1| and any one-letter control sequence,
+% like |\\|.
+% \item
+% Extraneous whitespace in the package file is also avoided.
+% When \TeX\ reads in the .sty file, it will process \cmd\def s, and other commands,
+% but will not process blank spaces.
+% This practice is simply a discipline. You don't need to do this.
+% But sometimes \TeX\ has to read in a file while it is in horizontal mode,
+% at which point this practice is essential.
+% \end{itemize}
+% These conventions taken together are illustrated by the following:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\prepdef#1#2{%
+% \@ifxundefined#1{\toks@{}}{\toks@\expandafter{#1}}%
+% \toks at ii{#2}%
+% \edef#1{\the\toks at ii\the\toks@}%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% In the above, the definition of \cmd\prepdef\ would not fit on a single
+% line,
+% and required breaking. The first and last lines have matching braces,
+% and are a the same level of indentation, with the last line containing
+% a single brace.
+%
+% Each of the three intervening lines has balanced braces and is
+% indented by one space. Each line that would otherwise end in a single
+% brace character is terminated by a comment character.
+%
+% Some coders rely on the fact that a space character seen by \TeX's
+% scanner while in vertical mode is a no-op.
+% Be that as it may, I eliminate them unless actually intentional.
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For Procedures}%
+% Here are some of my preferences when writing procedures:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% I dislike defining a macro within another macro, especially when the
+% pattern part is non-nil.
+% You know, you are not saving much space in |mem| when you do this,
+% right?
+% You do save space in the hash table and the string pool, though.
+% On the other hand, we are not dealing with small \TeX\ engines
+% anymore; Team \LaTeX\ has made sure of this.
+%
+% \item
+% If two or more macros have very similar replacement parts, consider
+% layering.
+%
+% \item
+% Macros may perform parsing, may maintain tokens or registers, or may
+% set type (produce marks). I try to avoid combining the three functions
+% in a single macro.
+%
+% \item
+% When a procedure both does assignments and sets type, I try to have a
+% clean separations between the two activities. Try to avoid:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \vskip10pt
+% \parindent=0pt
+% \leavevmode
+% \end{verbatim}
+%
+% \item
+% The Boolean calculus (cf. \cmd\@ifx)
+% is very useful and produces code that executes nicely.
+% Using it also helps avoid your having to debug problems where
+% \cmd\if\dots\ and \cmd\fi\ are not properly balanced
+% (a nightmare, in case you have not already experienced it).
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \subsection{Conventions For \LaTeX}%
+% Team \LaTeX\ make certain recommendations in \file{clsguide.tex}.
+% Ones that I particularly pay attention to are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%
+% \item
+% For the sake of ``color safety'',
+% use \cmd\sbox\ rather than \cmd\setbox, \cmd\mbox\ rather than \cmd\hbox, and
+% \cmd\parbox\ or \env{minipage} rather than \cmd\vbox.
+%
+% \item
+% Use \cmd\newcommand\ and \cmd\newenvironment\ to declare user-level commands
+% and environments. Avoid the idiom \cmd\def\cmd\foo, \cmd\def\cmd\endfoo\ to define
+% an environment.
+% Ideally, all user-level markup could be extracted from the
+% document class by grepping on \cmd\newcommand\ and \cmd\newenvironment.
+%
+% \item
+% Prefer to use \cmd\setlength\ to assign registers.
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+% I cannot help but notice that much of the code of \LaTeX\ itself fails
+% to comply with many of the coding recommendations of Team \LaTeX.
+%
+% \Finale
+% \iffalse Here ends the programmer's documentation.\fi
+% \endinput
+%
+\endinput
+%%EOF
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxdocext.dtx
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/revtex4-1/source/latex/revtex/ltxfront.dtx 2019-01-16 23:33:22 UTC (rev 49734)
@@ -0,0 +1,3765 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment balanced on line 108
+% ltxfront.dtx: package to change page grid, MVL.
+% Copyright (c) 2009 Arthur Ogawa
+%
+% Disclaimer
+% This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+% without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+% License
+% You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+% (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+% ReadMe
+% For the documentation and more detailed instructions for
+% installation, typeset this document with \LaTeX.
+% Maintenance Status
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained";
+% Current Maintainer of this work is Arthur Ogawa.
+%
+% This work consists of the main source file ltxfront.dtx
+% and the derived files
+% ltxfront.sty, ltxfront.pdf
+% Distribution:
+% CTAN:macros/latex/contrib/revtex/
+%
+% Unpacking:
+% tex ltxfront.dtx
+%
+% Documentation:
+% latex ltxfront.dtx; ...
+%
+% Programm calls to get the documentation (example):
+% pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront.idx
+% makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo
+% pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+% makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront.idx
+% pdflatex ltxfront.dtx
+%
+% Installation:
+% TDS:doc/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:source/latex/revtex/
+% TDS:tex/latex/revtex/
+%
+% Thanks, Heiko!
+% This method of letting a single .dtx file serve as both
+% documentation (via latex) and installer (via tex) follows
+% the example of Heiko Oberdiek. Thanks!
+%<*ignore>
+\begingroup
+ \def\x{LaTeX2e}%
+\expandafter\endgroup
+\ifcase
+ 0\expandafter\ifx\csname processbatchFile\endcsname\relax\else1\fi\ifx\fmtname\x\else 1\fi
+ \relax
+\else
+ \csname fi\endcsname
+%</ignore>
+%<*install>
+%% This file will generate documentation and runtime files
+%% from ltxfront.dtx when run through LaTeX or TeX.
+\input docstrip
+\preamble
+
+This is a generated file;
+altering it directly is inadvisable;
+instead, modify the original source file.
+See the URL in the file 00readme.tex.
+
+License
+ You may distribute this file under the conditions of the
+ LaTeX Project Public License 1.3 or later
+ (http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt).
+
+ This file is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
+ without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY
+ or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+\endpreamble
+\askforoverwritefalse
+\keepsilent
+ \generate{%
+ %{ignore}
+% \usedir{tex/latex/revtex}%
+ \file{ltxfront.sty}{%
+ \from{ltxfront.dtx}{package,options,kernel}%
+ }%
+ }%
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To finish the installation, please move}
+\Msg{* ltxfront.sty}
+\Msg{* into a directory searched by TeX;}
+\Msg{* in a TDS-compliant installation:}
+\Msg{* texmf/tex/macros/latex/revtex/.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To produce the documentation,
+ run ltxfront.dtx through LaTeX.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
+\Msg{***********************************************************}
+}
+\endbatchfile
+%</install>
+%<*ignore>
+\fi
+%</ignore>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{ltxfront.dtx}\CheckSum{2094}
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+%<*package>
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%% filename = "ltxfront.dtx",
+%%% version = "4.1r",
+%%% date = "2010/07/25",
+%%% time = "20:33:00 UT-8",
+%%% checksum = "2012",
+%%% author = "Arthur Ogawa (mailto:arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net),
+%%% commissioned by the American Physical Society.
+%%% ",
+%%% copyright = "Copyright (C) 1999, 2009 Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% distributed under the terms of the
+%%% LaTeX Project Public License, see
+%%% ftp://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt
+%%% ",
+%%% address = "Arthur Ogawa,
+%%% USA",
+%%% telephone = "",
+%%% FAX = "",
+%%% email = "mailto colon arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net",
+%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%% keywords = "latex, page grid, main vertical list",
+%%% supported = "yes",
+%%% abstract = "package to change page grid, MVL",
+%%% docstring = "The checksum field above generated by ltxdoc",
+%%% }
+%</package>
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse ltxdoc klootch
+% The following references the \file{00readme} file,
+% which contains basic information about this package.
+% The contents of this file are generated when
+% you typeset the programmer's documentation.
+% Search on "{filecontents*}{00readme.tex}" to locate it.
+% \fi\input{00readme}%
+%
+% \subsection{Bill of Materials}
+%
+% Following is a list of the files in this distribution arranged
+% according to provenance.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Primary Source}%
+% One single file generates all.
+%\begin{verbatim}ltxfront.dtx\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{latex ltxfront.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the source file under \LaTeX\
+% generates the readme and the documentation.
+%\begin{verbatim}00readme\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Generated by \texttt{tex ltxfront.dtx}}%
+% Typesetting the installer generates
+% the package files.
+%\begin{verbatim}ltxfront.sty\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Documentation}%
+% The following are the online documentation:
+% \begin{verbatim}ltxfront.pdf\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Auxiliary}%
+% The following are auxiliary files generated
+% in the course of running \LaTeX:
+% \begin{verbatim}ltxfront.aux ltxfront.idx ltxfront.ind ltxfront.log ltxfront.toc\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \section{Code common to all modules}%
+%
+% We want to require only one place in this file
+% where the version number is stated,
+% and we also want to ensure that the version
+% number is embedded into every generated file.
+%
+% Now we declare that
+% these files can only be used with \LaTeXe.
+% An appropriate message is displayed if
+% a different \TeX{} format is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%</doc|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As desired, the following modules all
+% take common version information:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>\typeout{%
+%<*package|doc>
+\ProvidesFile{%
+%</package|doc>
+%<*kernel|package|doc>
+ltxfront%
+%</kernel|package|doc>
+%<*doc>
+.dtx%
+%</doc>
+%<package>.sty%
+%<*package|doc>
+}%
+%</package|doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The following line contains, for once and for all,
+% the version and date information.
+% By various means, this information is reproduced
+% consistently in all generated files and in the
+% typeset documentation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc|package|kernel>
+%<version>
+ [2010/07/25/20:33:00 4.1r frontmatter package (AO,DPC)]% \fileversion
+%</doc|package|kernel>
+%<kernel&!package&!doc>}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{The doc module \texttt{doc}}
+%
+% This module, consisting of the present section,
+% typesets the programmer's documentation,
+% generating the \file{00readme} and sample document as needed.
+%
+% Because the only uncommented-out lines of code at the beginning of
+% this file constitute the \file{doc} module itself,
+% we can simply typeset the \file{.dtx} file directly,
+% and there is thus rarely any need to
+% generate the ``doc'' {\sc docstrip} module.
+% Module delimiters are nonetheless required so that
+% this code does not find its way into the other modules.
+%
+% The \enve{document} command concludes the typesetting run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Preamble}
+% The programmers documentation is formatted
+% with the \classname{ltxdoc} class with local customizations,
+% and with the usual code line indexing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\RequirePackage{ltxdocext}%
+\let\url\undefined
+\RequirePackage[colorlinks=true,linkcolor=blue]{hyperref}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname package at font\endcsname\@undefined\else
+ \expandafter\RequirePackage\expandafter{\csname package at font\endcsname}%
+\fi
+\CodelineIndex\EnableCrossrefs % makeindex -s gind.ist ltxfront
+\RecordChanges % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Docstrip and info directives}
+% We use so many {\sc docstrip} modules that we set the
+% \texttt{StandardModuleDepth} counter to 1.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following command retrieves the date and version information
+% from this file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\GetFileInfo\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The ``Read Me'' File}
+% As promised above, here is the contents of the
+% ``Read Me'' file. That file serves a double purpose,
+% since it also constitutes the beginining of the
+% programmer's documentation. What better thing, after
+% all, to have appear at the beginning of the
+% typeset documentation?
+%
+% A good discussion of how to write a ReadMe file can be found in
+% Engst, Tonya, ``Writing a ReadMe File? Read This''
+% \emph{MacTech} October 1998, p. 58.
+%
+% Note the appearance of the
+% \cmd\StopEventually\ command, which marks the
+% dividing line between the user documentation
+% and the programmer documentation.
+%
+% The usual user will not be asked to
+% do a full build, not to speak
+% of the bootstrap.
+% Instructions for carrying these processes
+% begin the programmer's manual.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{00readme.tex}
+\title{%
+ A \LaTeX\ Package for\\the frontmatter and title page%
+ \thanks{%
+ This file has version number \fileversion,
+ last revised \filedate.%
+ }%
+ \thanks{%
+ Version \fileversion\ \copyright\ 2009 The American Physical Society
+ }%
+}%
+
+\author{%
+ Arthur Ogawa%
+ \thanks{\texttt{mailto:arthur\_ogawa at sbcglobal.net}}%
+}%
+%\iffalse
+% For version number and date,
+% search on "\fileversion" in the .dtx file,
+% or see the end of the 00readme file.
+%\fi
+\maketitle
+
+This file embodies the \classname{ltxfront} package,
+the implementation and its user documentation.
+
+The distribution point for this work is
+\url{http://publish.aps.org/revtex},
+which contains fully unpacked, prebuilt runtime files and documentation.
+
+The \classname{ltxfront} package was commissioned by the American Physical Society
+and is distributed under the terms of the \LaTeX\ Project Public License,
+the same license under which all the portions of \LaTeX\ itself is distributed.
+Please see \url{http://ctan.tug.org/macros/latex/base/lppl.txt} for details.
+
+To use this document class, you must have a working
+\TeX\ installation equipped with \LaTeXe\
+and possibly pdftex and Adobe Acrobat Reader or equivalent.
+
+To install, retrieve the distribution,
+unpack it into a directory on the target computer,
+and move the file \file{ltxfront.sty}
+into a location in your filesystem where it will be found by \LaTeX.
+
+To use, read the user documentation \file{ltxfront.pdf}.
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{Processing Instructions}
+
+The package file \file{ltxfront.sty}
+is generated from this file, \file{ltxfront.dtx},
+using the {\sc docstrip} facility of \LaTeX
+via |tex ltxfront.dtx|.
+The typeset documentation that you are now reading is generated from
+the same file by typesetting it with \LaTeX\ or pdftex
+via |latex ltxfront.dtx| or |pdflatex ltxfront.dtx|.
+
+\subsection{Build Instructions}
+
+You may bootstrap this suite of files solely from \file{ltxfront.dtx}.
+Prepare by installing \LaTeXe\ (and either tex or pdftex) on your computer,
+then carry out the following steps:
+\begin{enumerate}
+
+\item
+Within an otherwise empty directory,
+typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \TeX\ or pdftex,
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxfront.sty}.
+
+\item
+Next typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \LaTeX\ or pdflatex;
+you will obtain the typeset documentation you are now reading,
+along with
+the sample document \file{ltxfront-test.tex}
+and the file \file{00readme}.
+
+Note: you will have to run \LaTeX, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gind.ist ltxfront.idx}, then
+\file{makeindex} \texttt{-s gglo.ist -o ltxfront.gls ltxfront.glo}, then
+\LaTeX\ again in order to obtain a valid index and table of contents.
+\item
+Now typeset \file{ltxfront.dtx} with \TeX (not \LaTeX),
+thereby generating the package file \file{ltxfront.sty}.
+\item
+Install the following files into indicated locations within your
+TDS-compliant \texttt{texmf} tree (you may need root access):
+\begin{itemize}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{tex/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.sty}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{source/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.dtx}
+\item
+\file{$TEXMF/}\file{doc/}\file{latex/}\file{revtex/}\classname{ltxfront.pdf}
+\end{itemize}
+where \file{$TEXMF/} stands for \file{texmf-local/}, or some other \texttt{texmf} tree
+in your installation.
+\item
+Run \texttt{mktexlsr} on \file{$TEXMF/} (you may need root access).
+\item
+Build and installation are now complete;
+now put a \cmd\usepackage\texttt{\{ltxfront\}} in your document preamble!
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\subsection{Change Log}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Change handling of \cs{@author} to prevent parsing problems. (Helps in error recovery when syntax errors exist)}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Gathered all code for the abstract environment together and abstracted out the formatting details for journals to override.}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Separate option now controls production}
+\changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Set \cs{footnote} to \LaTeX\ standard version for this scope.}
+\changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{\cs{comma at space}}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{change name from \cs{tempaffiliation}}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{If empty \cs{abstractname} omit spacing}
+\changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{PACS boxed to width of abstract}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Keywords on same footing as PACS}
+\changes{4.0e}{2000/09/20}{Warn if no production}
+\changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Actually append \cs{AU at grp} to \cs{@AAClist}.}
+\changes{4.0g}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+\changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+\changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{new hook}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{add optional argument handling back}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{Changes to add collaboration processing, which now means doing comma/and processing on each sublist}
+\changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{macro added}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-06-30}{(AO, 443) create an entry in the PDF bookmarks for the abstract via the toc}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{email}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{homepage}.}
+\changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) provide a \texttt{description} environment for the abstract}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Change csname \cs{AFS at opr} to \cs{AFG at opr}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter at init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 443) PDF Bookmark for title page}%
+\changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Provide facility \cs{affil at cutoff}: if there is only one affiliation on the title page, no superscript}%
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Hyperref compatibility: take \cs{maketitle} back.}
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Parametrize the production after the address}%
+\changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Produce PACS, keywords only if specified}%
+\changes{4.1d}{2008/10/17}{(AO, 410) compare \cs{@tempa} to \cs{blankaffiliation}.}%
+\changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Use \cs{set at footnotefont}, which is defined in ltxutil}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 535) Robustify \cs{footnote} while \cs{class at warn} is expanding its argument}
+\changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 539) Robustify \cs{class at warn} against TOC processing}%
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF at grp}}
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Optimize boolean logic }
+\changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 544) Class options runinaddress and unsortedaddress stopped working}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+\changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) Let \cs{@collaboration at gobble} parse all three arguments of \cs{CO at opr}}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+\changes{4.1n}{2009/12/03}{(AO) remove http:// from \cs{href} call}
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) Interface \cs{set at footnotewidth} for determining the set width of footnotes}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+\changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{A Gnuly Created Sample Document}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{filecontents*}{ltxfront-test.tex}
+\documentclass{article}% use any combination of titlepage, twocolumn
+\usepackage[]{ltxfront}% use inactive to turn off features
+\begin{document}
+
+\title{Gnu Veldt Cuisine}
+
+\author{G. Picking}
+\thanks{Supported by a grant from the GSF.}
+\affiliation{Acme Kitchen Products}
+
+\author{R. Dillo}
+\thanks{On leave during 1985.}
+\affiliation{Cordon Puce School}
+
+\date{24 July 1984}%
+\revised{5 January 1985}%
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}%
+We reproduce most features of \LaTeX\ manual, Figure C.4, p. 183.
+\end{document}
+\end{filecontents*}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The Document Body}
+%
+% Here is the document body, containing only a
+% \cmd\DocInput\ directive---referring to this very file.
+% This very cute self-reference is a common \classname{ltxdoc} idiom.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}%
+\expandafter\DocInput\expandafter{\jobname.dtx}%
+% ^^A\PrintChanges
+\end{document}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</doc>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Using this package}
+% Once this package is installed on your filesystem, you can employ it in
+% adding functionality to \LaTeX\ by invoking it in your document or document class.
+%
+% \subsection{Invoking the package}
+% In your document, you can simply call it up in your preamble:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{book}%
+%\usepackage{ltxfront}%
+%\begin{document}
+%<your document here>
+%\end{document}\end{verbatim}
+% However, the preferred way is to invoke this package from within your
+% customized document class:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]%
+%\ProvidesClass{myclass}%
+%\RequirePackage{ltxfront}%
+%\LoadClass{book}%
+%<class customization commands>
+%\endinput\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Once loaded, the package gives you acccess to certain procedures,
+% usually to be invoked by a \LaTeX\ command or environment.
+%
+% \section{Frontmatter commands}
+%
+% A document using this package will use commands like \cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\thanks,
+% the \texttt{abstract} environment
+% and \cmd\maketitle.
+% These are part of \LaTeX's standard document classes.
+% But this package supplements \LaTeX\ syntax with additional commands, such as
+% \cmd\affiliation, \cmd\collaboration, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, and others.
+%
+% Furthermore, you can have multiple \cmd\author, \cmd\affiliation, and \cmd\collaboration\ commands,
+% each with their own set of \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, etc. commands.
+%
+% \section{The Front Matter}\label{sec:front}
+%
+% This section describes the macros
+% this package provides for formatting the front matter of an
+% article. The behavior and usage of these macros can be quite
+% different from those provided in \LaTeXe.
+%
+% \subsection{Setting the title}
+%
+% The title of the manuscript is simply specified by using the
+% \cmd\title\arg{title} macro. A \verb+\\+ may be used to put a line
+% break in a long title.
+% The \cmd\title\ commnd takes an optional argument, which you will use to
+% give an abbreviated title for use in the running header.
+%
+% \subsection{Specifying a date}%
+%
+% The \cmd\date\marg{date} command outputs the date on the manuscript.
+% Using \cmd\today\ will cause \LaTeX{} to insert the
+% current date whenever the file is run:
+% \begin{verbatim}\date{\today}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{Specifying authors and affiliations}
+%
+% Commands specifying author and affilliation have been improved to save
+% labor for authors and in production. Authors and affiliations are
+% arranged into groupings called, appropriately enough, \emph{author
+% groups}. Each author group is a set of authors who share the same set
+% of affiliations. Author names are specified with the \cmd\author\
+% macro while affiliations (or addresses) are specified with the
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro. Author groups are specified by sequences of
+% \cmd\author\ macros followed by \cmd\affiliation\ macros. An
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro applies to all previously specified
+% \cmd\author\ macros which don't already have an affiliation supplied.
+%
+% For example, if Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit are both at Looney Tune
+% Studios, while Mickey Mouse is at Disney World, the markup would be:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}\end{verbatim}
+% The default is to display this as
+% \begin{center}
+% Bugs Bunny and Roger Rabbit\\
+% \emph{Looney Tune Studios}\\
+% Mickey Mouse\\
+% \emph{Disney World}\\
+% \end{center}
+% This layout style for displaying authors and their affiliations is
+% chosen by selecting the class option
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}. This option is the default for all APS
+% journal styles, so it does not need to be specified explicitly.
+% The other major way of displaying this
+% information is to use superscripts on the authors and
+% affiliations. This can be accomplished by selecting the class option
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress}. To achieve the display
+% \begin{center}
+% Bugs Bunny,$^{1}$ Roger Rabbit,$^{1,2}$ and Mickey Mouse$^{2}$\\
+% \emph{$^{1}$Looney Tune Studios}\\
+% \emph{$^{2}$Disney World}\\
+% \end{center}
+% one would use the markup
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% Note that this package takes care of any commas and \emph{and}'s that join
+% the author names together and font selection, as well as any
+% superscript numbering. Only the author names and affiliations should
+% be given within their respective macros.
+%
+% There is a third class option, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, for
+% controlling author/affiliation display. The default
+% \classoption{groupedaddress} will actually sort authors into the
+% approriate author groups if one chooses to specify an affiliation for
+% each author. The markup:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}
+% \author{Mickey Mouse}
+% \affiliation{Disney World}
+% \author{Roger Rabbit}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tune Studios}\end{verbatim}
+% will result in the same display as for the first case given
+% above even though Roger Rabbit is specified after Mickey Mouse. To
+% avoid Roger Rabbit being moved into the same author group as Bugs
+% Bunny, use the
+% \classoption{unsortedaddress} option instead. In general, it is safest
+% to list authors in the order they should appear and specify
+% affiliations for multiple authors rather than one at a time. This will
+% afford the most independence for choosing the display option. Finally,
+% it should be mentioned that the affiliations for the
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress} are presented and numbered
+% in the order that they are encountered. This means that the order
+% will usually follow the order of the authors. An alternative ordering
+% can be forced by including a list of \cmd\affiliation\ commands before
+% the first \cmd{\author} in the desired order. Then use the exact same
+% text for each affilation when specifying them for each author.
+%
+% If an author doesn't have an affiliation, the \cmd\noaffiliation\
+% macro may be used in the place of an \cmd\affiliation\ macro.
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Collaborations}
+%
+% A collaboration name can be specified with the \cmd\collaboration\
+% command. This is very similar to the \cmd\author\ command.
+% It should appear at the end of an author group.
+% The collaboration name will appear centered in parentheses.
+% You may have multiple author groups, each with its own \cmd\collaboration.
+% Because collaborations don't normally have affiliations, one needs to follow the
+% \cmd\collaboration\ with \cmd\noaffiliation.
+%
+% \subsubsection{Footnotes for authors, collaborations, affiliations or title}\label{sec:footau}
+%
+% Often one wants to specify additional information associated with an
+% author, collaboration, or affiliation such an e-mail address, an
+% alternate affiliation, or some other ancillary information.
+% This package introduces several new macros just for this purpose. They
+% are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item\cmd\email\oarg{optional text}\arg{e-mail address}
+% \item\cmd\homepage\oarg{optional text}\arg{URL}
+% \item\cmd\altaffiliation\oarg{optional text}\arg{affiliation}
+% \item\cmd\thanks\arg{miscellaneous text}
+% \end{itemize}
+% In the first three, the \emph{optional text} will be prepended before the
+% actual information specified in the required argument. \cmd\email\ and
+% \cmd\homepage\ each have a default text for their optional arguments
+% (`Electronic address:' and `URL:' respectively). The \cmd\thanks\
+% macro should only be used if one of the other three do not apply. Any
+% author name can have multiple instances of these four commands.
+% Note that unlike the
+% \cmd\affiliation\ macro, these macros only apply to the \cmd\author\
+% that directly precedes it. Any \cmd\affiliation\ \emph{must} follow
+% the other author-specific macros. A typical usage might be as follows:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Bugs Bunny}
+% \email[E-mail me at: ]{bugs at looney.com}
+% \homepage[Visit: ]{http://looney.com/}
+% \altaffiliation[Permanent address: ]
+% {Warner Brothers}
+% \affiliation{Looney Tunes}\end{verbatim}
+% This would result in the footnote ``E-mail me at: \texttt{bugs at looney.com},
+% Visit: \texttt{http://looney.com/}, Permanent address: Warner
+% Brothers'' being attached to Bugs Bunny. Note that:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Only an e-mail address, URL, or affiliation should go in the
+% required argument in the curly braces.
+% \item The font is automatically taken care of.
+% \item An explicit space is needed at the end of the optional text if one is
+% desired in the output.
+% \item Use the optional arguments to provide customized
+% text only if there is a good reason to.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% The \cmd\collaboration\ , \cmd\affiliation, or even \cmd\title\ can
+% also have footnotes attached via these commands. If any ancillary data
+% (\cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, or
+% \cmd\altaffiliation) are given in the wrong context (e.g., before any
+% \cmd\title, \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation\
+% command has been given), then a warning is given in the \TeX\ log, and
+% the command is ignored.
+%
+% Duplicate sets of ancillary data are merged, giving rise to a single
+% shared footnote. However, this only applies if the ancillary data are
+% identical: even the order of the commands specifying the data must be
+% identical. Thus, for example, two authors can share a single footnote
+% indicating a group e-mail address.
+%
+% Duplicate \cmd\affiliation\ commands may be given in the course of the
+% front matter, without the danger of producing extraneous affiliations
+% on the title page. However, ancillary data should be specified for
+% only the first instance of any particular institution's
+% \cmd\affiliation\ command; a later instance with different ancillary
+% data will result in a warning in the \TeX\ log.
+%
+% It is preferable to arrange authors into
+% sets. Within each set all the authors share the same group of
+% affiliations. For each author, give the \cmd\author\ (and appropriate
+% ancillary data), then follow this author group with the needed group
+% of \cmd\affiliation\ commands.
+%
+% If affiliations have been listed before the first
+% \cmd\author\ macro to ensure a particular ordering, be sure
+% that any later \cmd\affiliation\ command for the given institution is
+% an exact copy of the first, and also ensure that no ancillary data is
+% given in these later instances.
+%
+%
+% A journal may determine the placement of these
+% ancillary information footnotes. One journal may put all
+% such footnotes at the start of the bibliography while another
+% journal may display them on the first page, as a footnote. One can override a
+% journal style's default behavior by specifying explicitly the class
+% option
+% \classoption{bibnotes} (puts the footnotes at the start of the
+% bibliography) or \classoption{nobibnotes} (puts them on the first page).
+%
+% \subsubsection{Specifying first names and surnames}
+%
+% Many authors have names in which either the surname appears first
+% or in which the surname is made up of more than one name. To ensure
+% that such names are accurately captured for indexing and other
+% purposes, the \cmd\surname\ macro should be used to indicate which portion
+% of a name is the surname. Similarly, there is a \cmd\firstname\ macro
+% as well, although usage of \cmd\surname\ should be sufficient. If an
+% author's surname is a single name and written last, it is not
+% necessary to use these macros. These macros do nothing but indicate
+% how a name should be indexed. Here are some examples;
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \author{Andrew \surname{Lloyd Weber}}
+% \author{\surname{Mao} Tse-Tung}\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \subsection{The abstract}
+% An abstract for a paper is specified by using the \env{abstract}
+% environment:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{abstract}
+% Text of abstract
+% \end{abstract}\end{verbatim}
+% Note that with this package, the abstract must be specified before the
+% \cmd\maketitle\ command, and there is no need to embed it in an explicit
+% minipage environment.
+%
+% \subsection{PACS codes}
+% Some authors are asked to supply suggested PACS codes with their
+% submissions. The \cmd\pacs\ macro is provided as a way to do this:
+% \begin{verbatim}\pacs{23.23.+x, 56.65.Dy}\end{verbatim}
+% The actual display of the PACS numbers below the abstract is
+% controlled by two class options: \classoption{showpacs} and
+% \classoption{noshowpacs}. In particular, this is now independent of
+% the \classoption{preprint} option. \classoption{showpacs} must be
+% explicitly included in the class options to display the PACS codes.
+%
+% \subsection{Keywords}
+% A \cmd\keywords\ macro may also be used to indicate keywords for the
+% article.
+% \begin{verbatim}\keywords{nuclear form; yrast level}\end{verbatim}
+% This will be displayed below the abstract and PACS (if supplied). Like
+% PACS codes, the actual display of the the keywords is controlled by
+% two classoptions: \classoption{showkeys} and
+% \classoption{noshowkeys}. An explicit \classoption{showkeys} must be
+% included in the \cmd\documentclass\ line to display the keywords.
+%
+% \subsection{Institutional report numbers}
+% Institutional report numbers can be specified using the \cmd\preprint\
+% macro. These will be displayed in the upper lefthand corner of the
+% first page. Multiple \cmd\preprint\ macros may be supplied (space is
+% limited though, so only three or less may actually fit).
+%
+% \subsection{maketitle}
+% After specifying the title, authors, affiliations, abstract, PACS
+% codes, and report numbers, the final step for formatting the front
+% matter of the manuscript is to issue the \cmd\maketitle\ command:
+% \begin{verbatim}\maketitle\end{verbatim}
+% This command must follow all of the macros listed above.
+% The macro will format the front matter in accordance with the various
+% class options that were specified in the
+% \cmd\documentclass\ line (either implicitly through defaults or
+% explicitly).
+%
+%
+% \section{Compatability with \LaTeX's Required Packages}
+% Certain packages, usually ones written by members of the
+% \LaTeX\ Project itself, have been designated ``required'' and
+% are distributed as part of standard \LaTeX.
+% These packages have been placed in a priviledged position
+% vis \'a vis the \LaTeX\ kernel in that they override the definitions of certain kernel macros.
+%
+% The \classname{ltxfront} package will be incompatible with any package that
+% redefines any of the kernel macros that \classname{ltxfront} patches---if that
+% package is loaded \emph{after} \classname{ltxfront}.
+%
+% Hereinafter follows some notes on specific \LaTeX\ packages.
+%
+%\StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation of package}
+%
+% \subsection{Beginning of the \file{package} {\sc docstrip} module}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\package at name{ltxfront}%
+\expandafter\PackageInfo\expandafter{\package at name}{%
+ Title page macros for \protect\LaTeXe,
+ by A. Ogawa (arthur_ogawa at sbcglobal.net)%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Prerequisites}%
+%
+% This package requires the use of the \classname{ltxutil} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\class at name\package at name
+\RequirePackage{ltxutil}%
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of the preliminary portion of the package code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Options}%
+% Package options are treated in this portion of the dtx file.
+% This portion is guarded by the \texttt{options} \classname{docstrip} code so that it can be
+% merged into a larger package gracefully.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*options>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package option turns on diagnostics that trace its operation.
+% \cmd\frontmatterverbose at sw\ is set false by default: we do not elect to monitor
+% the workings of these procedures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{frontmatterverbose}{\@booleantrue\frontmatterverbose at sw}%
+\@booleanfalse\frontmatterverbose at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Package option inactivates its syntax, for testing purposes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{inactive}{\@booleanfalse\frontmatter at syntax@sw}%
+\@booleantrue\frontmatter at syntax@sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\runinaddress at sw}
+% The flag \cmd\runinaddress at sw\ signifies that author addresses are to be set on the same
+% line with the author.
+%
+% The \classoption{runinaddress} option is the only one that sets \cmd\runinaddress at sw\ to true.
+%
+% FIXME: this option pertains to cases where \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is true, but is independant of \cmd\@affils at sw.
+% So, it should be possible to assert both \classoption{runinaddress} and \classoption{unsortedaddress} as well as
+% each separately.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affils at sw}
+% If \cmd\@affils at sw\ is false, an address is never recognised as ``new''
+% and is therefore always entered into the affiliation list,
+% stopping groups of authors at the same address being consolidated
+% into the same list:
+% the address will be printed the same number of times it is entered.
+%
+% The \classoption{unsortedaddress} option is the only one that sets \cmd\@affils at sw\ to false.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\groupauthors at sw}
+% The flag \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ signifies that authors are to be grouped,
+% affecting the meaning of \cmd\@author at present.
+%
+% Clients will want to set \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ true if they want grouped addresses
+% or either of the following variants:
+% for unsorted addresses: set \cmd\@affils at sw\ false;
+% for run-in addresses, set \cmd\runinaddress at sw\ true.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@booleanfalse\groupauthors at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{groupedaddress}
+% If we take the \classoption{groupedaddress} option as the default, then we can look upon
+% the \classoption{superscriptaddress} option as simply turning \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ to \cmd\false at sw.
+%
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}, the default in APS journals, groups authors above a common address.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{groupedaddress}{\clo at groupedaddress}%
+\def\clo at groupedaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{unsortedaddress}
+% \classoption{unsortedaddress} is similar to \classoption{groupedaddress},
+% but turns off \cmd\@affils at sw,
+% with the result that each address that is entered will be printed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{unsortedaddress}{\clo at unsortedaddress}%
+\def\clo at unsortedaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\@affils at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{runinaddress}
+%
+% \classoption{runinaddress} is similar to \classoption{groupedaddress},
+% with the addition of the Boolean \cmd\runinaddress at sw,
+% which causes the authors associated with a particular address group
+% to be formatted in a paragraph instead of on separate lines.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{runinaddress}{\clo at runinaddress}%
+\def\clo at runinaddress{%
+ \@booleantrue\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+ \@booleantrue\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{superscriptaddress}
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress} presents author affiliations
+% as superscripts. Authors with like affiliations share the same
+% superscript.
+%
+% FIXME: if \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is false, would not \cmd\@affils at sw\ be a don't care?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{superscriptaddress}{\clo at superscriptaddress}%
+\def\clo at superscriptaddress{%
+ \@booleanfalse\groupauthors at sw
+ \@booleantrue\@affils at sw
+ \@booleanfalse\runinaddress at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%</options>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Process package options}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\DeclareOption*{\OptionNotUsed}%
+\ProcessOptions*
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Kernel of Front Matter}
+% Here begins the kernel of the \classname{frontmatter} package.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This package implements a new syntax for the title page of an article.
+%
+% Special acknowledgment: this package uses concepts pioneered
+% and first realized by William Baxter (mailto:web at superscript.com)
+% in his SuperScript line of commercial typesetting tools, and
+% which are used here with his permission.
+%
+% These macros were first coded by David P. Carlisle for the American Physical
+% society in the late 1990s as part of the development of REV\TeX4.
+% That development work was taken over by Arthur Ogawa, who is the author of
+% this package.
+%
+% \subsection{Initialization}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at init}
+% The \cmd\frontmatter at init\ procedure sets up all the registers for
+% processing the title page.
+% At present, this is done once, at \cmd\class at documenthook\ time.
+% If multiple title pages are to be processed within a job,
+% the initialization must be done for each.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class at documenthook{\frontmatter at init}%
+\let\frontmatter at init\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The title command}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\title}
+% \begin{macro}{\do at title}
+% The author uses \cmd\title\ to specify the title. As in the AMS
+% classes, \cmd\title\ has an optional argument specifying a short form
+% for use in running heads.
+%
+% Once the \cmd\title\ is given, you can specify any combination of
+% \cmd\thanks, \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, and \cmd\altaffiliation\ commands,
+% applying to the title of the document.
+%
+% Compatibility note: as with all of the standard \LaTeX\ commands that we override,
+% we make here a private definition and later switch it in if so required.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at title[2][]{%
+ \def\@title{#2}%
+ \def\@shorttitle{#1}%
+ \let\@AF at join\@title at join
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@title}
+% \begin{macro}{\@shorttitle}
+% The arguments to \cmd\title\ are saved in these internal
+% macros, which are set up to produce a warning if \cmd\title\ has not
+% been used before \cmd\maketitle.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter at init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+%
+% Extensibility note: by using \cmd\frontmatter at init\ as the initialization procedure,
+% we open the possibility of more than one title page per document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \def\@title{\class at warn{No title}}%
+ \let\@shorttitle\@empty
+ \let\@title at aux\@title at aux@cleared
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@title at join}
+% \begin{macro}{\@title at join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@title at aux@cleared}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@title at join{\expandafter\@title at join@\@title at aux}%
+\def\@title at join@#1#2{%
+ \def\@title at aux{{\@join{\@separator}{#1}{#2}}}%
+}%
+\def\@title at aux@cleared{{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The author, affiliation, and related commands}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\c at affil}
+% \begin{macro}{\c at collab}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+%
+% \cmd\c at affil\ stores the affiliation numbers used for the superscript marks.
+% The \cmd\newcounter\ command defines \cmd\theaffil, which we never use:
+% this counter is evaluated solely via \cmd\the.
+%
+% \cmd\c at collab\ stores the collaboration numbers.
+% The \cmd\newcounter\ command defines \cmd\thecollab.
+% As with \cmd\c at affil, we never use \cmd\thecollab; only \cmd\the\ \cmd\c at collab.
+%
+% Each counter must be cleared before frontmatter can be processed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{affil}%
+\newcounter{collab}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \c at affil\z@
+ \c at collab\z@
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for author or collaboration}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\author}
+% Each author is given in a \emph{separate} \cmd\author\ command.
+% This is similar to the AMS classes, but the AMS also try to support
+% the \classname{article} class's \cmd\and\ command for putting multiple
+% authors in one \cmd\author\ command.
+% This package, however, does not support the \cmd\and\ command.
+%
+% When the \cmd\author\ command is encountered,
+% the previous author, author group, affiliation, and affiliation group are at an end.
+% This procedure moves the previous author to the author group (\cmd\move at AU),
+% moves the previous affiliation to the affiliation group (\cmd\move at AF),
+% and terminates the previous author/affiliation group (\cmd\move at AUAF) as the case may require.
+%
+% Compatibility note: as with all of the standard \LaTeX\ commands that we override,
+% we make here a private definition and later switch it in if so required.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at author{% implicit #1
+ \@author at def{}% implicit #2
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\collaboration}
+% Specify the collaboration (given after a group of authors).
+%
+% This procedure does exactly what \cmd\author\ does, and sets
+% a flag signifying that the \cmd\collaboration\ command was given.
+%
+% Note: earlier versions attempted to ignore the collaboration command if it was considered inappropriate.
+% We must not do this, however, because it throws the state machine out of kilter.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\collaboration{% implicit #1
+ \@author at def{\@booleantrue\collaboration at sw}% implicit #2
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \@booleanfalse\collaboration at sw
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at cleared}
+% \begin{macro}{\@authorclear at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at def}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at join}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Change handling of \cs{@author} to prevent parsing problems. (Helps in error recovery when syntax errors exist)}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{frontmatter at init} as the vehicle for all initialization}
+%
+% Here are all the access procedures for the author data structure.
+%
+% We define a flag value for \cmd\@author (private),
+% a procedure \cmd\@author at gobble\ to read author data without any effect,
+% a procedure for setting \cmd\@author\ to the flag value (\cmd\@author at init),
+% a Boolean to test against the flag value (\cmd\@authorclear at sw),
+% and a procedure to add new ancillary data to the author.
+%
+% Note that expanding the functionality of the \cmd\collaboration\ command entailed changing
+% the data structures, because now all authors must remember the collaboration they belong to.
+% This change affects procedures \cmd\@author at cleared\ and \cmd\@author at gobble.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at cleared{{}{}{}}%
+\def\@author at gobble#1#2#3{}%
+\def\@author at init{%
+ \let\@author\@author at cleared
+ \@booleanfalse\collaboration at sw
+}%
+\def\@authorclear at sw{\@ifx{\@author\@author at cleared}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \@author at init
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at def#1#2{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\author\space\string\collaboration}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF\move at AUAF
+ \let\@AF at join\@author at join
+ #1%
+ \def\@author{{#2}{}}%
+}%
+\def\@author at join@#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@author{{#1}{\@join{\@separator}{#2}{#3}}}%
+}%
+\def\@author at join{\expandafter\@author at join@\@author}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move at AU}
+% \begin{macro}{\add at AUCO@grp}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% The \cmd\move at AU\ procedure moves the most recent author to the current author group \cmd\AU at grp,
+% or the most recent collaboration to the collaboration group \cmd\CO at grp.
+% If we recently did a \cmd\@author at init, this is a no-op.
+%
+% To accommodate the expanded syntax of \cmd\collaboration, we add a new field to
+% those associated with an author (collaborator), namely the value of the
+% collaboration counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move at AU{%
+ \@authorclear at sw{}{%
+ \collaboration at sw{%
+ \advance\c at collab\@ne
+ \@argswap{\CO at grp\CO at opr}%
+ }{%
+ \@argswap{\AU at grp\AU at opr}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val
+ \expandafter{\@author}%
+ {\expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\the\c at collab}{\add at AUCO@grp}}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@author at init
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% The procedure \cmd\add at AUCO@grp\ adds to the specified group \#3 using the
+% given intercollated operator \#4, with arguments \{\#1\} and \#2,
+% where the first argument is the collaboration number,
+% the second is the author name, and the third the joined attributes of the author.
+% For example, \cmd\move at AU\ could finally execute:
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\AU at grp\ \{\cmd\AU at opr\{1\}\{A. Author\}\{\}\}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add at AUCO@grp#1#2#3#4{%
+ \appdef#3{#4{#1}#2}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say#3}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at finish}
+% We define a procedure to terminate author/affiliation parsing just before the title block is formatted.
+% We detect the case where an author group is not followed by an affiliation group.
+% \changes{4.0f}{2001/02/13}{Actually append \cs{AU at grp} to \cs{@AAClist}.}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1g}{2009/10/05}{(AO, 535) Robustify \cs{footnote} while \cs{class at warn} is expanding its argument}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+%
+% We first finish off any author- or affiliation groups in progress.
+% Next, we detect the case where there is an author group or a collaboration group in progress, but no affiliation group.
+% If so, we emit a diagnositic message and act as if a \cmd\noaffiliation\ command had been given.
+% In any case, we finish off any author/affiliation pair that may remain.
+% Formatting of the title block may now proceed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at finish{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\@author at finish}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF
+ \@ifx{\AU at grp\@empty}{%
+ \@ifx{\CO at grp\@empty}%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ {}{%
+ \@ifx{\AF at grp\@empty}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\href\@secondoftwo
+ \let\AU at opr\@secondofthree
+ \let\CO at opr\@secondofthree
+ \let\footnote\@gobble
+ \@ifx{\CO at grp\@empty}{%
+ \class at warn{Assuming \string\noaffiliation\space for authors}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\AU at grp}%
+ }{%
+ \class at warn{Assuming \string\noaffiliation\space for collaboration}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\CO at grp}{}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+ \@affil at none\move at AF
+ }{}%
+ }%
+ \move at AUAF
+}%
+\def\@secondofthree#1#2#3{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@join}
+% The procedure \cmd\@join\ inserts
+% a separator between two tokens, or, if the first token is
+% nil, elides both that token and the separator.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@join#1#2#3{%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{#3}{#2#1#3}%
+}%
+\def\@separator{;\space}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\surname}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstname}
+% No-op to allow better post-processing of the file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\surname\@firstofone
+\let\firstname\@firstofone
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\and}
+% The original \LaTeX\ idea of using one \cmd\author\ command to capture
+% all authors and their address just doesn't work with multiple authors
+% possibly sharing addresses, so in this class disable \cmd\and.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at and{\class at err{\protect\and\space is not supported}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for affiliation}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affiliation}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% After each group of authors with the same address,
+% give that address in \cmd\affiliation.
+% If later in the list you have an author
+% with the address of an earlier author, repeat the \cmd\affiliation\
+% command: the system will detect the equivalence and (if using the \classoption{superscriptaddress} option)
+% only print the affiliation once, reusing the superscript marker.
+%
+% When the \cmd\affiliation\ command is encountered, the current author and author group (if any) are at an end.
+% Also, the current affiliation is at an end.
+%
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% FIXME: changes to catcode required elsewhere now?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\cat at comma@active{\catcode`\,\active}%
+{\cat at comma@active\gdef,{\active at comma}}%
+\def\active at comma{,\penalty-300\relax}%
+\newcommand\affiliation{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\affiliation}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF
+ \begingroup
+ \cat at comma@active
+ \@affiliation
+}%
+\def\@affiliation#1{%
+ \endgroup
+ \let\@AF at join\@affil at join
+ \@affil at def{#1}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\noaffiliation}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% User-level command \cmd\noaffiliation\ signifies that the current group of authors, or the current collaboration, has \emph{no} affiliation.
+%
+% This is implemented by acting as if the \cmd\affiliation\ command has been given, and using a
+% flag value of \{\cmd\relax\}, which adds an element to the affiliation group of this author,
+% albeit a nil one (\cmd\AFF at opr\ \{\cmd\relax\} \{\}).
+%
+% Note that this procedure does substantially the same as \cmd\@author at finish. (the latter, If it does not bail out altogether, differs chiefly in providing diagnostics).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\frontmatter at noaffiliation{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\noaffiliation}}{}%
+ \move at AU\move at AF
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In \cmd\@author at finish, there is code testing if an effective
+% \cmd\noaffiliation\ should be executed now. Here, we do so in any case.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@affil at none\move at AF
+ \move at AUAF
+}%
+\def\blankaffiliation{{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at cleared}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at nil}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at init}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at none}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilclear at sw}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at def}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at join@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at join}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Use \cs{@affil at def} for all access to \cs{@affil}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+%
+% Here are all the access procedures for the affiliation data structure.
+% Note the similarity to those of the \cmd\@author\ data structure.
+%
+% We define a flag value for \cmd\@affil\ (private),
+% a procedure for setting \cmd\@affil\ to the flag value (\cmd\@affil at init),
+% a Boolean to test against the flag value (\cmd\@affilclear at sw),
+% a procedure \cmd\@affil at def\ to load a value into the structure,
+% and a procedure to add new ancillary data to the affiliation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at cleared{{{}}{}}%
+\def\@affil at nil{{\relax}{}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \@affil at init
+}%
+\def\@affil at none{%
+ \let\@affil\@affil at nil
+}%
+\def\@affil at init{%
+ \let\@affil\@affil at cleared
+}%
+\def\@affilclear at sw{\@ifx{\@affil\@affil at cleared}}%
+\def\@affil at def#1{%
+ \def\@affil{{#1}{}}%
+}%
+\def\@affil at join@#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@affil{{#1}{\@join{\@separator}{#2}{#3}}}%
+}%
+\def\@affil at join{\expandafter\@affil at join@\@affil}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move at AF}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/23}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF at grp}}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% Move the most recent affiliation to the affiliation group.
+% If we recently did a \cmd\@affil at init, this is a no-op.
+%
+% Set the \cmd\temp at sw\ to false, then execute the affiliation list (\cmd\@AFF at list)
+% with the intercollated operator set to \cmd\@affil at match\
+% and with \cmd\@tempa\ holding the first component of \cmd\@affil, the current affiliation, which is to be matched.
+%
+% If the current affiliation has been seen before, then by side effect
+% \cmd\temp at sw\ will be set to true,
+% \cmd\@tempc\ will be set to the matching affiliation number,
+% and \cmd\@tempd\ will be set to the affiliation's ancillary data.
+% The Boolean \cmd\@affils at sw\ being false prevents this test from ever returning a ``true'' result.
+%
+% This procedure uses \cmd\@tempa\ and sets \cmd\@tempc, \cmd\@tempd, and \cmd\temp at sw.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move at AF{%
+ \@affilclear at sw{}{%
+ \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+ \let\@tempd\@empty
+ \@affils at sw{%
+ \expandafter\@affil at addr@def\expandafter\@tempa\@affil
+ \def\AFF at opr{\@affil at match\@tempa}%
+ \@AFF at list
+ }{}\temp at sw
+% \end{macrocode}
+% True clause: This affiliation has been seen before.
+% If ancillary data for the affiliation have been given, but are not identical to those seen before, give a warning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \expandafter\@affil at aux@def\expandafter\@tempb\@affil
+ \@ifx{\@tempb\@empty}{}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tempb\@tempd}{}{%
+ \class at warn{%
+ Ancillary information for \@tempa\space must not be different!
+ Please put all of it on the first instance%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% False clause: This affiliation is a new one:
+% increment the affiliation counter to get a unique affiliation ID
+% and append the new ID, collaboration number, address, and auxiliary information
+% to the list \cmd\@AFF at list.
+%
+% Note that, with the expanded syntax of \cmd\collaboration, we need to label each address with
+% its associated collaboration.
+%
+% Note also that the \cmd\noaffiliation\ case is handled by recognizing the flag value \cmd\@affil at nil.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+ \@ifx{\@affil\@affil at nil}{%
+ \def\@tempc{0}%
+ \@argswap at val{0}%
+ }{%
+ \advance\c at affil\@ne
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempc\expandafter{\the\c at affil}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\the\c at affil}%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\the\c at collab}{%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\@affil}{%
+ \add at list@val at val@val\@AFF at list\AFF at opr
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In either case, append this affiliation number to the \cmd\AF at grp, the affiliation group of the current author group.
+% (It will later be considered for the \cmd\@AFG at list.)
+% Then assign the flag value to \cmd\@affil\ that signifies it has been cleared.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) Rationalize code that appends to \cs{AF at grp}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef at eval\AF at grp\@tempc
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\AF at grp}{}%
+ \@affil at init
+ }%
+}%
+\def\@affil at addr@def#1#2#3{%
+ \def#1{#2}%
+}%
+\def\@affil at aux@def#1#2#3{%
+ \def#1{#3}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Procedure \cmd\add at list@val at val@val\ appends to the given list \#1 using the given intercollated operator \#2,
+% with arguments \#5 (affiliation ID) and \#4 (collaboration ID) delimited by braces, and \#3 bare.
+% In the end, \cmd\move at AF\ may execute something like
+% \cmd\appdef\ \cmd\@AFF at list\ \cmd\AFF at opr\ \{1\} \{3\} \{My Institution\} \{thanks\}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\add at list@val at val@val#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \appdef#1{#2{#5}{#4}#3}%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say#1}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at match}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% The procedure \cmd\@affil at match\ is the definition for \cmd\AFF at opr,
+% the intercollated operator for \cmd\@AFF at list,
+% when adding a new affiliation: it seeks a match with any earlier affiliation.
+% When the affiliation list is executed, this procedure tests each entry against
+% the `new' affiliation (which has been stored in \cmd\@tempa) and its associated
+% collaboration number (in \cmd\@tempb).
+%
+% If \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is true, then we require the collaboration ID to match,
+% otherwise there is no such requirement,
+% as is appropriate for the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option.
+%
+% Uses \cmd\temp at sw, \cmd\@tempc, and \cmd\@tempd\ to communicate back:
+% if it returns \cmd\temp at sw\ true, a match was found.
+% Then
+% \cmd\@tempc\ will be the affiliation ID of the matching entry
+% and \cmd\@tempd\ will be the auxiliary information of the matching entry.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at match#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#4}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \groupauthors at sw{%
+ \@ifnum{#3=\c at collab}{%
+ \true at sw
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+ {%
+ \@booleantrue\temp at sw
+ \def\@tempc{#2}%
+ \def\@tempd{#5}%
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\move at AUAF}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{(AO, 486) \cs{collaboration} to work with \texttt{groupedaddress}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Change csname \cs{AFS at opr} to \cs{AFG at opr}}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Append \cmd\AF at grp, \cmd\AU at grp, and \cmd\CO at grp\ to \cmd\@AAC at list,
+% append \cmd\CO at grp\ to \cmd\@AFG at list,
+% and merge any new \cmd\AF at grp\ to \cmd\@AFG at list.
+%
+% The entire procedure is predicated on something non-trivial to move.
+%
+% If both author group \cmd\AU at grp\ and affiliation group \cmd\AF at grp\ are nil, bail out.
+%
+% No, try that again:
+%
+% If we have seen any affiliations (\cmd\AF at grp\ is not nil),
+% then it is time to move the current affiliation group and author group to \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% If not, we are picking up authors into an author group, and we should bail out.
+%
+% To extend this scheme to the new \cmd\collaboration\ abilities, we must append an affiliation \cmd\AF at opr\ to \cmd\@AAC at list\
+% also in the case where there was no affiliation specified (e.g., \cmd\noaffiliation). This affiliation will be a nil affiliation:
+% \cmd\AF at opr\verb+{{0}}+.
+%
+%FIXME: only one of \cmd\CO at grp\ or \cmd\AU at grp\ is non-empty at this point,
+% but this code does not appear to recognize this fact!
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\move at AUAF{%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\AU at grp\say\AF at grp\say\CO at grp}{}%
+ \@ifx{\AF at grp\@empty}{%
+ \@ifx{\@empty\CO at grp}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Both \cmd\AF at grp\ and \cmd\CO at grp\ are empty: nothing to do. But what if \cmd\AU at grp\ is not empty?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Append the nil \cmd\AF at opr\ to \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef \@AAC at list{\AF at opr{{0}}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Append the collaboration group to the \cmd\@AAC at list; no intercollated operator need be added,
+% because we already have \cmd\CO at opr.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef at e \@AAC at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \appdef at e \@AFG at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ }%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Append current affiliation group (expansion of \cmd\AF at grp)
+% to the author/affiliation list (\cmd\@AAC at list),
+% using \cmd\AF at opr\ as the intercollated operator;
+% also append the current authors (\cmd\AU at grp).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \appdef \@AAC at list{\AF at opr}%
+ \appdef at eval\@AAC at list{\AF at grp}%
+ \appdef at e \@AAC at list{\AU at grp}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Determine if either \cmd\AU at grp\ or \cmd\CO at grp\ is non-empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifx{\@empty\AU at grp}{%
+ \@ifx{\@empty\CO at grp}%
+ }{%
+ \false at sw
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, there is a Boolean in \TeX's scanner;
+% it will parse the following two brace-delimited sequences and select one of them.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This branch is executed if and only if both \cmd\AU at grp\ and \cmd\CO at grp\ are empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% There was either a \cmd\author\ or a \cmd\collaboration\ command.
+% Append the current affiliation group to \cmd\@AFG at list,
+% (only if it is not already there)
+% using \cmd\AFG at opr\ as the intercollated operator.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\@AFG at list\ is a list of \emph{unique} affiliation \emph{groups},
+% and building it entails an \(N^2\) computation.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+ \def\AFG at opr{\x at match\AF at grp}%
+ \let\CO at opr\@author at gobble
+ \@AFG at list
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \appdef \@AFG at list{\AFG at opr}%
+ \appdef at eval\@AFG at list{\AF at grp}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the collaboration \cmd\CO at grp\ is not empty, we append it to the \cmd\@AFG at list\ and to the \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) \cs{collaboration} to work with both \texttt{groupedaddress} and \texttt{superscriptaddress}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifx{\@empty\CO at grp}{}{%
+ \appdef at e \@AAC at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \appdef at e \@AFG at list{\CO at grp}%
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ }%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, null out the macros holding the author group \cmd\AU at grp, affiliation group \cmd\AF at grp, and collaboration group \cmd\CO at grp.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ \let\AU at grp\@empty
+ \let\AF at grp\@empty
+ }%
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\say\@AAC at list\say\@AFG at list}{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AU at grp}
+% \begin{macro}{\AF at grp}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AAC at list}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AFG at list}
+% \begin{macro}{\@AFF at list}
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AU at grp\ accumulates
+% consecutive \cmd\author\ entries (with \cmd\AU at opr\ as the intercollated operator)
+% and \cmd\collaboration\ entries (with \cmd\CO at opr\ as the intercollated operator).
+% Ultimately, its contents are appended to the author/affiliation list \cmd\@AAC at list\
+% and to the list of affiliation groups, \cmd\@AFG at list.
+% It must be initialized to \cmd\@empty.
+%
+% Note on \cmd\AU at opr\ and \cmd\CO at opr: it is essential to treat these two operators to the greatest extent possible on an equal footing.
+% Therefore we invariably assign values to the pair of them within the same procedure.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\AF at grp\ accumulates affiliation IDs into an affiliation group.
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% The \cmd\@AAC at list\ macro accumulates
+% authors (using \cmd\AU at opr\ as the intercollated operator),
+% collaborations (using \cmd\CO at opr\ as the intercollated operator),
+% and
+% affiliations (using \cmd\AF at opr\ as the intercollated operator).
+%
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@AFG at list\ accumulates
+% affiliation groups, with \cmd\AFG at opr\ as the intercollated operator,
+% and collaborations, with no intercollated operator.
+% This token list is employed when and only when \classoption{groupedaddress} is in effect.
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@AFF at list\ accumulates the list of affiliations
+% with \cmd\AFF at opr\ as the intercollated operator.
+% It must be empty at the beginning of the frontmatter.
+%
+% Each \cmd\affiliation\ command in the document contributes
+% to this list, as long as the argument of that instance of the command
+% is ``new''.
+%
+% Each entry in this list consists of the \cmd\AFF at opr\ intercollated operator
+% followed by three brace-delimited tokens, representing, in order:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item
+% the affiliation's unique ID, a number increasing monotonically for
+% each new entry,
+% \item
+% the optional argument of the \cmd\affiliation\ command,
+% the footnote to the affiliation, and
+% \item
+% the text of the affiliation.
+% \end{enumerate}
+%
+% At various junctures in the code, the control sequence name
+% \cmd\AFF at opr\ assumes the meaning of
+% \cmd\@affil at group, \cmd\affil at script,
+% or is defined to expand to \cmd\@affil at match\cmd\@tempa,
+% and the list \cmd\@AFF at list\ is expanded.
+%
+% For each of these lists, here is the syntax of an element and the usage of the associated operator:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\@AFF at list \AFF at opr{<affiliation ID>}{<collaboration ID>}{<address>}{<auxiliary info>} \frontmatter at author@produce at script \affils at present@group
+%\@AFG at list \AFG at opr{{<affiliation ID>}..{<affiliation ID>}} \frontmatter at author@produce at group
+%\@AAC at list \AF at opr{{<affiliation ID>}..{<affiliation ID>}} (\AU at opr|\CO at opr){<collaboration ID>}{<author>}{<auxilliary info>} \frontmatter at author@produce at script \frontmatter at author@produce at group \affils at present@group
+%
+%\AFF at opr \@affil at match\@tempa \@affil at script \@affil at group
+%\AFG at opr \affils at present@group \x at match\AF at grp
+%\AF at opr \@gobble \@affilID at def \@affilID at count\AF at temp\@tempcnta \@affilID at match\AF at temp
+%\AU at opr \@secondofthree \@author at count\@tempcnta \@author at present \@author at gobble \@author at count#2 \@author at present
+%\CO at opr \@secondofthree \@collaboration at count\AU at temp\@tempcnta \@collaboration at present\AU at temp \@collaboration at present\AU at temp \@collaboration at gobble
+%
+%\CO at opr\@author at cleared
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\AU at grp\@empty
+ \let\CO at grp\@empty
+ \let\AF at grp\@empty
+ \let\@AAC at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFG at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFF at list\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@AF at join}
+% The \cmd\csname\ \cmd\@AF at join\ is a procedure used within
+% \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\thanks, and \cmd\altaffiliation.
+% When such a command appears after an \cmd\author, \cmd\collaboration, or \cmd\affiliation
+% command, the \cmd\@AF at join\ procedure appends the argument given to the appropriate
+% macro.
+% Its default is to give an error message, since these commands are legal only within
+% the particular context mentioned.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@AF at join\@AF at join@error
+}%
+\def\@AF at join@error#1{%
+ \class at warn{%
+ \string\email, \string\homepage, \string\thanks, or \string\altaffiliation\space
+ appears in wrong context.
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Commands for auxiliary information}%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\email}
+% Just tacks the email address on to the current author or affiliation.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{email}.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sanitize at url{%
+ \@makeother\%%
+ \@makeother\~%
+ \@makeother\_%
+}%
+\newcommand*\email[1][]{\begingroup\sanitize at url\@email{#1}}%
+\def\@email#1#2{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@AF at join{#1\href{mailto:#2}{#2}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\homepage}
+% Just tacks the URL on to the current author or affiliation.
+% Note: group opened in \cmd\homepage\ is closed in \cmd\@homepage.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-07-01}{(AO, 496) remove default prependation to \cs{homepage}.}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/12/03}{(AO) remove http:// from \cs{href} call}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\homepage[1][]{\begingroup\sanitize at url\@homepage{#1}}%
+\def\@homepage#1#2{%
+ \endgroup
+ \@AF at join{#1\href{#2}{#2}}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\href}
+% The document may load a package that defines either of these commands;
+% if not, we give a default meaning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \providecommand\href[1]{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\thanks}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+%
+% The operative version of \cmd\thanks\ appends an item to \cmd\@author, or \cmd\@affil's auxiliary data.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at thanks{% implicit #1
+ \@AF at join
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\altaffiliation}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{change name from \cs{tempaffiliation}}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{add optional argument handling back}
+% Implemented more or less like \cmd\thanks\ but shares the affiliation
+% counter.
+% Optional argument may be used to give explanatory text eg
+% `currently staying at'
+% This will be placed before the address, if used in a footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\altaffiliation[2][]{%
+ \@AF at join{#1#2}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Procedures for author, collaboration, and affiliation}%
+%
+% Macros that list off, say, authors, and which require punctuation, like ``A, B, and C'', will use
+% \cmd\set at listcomma@list, \cmd\set at listcomma@count, \cmd\@listand, and \cmd\@listcomma.
+% These macros use the \cmd\@tempcnta\ register to keep track of how many items remain to be listed off.
+%
+% At present, \cmd\@author at present\ will decrement that counter.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set at listcomma@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\set at listcomma@count}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{macro added}
+% Pop the author count for this collaboration.
+%
+% Note: by side effect, it assigns \cmd\@listcomma:
+% for a list of length two, suppress comma addition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set at listcomma@list#1{%
+ \expandafter\@reset at ac\expandafter#1#1{0}\@reset at ac{%
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ }{%
+ \let\@listcomma\@listcomma at comma
+ }%
+}%
+\def\set at listcomma@count#1{%
+ \@ifnum{#1=\tw@}{%
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ }{%
+ \let\@listcomma\@listcomma at comma
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Does the actual pop operation, then generates a Boolean which selects one of the two assignments for \cmd\@listcomma.
+%
+% Note: this procedure sets \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the number of items to list off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@reset at ac#1#2#3\@reset at ac{%
+ \def#1{#3}%
+ \@tempcnta#2\relax
+ \@ifnum{#2=\tw@}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\listand}
+% Might need extending with penalties etc.
+%
+% Note: this procedure expects \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the current number of items remaining to list off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listand{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\tw@}{\andname\space}{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@listcomma}
+% This definition, with \cmd\@ne\ puts a comma before and.
+%
+% David Carlisle says: In UK English (at least) would have \cmd\tw@\ here,
+% which would then implement the convention of indicating conjunction with comma or ``and'', but not both.
+%
+% Note: this procedure expects \cmd\@tempcnta\ to reflect the current number of items remaining to list off.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listcomma at comma{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta>\@ne}{,}{}}%
+\def\@listcomma at comma@UK{\@ifnum{\@tempcnta>\tw@}{,}{}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration at gobble}
+% This command will be the synonym of \cmd\CO at grp\ during the expansion of \cmd\@AAC at list,
+% within \cmd\affils at present@group execution (in a \classoption{groupedaddress} situation).
+%
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) Let \cs{@collaboration at gobble} parse all three arguments of \cs{CO at opr}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration at gobble#1#2#3{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doauthor}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{Provide facility \cs{affil at cutoff}: if there is only one affiliation on the title page, no superscript}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+% Main control over how authors are typeset.
+%
+% |#1| is loaded by \cmd\author
+%
+% |#2| is loaded by \cmd\email, \cmd\homepage, \cmd\altaffiliation, or \cmd\thanks
+%
+% |#3| is the superscript affiliation, if at all used.
+%
+% First, the author name is formatted, followed by a comma,
+% then come any marks relating to affiliation (if present),
+% then come the homepage URL and email address, if any, with
+% appropriate punctuation.
+%
+% Here, as in \cmd\@affil at script, the parameter \cmd\affil at cutoff\
+% controls whether the argument \#3 is produced as a superscript label
+% connecting this author with its affiliation. (If there is only one
+% affiliation on the title page, it makes sense to remove the superscript.)
+%
+% Note that argument \#3 must effectively execute either
+% \cmd\aftergroup\cmd\true at sw\ or \cmd\aftergroup\cmd\false at sw\ (exactly once!).
+% In the case of \classoption{superscriptaddress}, this is done when
+% \cmd\@author at present@script\ invokes \cmd\doauthor\ with its third argument containing
+% \cmd\@affil at present@script.
+% Otherwise (e.g., \classoption{groupedaddress}), \cmd\doauthor\ is invoked by
+% \cmd\@author at present@group\ with its third argument containing \cmd\@affil at present@group.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doauthor#1#2#3{%
+ \ignorespaces#1\unskip\@listcomma
+ \begingroup
+ #3%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At this point, we must have queued up a Boolean (either \cmd\true at sw\ or \cmd\false at sw).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@if at empty{#2}{\endgroup{}{}}{\endgroup{\comma at space}{}\frontmatter at footnote{#2}}%
+ \space \@listand
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\x at match}
+% Procedure \cmd\x at match\ is used as an alias \cmd\AFG at opr,
+% probing the list of affiliation groups
+% and setting a Boolean if a match is found to \#1 (usually the current affiliation group).
+%
+% Procedure \cmd\y at match\ is used as an alias to \cmd\@TBN at opr,
+% probing the list of unique title block footnotes for a match to the footnote text:
+% when the first match is found it sets a Boolean,
+% defining \cmd\@tempb\ to the number of that footnote.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\x at match#1#2{%
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#2}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \@booleantrue\temp at sw
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+\def\y at match#1#2#3{%
+ \temp at sw{}{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#3}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \@booleantrue\temp at sw
+ \def\@tempb{#2}%
+ }{%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at footnote}
+% Used when typesetting a title block footnote.
+% (Item 290: merge duplicates.)
+%
+% Maintains a list of frontmatter footnotes along with associated device.
+% Uniquifies each footnote by traversing the list and looking for a match to the footnote text.
+% If found, define \cmd\@tempb\ to the corresponding footnote device, and typeset it with \cmd\@footnotemark.
+% If never found, manually increment footnote counter,
+% determine the corresponding footnote device, and
+% add footnote text and device to the list of frontmatter footnotes.
+%
+% The list \cmd\@FMN at list\ is processed later in the title block production.
+%
+% Note that this method of making footnotes runs afoul of \classname{hyperref}'s patches of the \LaTeX\ kernel.
+% Therefore, we avoid trouble by refraining from using \cmd\@footnotemark\ and by creating our own hypertext links.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at footnote#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+ \def\@tempa{#1}%
+ \let\@tempb\@empty
+ \def\@TBN at opr{\y at match\@tempa}%
+ \@FMN at list
+% \end{macrocode}
+% By side effect, \cmd\@tempb\ holds the value of the footnote counter if
+% This note has been seen before. Otherwise \cmd\temp at sw\ is false.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \temp at sw{%
+ \expandafter\frontmatter at footnotemark
+ \expandafter{\@tempb}%
+ }{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Execute \cmd\frontmatter at foot@mark, feeding it the value of the current footnote counter.
+% This call requires two levels of pre-expansion to accomplish, the first to expand \cmd\csname, the second to evaluate \cmd\the.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \stepcounter\@mpfn
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\frontmatter at foot@mark
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter{%
+ \expandafter \the\csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname
+ }{#1}%
+ }%
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Procedure \cmd\frontmatter at foot@mark\ lays down the footnote device (mark) and takes care of the footnote text.
+% The latter merely involves queueing that text (along with its associated device) into \cmd\@FMN at list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at foot@mark#1#2{%
+ \frontmatter at footnotemark{#1}%
+ \g at addto@macro\@FMN at list{\@TBN at opr{#1}{#2}}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \global\let\@FMN at list\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at footnotemark#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifhmode\edef\@x at sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+ \begingroup
+ \hyper at linkstart {link}{frontmatter.#1}%
+ \csname c@\@mpfn\endcsname#1\relax
+ \def\@thefnmark{\frontmatter at thefootnote}%
+ \@makefnmark
+ \hyper at linkend
+ \endgroup
+ \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x at sf\fi
+ \relax
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{The keywords command}%
+% \begin{macro}{\keywords}
+% \begin{macro}{\@keywords}
+% Usual game, save text in a macro for processing by \cmd\maketitle.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\keywords#1{%
+ \aftermaketitle at chk{\keywords}%
+ \gdef\@keywords{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@keywords\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \cs{date} command and related commands}%
+% \begin{macro}{\date}
+% \begin{macro}{\received}
+% \begin{macro}{\revised}
+% \begin{macro}{\accepted}
+% \begin{macro}{\published}
+% \begin{macro}{\@date}
+% \begin{macro}{\@received}
+% \begin{macro}{\@revised}
+% \begin{macro}{\@accepted}
+% \begin{macro}{\@published}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% Use the \cmd\date\ command to specify the document date,
+% the \cmd\received\ command to specify the date received,
+% \cmd\revised\ for date revised,
+% \cmd\accepted\ for date accepted, and
+% \cmd\published\ for date published.
+% Normally only \cmd\date\ to be used by author,
+% the remainder used only by editors.
+%
+% DPC: As for \cmd\keywords, but this time don't flag a warning if there is no
+% revision date specified.
+%
+% In each case the user-level command defines the value of a
+% macro which buffers the data entered by the user.
+% For instance, \cmd\received\ causes \cmd\@received\ to
+% acquire a value.
+% The optional argument allows the user to override the
+% text that will be typeset along with the date;
+% the default value of that text is itself
+% a localized macro.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\frontmatter at date[2][\Dated at name]{\def\@date{#1#2}}%
+\def\@date{}%
+\newcommand*\received[2][\Received at name]{\def\@received{#1#2}}%
+\def\@received{}%
+\newcommand*\revised[2][\Revised at name]{\def\@revised{#1#2}}%
+\def\@revised{}%
+\newcommand*\accepted[2][\Accepted at name]{\def\@accepted{#1#2}}%
+\def\@accepted{}%
+\newcommand*\published[2][\Published at name]{\def\@published{#1#2}}%
+\def\@published{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The pacs command}%
+% PACS, the Physics and Astronomy Classification Scheme.
+% \begin{macro}{\pacs}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pacs}
+% As for \cmd\keywords\
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\pacs#1{%
+ \aftermaketitle at chk{\pacs}%
+ \gdef\@pacs{#1}%
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@pacs\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{The \cs{preprint} command}
+%
+% \changes{4.0g}{1998/06/10}{multiple preprint commands}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\preprint#1{\gappdef\@preprint{\preprint{#1}}}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{%
+ \let\@preprint\@empty
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The \env{abstract} environment}%
+%
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Gathered all code for the abstract environment together and abstracted out the formatting details for journals to override.}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\absbox}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\absbox
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+% Abstract, as in AMS classes, must be specified \emph{before}
+% \cmd\maketitle. It just saves everything up in \cmd\absbox.
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{If empty \cs{abstractname} omit spacing}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+% Note that the specifics of how the abstract is to be
+% formatted are set by \cmd\frontmatter at abstractwidth,
+% \cmd\frontmatter at abstractheading, and \cmd\frontmatter at abstractfont.
+%
+% Here we wish to set the abstract into type but save it away in a box, much like
+% the \cmd\minipage\ command does.
+%
+% Note that the \cmd\endabstract\ portion of the environment
+% begins with code that mostly duplicates \cmd\endminipage, but without the \cmd\@iiiparbox.
+% At the end, we simply transfer the contents of the \cmd\minipage\
+% into a box of our own.
+%
+% However, we also have to end the gratuitous
+% paragraph begun by \cmd\minipage.
+% We ensure that no trace of that paragraph is left,
+% by absorbing the \cmd\parindent\ box.
+% Doing so destroys the paragraph entirely, except
+% for the \cmd\parskip\ glue, and that morsel is pruned, because we are at the top
+% of a page.
+%
+% This mechanism is vulnerable, however, because anything placed into the horizontal list
+% after the \cmd\parindent\ box will confound it.
+% And that is exactly what happens under Mik\TeX:
+% There seems to be an extension to the \TeX\ standard operating here which inserts a \cmd\special \ at the beginning of every paragraph.
+% (The mechnism is \emph{not} based on \cmd\everypar.)
+%
+% To accomodate this state of affairs,
+% we have a new mechanism that offers an even more complete rewrite of \env{minipage}.
+%
+% Note that an entry is made in the toc for the abstract; this has the side effect
+% of creating a PDF bookmark for this element if the \classname{hyperref} package is in effect.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008-06-30}{(AO, 443) create an entry in the PDF bookmarks for the abstract via the toc}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel at abstract{1}%
+\def\addcontents at abstract{%
+ \phantomsection
+ \expandafter\def\csname Parent0\endcsname{section*.2}%
+ \expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\abstractname}{\addcontentsline{toc}{abstract}}%
+}%
+\newenvironment{frontmatter at abstract}{%
+ \aftermaketitle at chk{\begin{abstract}}%
+ \global\setbox\absbox\vbox\bgroup
+ \color at begingroup
+ \columnwidth\textwidth
+ \hsize\columnwidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line switches footnotes to the \texttt{mpfoootnote} series.
+% This action should rather be taken by \cmd\frontmatter at abstractfont, which can be customized.
+% There is also an interaction with \cmd\mini at note.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}\def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}\c at mpfootnote\z@
+ \let\@footnotetext\frontmatter at footnotetext
+ \minipagefootnote at init
+ \let\set at listindent\set at listindent@
+ \let\@listdepth\@mplistdepth \@mplistdepth\z@
+ \let at environment{description}{frontmatter at description}%
+ \@minipagerestore
+ \@setminipage
+ \frontmatter at abstractheading
+ \frontmatter at abstractfont
+ \let\footnote\mini at note
+ \expandafter\everypar\expandafter{\the\everypar\addcontents at abstract\everypar{}}%
+}{%
+ \par
+ \unskip
+ \minipagefootnote at here
+ \@minipagefalse %% added 24 May 89
+ \color at endgroup
+ \egroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at footnotetext}
+% We reimplement \cmd\@mpfootnotetext\ under a new name (so as not to be overridden by the \classname{hyperref} package)
+% and extend it to accomodate hyperrefs.
+%
+% Note that this procedure is very like \classname{ltxutil}'s \cmd\mp at footnotetext, except that it
+% uses \cmd\frontmatter at makefntext\ instead of \cmd\@makefntext.
+%
+% \changes{4.1f}{2009/07/07}{(AO, 515) Use \cs{set at footnotefont}, which is defined in ltxutil}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 571) allow split after last line of footnote}%
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\frontmatter at footnotetext#1{%
+ \minipagefootnote at pick
+ \set at footnotefont
+ \set at footnotewidth
+ \@parboxrestore
+ \protected at edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@\@mpfn\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+ \color at begingroup
+ \frontmatter at makefntext{%
+ \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox\vadjust{\vskip\z at skip}%
+ }%
+ \color at endgroup
+ \minipagefootnote at drop
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ltx at no@footwarn}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ltx at no@footnote{%
+ \let\ltx at xfootnote\ltx at no@xfootnote\let\ltx at yfootnote\ltx at no@yfootnote
+ \let\ltx at xfootmark\ltx at no@xfootmark\let\ltx at yfootmark\ltx at no@yfootmark
+ \let\ltx at xfoottext\ltx at no@xfoottext\let\ltx at yfoottext\ltx at no@yfoottext
+}%
+\def\ltx at no@xfootnote[#1]#2{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnote}%
+\def\ltx at no@yfootnote#1{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnote}%
+\def\ltx at no@xfootmark[#1]{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotemark}%
+\def\ltx at no@yfootmark{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotemark}%
+\def\ltx at no@xfoottext[#1]#2{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotetext}%
+\def\ltx at no@yfoottext#1{\ltx at no@footwarn\footnotetext}%
+\def\ltx at no@footwarn#1{%
+ \class at warn{%
+ The \string#1\space command is not legal on the title page;
+ using \string\thanks\space instead might suit you: consult the manual for details%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractheading}
+% The default abstract head; journals will override this procedure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractheading{%
+ \begingroup
+ \centering\large
+ \abstractname
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractfont}
+% The default type specification for the body of the abstract.
+% Journals will override this setting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractfont{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{frontmatter at description}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/06/29}{(AO, 455) provide a \texttt{description} environment for the abstract}
+% Within the abstract, the description environment is defined as follows:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{frontmatter at description}{%
+ \list{}{%
+ \leftmargin\z@
+ \labelwidth\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \itemindent-\leftmargin
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \itemindent\z@
+ \let\makelabel\frontmatter at descriptionlabel
+ }%
+}{%
+ \endlist
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at descriptionlabel#1{%
+ \hspace\labelsep
+ \normalfont\bfseries
+ #1:%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstractwidth}
+% The default setting is the full text width;
+% journals can override this setting.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstractwidth{\textwidth}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at abstract@produce}
+% This procedure determines how the abstract is incorporated
+% into the title block. We split this out in anticipation
+% of the need to lift the limitation that the abstract not break over pages.
+%
+% If we are in preprint style, we provide an easy pagebreak point immediately above the abstract.
+% This means that the abstract will either fit entirely on the same page as the title block,
+% or it will start a page of its own (which may itself break onto a subsequent page if necessary).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at abstract@produce{%
+ \par
+ \preprintsty at sw{%
+ \do at output@MVL{%
+ \vskip\frontmatter at preabstractspace
+ \vskip200\p@\@plus1fil
+ \penalty-200\relax
+ \vskip-200\p@\@plus-1fil
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \addvspace{\frontmatter at preabstractspace}%
+ }%
+ \begingroup
+ \dimen@\baselineskip
+ \setbox\z@\vtop{\unvcopy\absbox}%
+ \advance\dimen at -\ht\z@\advance\dimen at -\prevdepth
+ \@ifdim{\dimen@>\z@}{\vskip\dimen@}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \begingroup
+ \prep at absbox
+ \unvbox\absbox
+ \post at absbox
+ \endgroup
+ \@ifx{\@empty\mini at notes}{}{\mini at notes\par}%
+ \addvspace\frontmatter at postabstractspace
+}%
+\appdef\frontmatter at init{\let\mini at notes\@empty}%
+\let\prep at absbox\@empty
+\let\post at absbox\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at preabstractspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at postabstractspace}
+% Space above and space below abstract in title block
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at preabstractspace{.5\baselineskip}
+\def\frontmatter at postabstractspace{.5\baselineskip}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Formatting the title block}%
+%
+% \begin{environment}{titlepage}
+% This is \LaTeXe's \classname{article} class version,
+% with modifications.
+% \changes{4.0c}{1999/11/13}{grid changes with ltxgrid}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Make the syntax of this package switch optional}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{frontmatter at titlepage}{%
+ \twocolumn at sw{\onecolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+ \thispagestyle{titlepage}%
+ \setcounter{page}\@ne
+}{%
+ \twocolumn at sw{\twocolumngrid}{\newpage}%
+ \twoside at sw{}{%
+ \setcounter{page}\@ne
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{hookify}
+% Put it all together to format the title block.
+%
+% Gotcha!
+% If you expand \cmd\csname undefined\cmd\endcsname, you change the meaning of \cmd\undefined\ from
+% ``Undefined'' to \cmd\relax.
+% Watchout!
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at maketitle{%
+ \@author at finish
+ \title at column\titleblock at produce
+ \suppressfloats[t]%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now save some memory.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\and\relax
+ \let\affiliation\@gobble
+ \let\author\@gobble
+ \let\@AAC at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFF at list\@empty
+ \let\@AFG at list\@empty
+ \let\@AF at join\@AF at join@error
+ \let\email\@gobble
+ \let\@address\@empty
+ \let\maketitle\relax
+ \let\thanks\@gobble
+ \let\abstract\@undefined\let\endabstract\@undefined
+ \titlepage at sw{%
+ \vfil
+ \clearpage
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\maketitle at Hy}
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Hyperref compatibility: take \cs{maketitle} back.}
+% We provide the means to take back the definition of \cmd\maketitle\ from \classname{hyperref}:
+% we do not need its help in providing hypertext services in the title page.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\maketitle at Hy{%
+ \let\Hy at saved@footnotemark\@footnotemark
+ \let\Hy at saved@footnotetext\@footnotetext
+ \let\@footnotemark\H@@footnotemark
+ \let\@footnotetext\H@@footnotetext
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ \Hy at maketitle@optarg
+ {%
+ \HyOrg at maketitle
+ \Hy at maketitle@end
+ }%
+}%
+\appdef\class at documenthook{%
+ \@ifx{\maketitle\maketitle at Hy}{%
+ \class at info{Taking \string\maketitle\space back from hyperref}%
+ \let\maketitle\frontmatter at maketitle
+ }{%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\titleblock at produce}
+% This procedure produces the title block.
+%
+% It effectively executes inside a group
+% and always returns us to vertical mode.
+%
+% Note: we assume that it is OK to set the footnote counter to zero at this point.
+% Is this a safe assumption?
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\titleblock at produce{%
+ \begingroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0b}{1999/06/20}{Set \cs{footnote} to \LaTeX\ standard version for this scope.}
+% First, we restore the footnote mechanism to its default state,
+% then we customize the way the footnote mark is produced and how it is formatted.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ltx at footnote@pop
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following three lines establish an independent footnote counter for use in the title block.
+% \changes{4.1n}{2010/01/02}{(AO, 572) Independent footnote counter for title block. Abstract footnote counter shared with body.}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@mpfn{mpfootnote}%
+ \def\thempfn{\thempfootnote}%
+ \c at mpfootnote\z@
+ \let\@makefnmark\frontmatter at makefnmark
+ \frontmatter at setup
+ \thispagestyle{titlepage}\label{FirstPage}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the title:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frontmatter at title@produce
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the author list:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \groupauthors at sw{%
+ \frontmatter at author@produce at group
+ }{%
+ \frontmatter at author@produce at script
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the dates:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frontmatter at RRAPformat{%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@date}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@received}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@revised}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@accepted}%
+ \expandafter\produce at RRAP\expandafter{\@published}%
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Produce the abstract, PACS, and keywords, and end any paragraph.
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Produce PACS, keywords only if specified}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \frontmatter at abstract@produce
+ \@ifx at empty\@pacs{}{%
+ \@pacs at produce\@pacs
+ }%
+ \@ifx at empty\@keywords{}{%
+ \@keywords at produce\@keywords
+ }%
+ \par
+ \frontmatter at finalspace
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@produce}
+% The default formatting procedure for the article title.
+% This procedure should take care of the vertical space below the title.
+%
+% Clients may override this procedure, but it is more likely that they will
+% use the hooks \cmd\frontmatter at title@above, \cmd\frontmatter at title@format, and \cmd\frontmatter at title@below.
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/04}{(AO, 443) PDF Bookmark for title page}%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\toclevel at title{0}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@produce{%
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at title@above
+ \frontmatter at title@format
+ \@title
+ \unskip
+ \phantomsection\expandafter\@argswap at val\expandafter{\@title}{\addcontentsline{toc}{title}}%
+ \@ifx{\@title at aux\@title at aux@cleared}{}{%
+ \expandafter\frontmatter at footnote\expandafter{\@title at aux}%
+ }%
+ \par
+ \frontmatter at title@below
+ \endgroup
+}%
+\appdef\let at mark{\let\\\relax}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@above}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@format}
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at title@below}
+% The default values for formatting specifications for the article title.
+%
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter at title@above\ should take care of the vertical space above the title;
+% \cmd\frontmatter at title@below\ below.
+% The procedure \cmd\frontmatter at title@format\ should invoke any font switches, etc.
+% that may apply to the title.
+%
+% Journals will override this procedure.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at title@above{}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@format{}%
+\def\frontmatter at title@below{\addvspace{\baselineskip}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Authors and affiliations in superscriptaddress style}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at author@produce at script}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce at script\ is an alias for \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce,
+% the procedure that formats the author/affiliation list.
+%
+% In this case, the authors affiliations are being superscripted
+% (class option \classoption{superscriptaddress}).
+%
+% This procedure must ensure that any paragraph that it starts gets ended finally.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at author@produce at script{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@author at present\@author at present@script
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter at author@produce at script:}\say\@AAC at list\say\@AFF at list\say\@AFG at list}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{4.0l}{1998/09/01}{Changes to add collaboration processing, which now means doing comma/and processing on each sublist}
+% When the author/affiliation list \cmd\@AAC at list\ is executed,
+% \cmd\@tempcnt\ counts each author,
+% and
+% \cmd\@tempa\ stores a list of author indices for the current collaboration.
+%
+% Note: this procedure uses \cmd\AU at temp\ to hold a list of author counts for each collaboration.
+% Note: also uses \cmd\@tempcnta\ to communicate between procedures.
+% This usage ot \cmd\@tempcnta\ is OK, because the expansion of \cmd\@AAC at list\ will trigger only the execution of
+% our own procedures.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AU at temp\@empty
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We wish to know how many authors are in each collaboration, for the purposes of \cmd\listcomma\ and \cmd\listand.
+%
+% Here we assign values for the intercollated operators appearing within \cmd\@AAC at list,
+% then execute that macro, registering the authors in each collaboration.
+% Afterwards, clean up by emulating an empty collaboration.
+%
+% The result, stored in \cmd\AU at temp, is a list of brace-delmited tokens, each a number
+% representing the number of authors in that collaboration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AF at opr \@gobble
+ \def\AU at opr{\@author at count\@tempcnta}%
+ \def\CO at opr{\@collaboration at count\AU at temp\@tempcnta}%
+ \@AAC at list
+ \expandafter\CO at opr\@author at cleared
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, present the authors and their affiliations, with the collaborations interleaved.
+%
+% We assign values for the intercollated operators appearing within \cmd\@AAC at list.
+% Next, assign \cmd\@listcomma\ based on the number of authors in the first collaboration.
+% Then expand \cmd\@AAC at list.
+%
+% Upon completion, there will be two space tokens following the last author because of \cmd\listand\ processing;
+% remove them, then end the last paragraph.
+%
+% FIXME: this juncture would be a good time to effectively eliminate
+% the unused affiliations in \cmd\@AFF at list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at authorformat
+ \let\AF at opr \@affilID at def
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at present
+ \def\CO at opr{\@collaboration at present\AU at temp}%
+ \set at listcomma@list\AU at temp
+ \@AAC at list
+ \unskip\unskip
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We now list out the affiliations in the order they appeared.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at above@affiliation at script
+ \let\AFF at opr \@affil at script
+ \@AFF at list
+ \frontmatter at footnote@produce
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at count}
+% This version of \cmd\AU at opr\ counts the number of authors it processes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at count#1{%
+ \advance#1\@ne
+ \@author at gobble
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration at present}
+% Format a collaboration.
+% Note that we immediately end the paragraph thus begun, because we only support
+% \classoption{superscriptaddress}-style processing.
+%
+% Note also that the execution of the production procedures takes place inside of a group;
+% for reasons of protective programming.
+%
+% Bug note: originally, the number of authors in each collaboration was stored in \cmd\@tempa,
+% but this exposed us to procedures in our production that modified the meaning of \cmd\@tempa.
+%
+% The last action done in this procedure is to assign \cmd\@listcomma\ based on the number of authors in the next collaboration.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration at present#1#2#3#4{%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at collaboration@above
+ \@affilID at def{}%
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+ \@author at present{}{(\ignorespaces#3\unskip)}{#4}%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \set at listcomma@list#1%
+}%
+\def\frontmatter at collaboration@above{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@collaboration at count}
+% Simply register each author in this collaboration.
+% Note: \#1 is a \cmd\csname\ to hold the value, \#2 is the \cmd\count\ register holding the count of interest.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@collaboration at count#1#2{%
+ \appdef at eval#1{\the#2}#2\z@
+ \@author at gobble
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at def}
+%
+% The \cmd\@affilID at def\ procedure, an alias of \cmd\AF at opr\ used during \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce at script\ processing,
+% memorizes the affiliation in \cmd\@affilID at temp.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affilID at def{\def\@affilID at temp}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at temp}
+%
+% The macro \cmd\@affilID at temp\ is used to communicate between
+% \cmd\doauthor\ and instances of \cmd\AF at opr\ within the author list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@affilID at temp\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affils at present@script}
+% An alias of \cmd\AFG at opr, this procedure is applied to elements in \cmd\@AFG at list.
+% It builds \cmd\@AFU at list, a list of unique affiliations found within affiliation groups.
+%
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\affils at present@script#1{%
+% \get at affil#1{}%
+%}%
+%\def\get at affil#1{%
+% \def\@tempa{#1}%
+% \@ifx{\@empty\@tempa}{}{%
+% \@booleanfalse\temp at sw
+% \def\AF at opr{\x at match\@tempa}%
+% \@AFU at list
+% \temp at sw{}{%
+% \appdef\@AFU at list{\AF at opr{#1}}%
+% }%
+% \get at affil
+% }%
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil at present@script}
+% An alias of \cmd\AF at opr, this procedure is applied to \cmd\@AFU at list\ when formatting the affiliations
+% under \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% It in turn applies \cmd\affil at script\ to \cmd\@AFF at list, thereby formatting the affiliation
+% associated with this affiliation index.
+%
+% Note: it traverses the \cmd\@AFF at list\ for each entry in the \cmd\@AFU at list, thereby making this
+% portion of code execute in $N^{2}$ time.
+% \changes{4.1a}{2008/06/16}{removed code that had been commented out}
+% \begin{verbatim}
+%\def\affil at present@script#1{%
+% \def\@tempa{#1}%
+% \begingroup
+% \frontmatter at affiliationfont
+% \let\AFF at opr \affil at script
+% \@AFF at list
+% \endgroup
+%}%
+% \end{verbatim}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affil at script}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFF at opr, this procedure is applied to \cmd\@AFF at list\ when formatting the affiliations
+% under \classoption{superscriptaddress}.
+% It rejects all entries not matching the affiliation index held in \cmd\@tempa.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\affil at script#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#1}\@ifx{\@tempifx\@tempa}{%
+ \@if at empty{#2}{}{%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \def\@thefnmark{#1}\@makefnmark\ignorespaces
+ #2%
+ \@if at empty{#3}{}{\frontmatter at footnote{#3}}%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at script}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFF at opr:
+% The affiliations are being formatted in the case
+% where affiliations are being superscripted:
+% make a list out of the affiliations with the numbers printed.
+% Society-specific code can change the formatting
+% by overriding the definition of \cmd\frontmatter at affiliationfont.
+%
+% A client may choose to set \cmd\affil at cutoff\ to either \cmd\@ne\ (the default)
+% or \cmd\tw at . The latter setting will enforce a rule to the effect that
+% if a single affiliation appears on the title page,
+% then no affiliation superscript at all is produced.
+%
+% |#1|---Affiliation ID: a number; zero signifies a \cmd\noaffiliation.
+%
+% |#2|---Collaboration ID
+%
+% |#3|---Affiliation address
+%
+% |#4|---Auxiliary info
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at script#1#2#3#4{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the affiliation is the \cmd\noaffiliation, then we do nothing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{#1=\z@}{}{%
+ \par
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at affiliationfont
+ \@ifnum{\c at affil<\affil at cutoff}{}{%
+ \def\@thefnmark{#1}\@makefnmark
+ }%
+ \ignorespaces#3%
+ \@if at empty{#4}{}{\frontmatter at footnote{#4}}%
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ }%
+}%
+\let\affil at cutoff\@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at present@script}
+% \changes{4.0h}{1998/06/25}{Changes to support groups of affiliations}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle \cs{noaffiliation} case}
+% This version of \cmd\AU at opr\ applies to the \classoption{superscriptaddress} class option.
+% Need to add commas between groups
+% of address numbers, which are passed in the macro \cmd\@affilID at temp\ in the form
+% |{3}{4}{7}| if this set of authors is related to addresses, 3, 4 and 7.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@author at present@script#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+ \gdef\comma at space{\textsuperscript{,\,}}%
+ \doauthor{#2}{#3}{\@affil at present@script}%
+ \endgroup
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m at ne
+}%
+\def\@affilcomma#1#2{%
+ \@ifx{\z@#1}{%
+ \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+ \@affilcomma{#2}%
+ }%
+ }{%
+ #1%
+ \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+ \@ifx{\z@#2}{%
+ \@affilcomma
+ }{%
+ ,\,\@affilcomma{#2}%
+ }%
+ }%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at present@script}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at present@script@}
+% \changes{4.1n}{2009/11/30}{(AO, 567) Handle punctuation for \classoption{superscriptaddress} style authors' extra information, such as \cs{email}}
+% The \cmd\@affil at present@script\ procedure presents the reference to the affiliations in the case of superscript addresses.
+%
+% The affiliations are presented to \cmd\@affil at present@script@ as a list of brace-delimited tokens, each containing the affiliation ID (a number).
+% The list is terminated by the token \cmd\relax.
+% The macro recurses (via tail recursion) until the terminating token is encountered.
+% Note that an affiliation ID of zero signifies a \cmd\noaffiliation:
+% references to the \cmd\noaffiliation\ are passed over.
+%
+% Upon termination, the affiliations, if any, are produced via \cmd\textsuperscript\ and the appropriate boolean is queued via \cmd\aftergroup.
+% The boolean signifies that a non-trivial affiliation was produced, so that the proper punctuation can be produced.
+% The group in question is that opened and closed by the \cmd\doauthor\ procedure.
+%
+% This procedure uses \cmd\@tempa\ as a scratch register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at present@script{%
+ \let\@tempa\@empty
+ \expandafter\@affil at present@script@\@affilID at temp\relax
+}%
+\def\@affil at present@script@#1{%
+ \@ifx{\relax#1}{%
+ \@ifx{\@tempa\@empty}{%
+ \aftergroup\false at sw
+ }{%
+ \textsuperscript{\expandafter\@affilcomma\@tempa\relax\relax}%
+ \aftergroup\true at sw
+ }%
+ }{%
+ \@ifnum{#1=\z@}{}{\appdef\@tempa{{#1}}}%
+ \@affil at present@script@
+ }%
+}%
+\@provide\@author at parskip{\z at skip}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsubsection{Authors and affiliations in groupedaddress style}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\frontmatter at author@produce at group}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Alias for \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce when \classoption{groupedaddress} is in effect,
+% the procedure that formats the author/affiliation list.
+%
+% In this case, the authors are being grouped above their shared addresses.
+% How it works: the \cmd\@AFG at list, a list of all unique affiliation groups, is expanded.
+% For each such group, all authors belonging to that group are formatted above the affiliation group.
+% Collaborations are silently passed over.
+%
+% This procedure must ensure that any paragraph that it starts gets ended finally.
+% \changes{4.1i}{2009/10/18}{(AO, 540) More runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \changes{4.1m}{2009/11/20}{(AO, 563) More complete runtime diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\frontmatter at author@produce at group{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\@author at present\@author at present@group
+ \frontmatter at authorformat
+ \frontmatterverbose at sw{\typeout{\string\frontmatter at author@produce at group:}\say\@AAC at list\say\@AFF at list\say\@AFG at list}{}%
+ \let\AU at temp\@empty
+ \set at listcomma@list\AU at temp
+ \def\CO at opr{\@collaboration at present\AU at temp}%
+ \let\AFG at opr \affils at present@group
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ \@AFG at list
+ \frontmatter at footnote@produce
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+ \frontmatter at authorbelow
+}%
+\@provide\frontmatter at authorbelow{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\affils at present@group}
+% \changes{4.1b}{2008/08/02}{Provide for diagnostics via \cs{frontmatterverbose at sw}}
+% Alias of \cmd\AFG at opr, this procedure is used on every element of
+% \cmd\@AFG at list, the list of unique affiliation groups,
+% when formatting the author/affiliation block:
+% It presents all authors sharing this affiliation group.
+%
+% This procedure is called via the procedure
+% \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce at group, an alias for \cmd\frontmatter at author@produce,
+%
+% Its use pertains to the class options
+% \classoption{groupedaddress}, \classoption{unsortedaddress}, and \classoption{runinaddress}
+% (that is, \cmd\groupauthors at sw\ is true).
+%
+% For each invocation, the entire \cmd\@AAC at list\ is run through (twice),
+% making this process execute in $N^{2}$ time. (Is this really true?)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\affils at present@group#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Count (using \cmd\@tempcnta) the authors in the author list whose affiliation group
+% matches the argument |#1|.
+%
+% Note that \cmd\AF at temp\ is used as a storage register for the argument
+% of the procedure, for purposes of comparison using \cmd\ifx.
+%
+% Note: here we use \cmd\@tempcnta\ to accumulate the number of authors in the current affiliation set.
+%
+% QUERY: do the value of \cmd\AF at temp\ and \cmd\AF at opr\ need to persist?
+%
+% QUERY: what value does \cmd\AU at opr\ have at this point?
+% ANSWER: the \cmd\@affilID at count\ and \cmd\@affilID at match\ procedures
+% assign meanings to \cmd\AU at opr\ and \cmd\CO at opr\ dynamically.
+% We initialize the two operators to \cmd\@undefined\ so as to catch the
+% pathological cases.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\AF at temp{#1}%
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+ \let\AU at opr \@undefined
+ \let\CO at opr \@undefined
+ \def\AF at opr{\@affilID at count\AF at temp\@tempcnta}%
+ \@AAC at list
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% If there are no authors using this affiliation group, skip it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\z@}{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% DPC: If we have a list of length two, need to locally zap a comma.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \frontmatter at above@affilgroup
+ \set at listcomma@count\@tempcnta
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Run through the author list, presenting (with \cmd\@author at present)
+% those authors whose affiliation matched the given one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\AU at opr \@undefined
+ \let\CO at opr \@undefined
+ \def\AF at opr{\@affilID at match\AF at temp}%
+ \@AAC at list
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now that the authors have all been presented, present the affiliations, grouped.
+%
+% Note: \cmd\@tempcnta\ is the number of affiliations for this set of authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \par
+ \frontmatter at above@affiliation
+ \frontmatter at affiliationfont
+ \let\\\frontmatter at addressnewline
+ \@tempcnta\z@
+ \@tfor\AF at temp:=#1\do{%
+ \expandafter\@ifx\expandafter{\expandafter\z@\AF at temp}{}{%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ }%
+ }%
+ \@ifnum{\@tempcnta=\tw@}{%
+ \let\@listcomma\relax
+ }{}%
+ \def at after@address
+ \runinaddress at sw{%
+ }{%
+ \tightenlines at sw{}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following line determines the space between affilations in grouped mode
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \parskip\z@
+ }%
+ \appdef\after at address\par
+ }%
+ \let\AFF at opr \@affil at group
+ \do at affil@fromgroup\@AFF at list#1\relax
+ \endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% End of branch handling authors.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\def at after@address}
+% \begin{macro}{\def at after@address at empty}
+% \changes{4.1c}{2008/08/04}{Parametrize the production after the address}%
+%
+% Each of these procedures assigns a meaning to \cmd\after at address, the first
+% a useful default, the second a nil.
+% A society or journal substyle may define it according to its own requirements.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\def at after@address{\def\after at address{\@listcomma\ \@listand}}%
+\def\def at after@address at empty{\let\after at address\@empty}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at count}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affilID at match}
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AF at opr\ is placed in the
+% author/affiliation list (\cmd\@AAC at list) for each (new) affiliation, with that affiliation as its argument.
+%
+% The control sequence name \cmd\AF at opr\ is an alias of a procedure
+% to count the number of authors at a given affiliation (\cmd\@affilID at count)
+% or to present the given authors (\cmd\@affilID at match).
+% These two procedures are executed when formatting under the \classoption{groupedaddress} class option.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affilID at count#1#2#3{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#3}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \def\AU at opr{\@author at count#2}%
+ }{%
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at gobble
+ }%
+ \let\CO at opr \@collaboration at gobble
+}%
+\def\@affilID at match#1#2{%
+ \def\@tempifx{#2}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempifx#1}{%
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at present
+ }{%
+ \let\AU at opr \@author at gobble
+ }%
+ \let\CO at opr \@collaboration at gobble
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\do at affil@fromgroup}
+% Executes iteratively:
+% selects the next address ID to print,
+% and then re-execute the list of addresses to print the text of that address.
+%
+% Note: an argument of \cmd\relax\ breaks out of this iteration,
+% while an argument of \cmd\z@\ (\cmd\noaffiliation) is a no-op.
+%
+% Note: we have created an $N^{2}$ computing process.
+% FIXME: can use hashing instead, you know.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\do at affil@fromgroup#1#2{%
+ \@ifx{\relax#2}{}{%
+ \count@#2\relax
+ \@ifnum{\z@=\count@}{}{#1}%
+ \do at affil@fromgroup#1%
+ }%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at group}
+% The alias of \cmd\AFF at opr\ when the list \cmd\@AFF at list\
+% is executed by \cmd\do at affil@fromgroup\ (\classoption{groupedaddress}):
+% Print the address if its number matches \cmd\count@\ (value set by \cmd\do at affil@fromgroup).
+%
+% Note that we detect a \cmd\noaffiliation\ here by the affiliation address being
+% the same as the expansion of \cmd\blankaffiliation.
+%
+% \changes{4.1d}{2008/10/17}{(AO, 410) compare \cs{@tempa} to \cs{blankaffiliation}.}%
+%
+% I made a mistake when coding the comparison to \cmd\blankaffiliation:
+% it originally read \cmd\@ifx\{\#3\cmd\blankaffiliation\}.
+% This is obviously wrong once you think twice.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@affil at group#1#2#3#4{%
+ \@ifnum{#1=\count@}{%
+ \def\@tempa{#3}%
+ \@ifx{\@tempa\blankaffiliation}{}{%
+ #3%
+ \@if at empty{#4}{}{%
+ \frontmatter at footnote{#4}%
+ }%
+ \after at address
+ }%
+ \advance\@tempcnta\m at ne
+ }{}%
+}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@author at present@group}
+% \begin{macro}{\@affil at present@group}
+% \changes{4.0d}{1998/01/31}{\cs{comma at spac